The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 2000-R0415 - BID #228-00_RS - Small Arms Range Facility (Facilities Management) - 11_07_2000Resolution No. 2000-RO415 November 7, 2000 Item No. 45 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility per ITB #228-00/RS, by and between the City of Lubbock and Lubbock Building Services, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 7th day of November , 2000. WINDY SITtbN, MAYOR ATTEST. Kaythi Darnell, City Secretary ` `G i APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilman, Aurchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas' Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney Gs:/ccdocs./Lubbock Services,Inc. 102500 i BOND "NECK BEST RATING LICENSED IN TEXAS DAE ^ T�l( wo{ ' c 0.. ---- CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY BID #00-228 " A City Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas ITB #00-228, Addendum #7 ease City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #7 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility MAILED TO VENDOR: October 19,2000 OLD CLOSE DATE: October 19, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. NEW CLOSE DATE: October 24, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. SPECIFICATIONS Item No. 1 (RE: SECTION 11890 — SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT) Section 11890, Clarification to paragraph 2.02, subparagraph B-2.0 as follows: C. Delete the words ."...adjacent to the local control for the target system..." There are no local controls for Target System. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 00-228add7 ITB #00-228, Addendum #6 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING n 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us r ADDENDUM #6 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility MAILED TO VENDOR: October 18,2000 OLD CLOSE DATE: October 19, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. NEW CLOSE DATE: October 24, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. Section 2670-New Water Well 1.03 General Requirements Diameter of drilled hole shall be 9". Total depth to Red Bed is 160' . Therefore the well shall begin 5' from bottom of formation, have a 40' well screen, a 15' gravel pack with a Bentonite seal and the remaining depth of 100' to the ground surface. 2.02 Well Screens Well screen shall be a 50,000 stainless steel screen with a 5" O.D. 2.03 Gravel Pack Gravel pack shall be an 8-16 gravel pack produced by Oglebay Norton Industrial Sands or approved Equal. Gravel pack shall be 15' above the well screen and shall be contained by a Bentonite seal 2.04 Construction of Gravel Pack D. Omit the gravel conductor pipe from this project. E. Omit the 2" grout Pipe from this project Omit the 2" Level Monitoring steel pipe 3.03 Concrete Slab Wellhead In place of the specified wellhead slab a 1-1/2" pittless adapter is acceptable for this project. Piping should enter the building floor slab before the line is connected to the Liquid Chlorination System. Section 2673-Sumbersible Well Pump 2.01 Submersible Pump A. Operating Conditions Flow = 25 gpm TDH = 300' Horsepower = 2-3.5 Minimum pump efficiency = 50% 00-228add6 ma ITB #00-228, Addendum #6 * Note that Hp depends on pump efficiency achieved B. Pump Construction Pump shall consist of a 4" Goulds type 18GS30432 - 25 gpm pump or approved equal. *230 volt pump will require a buck booster transformer Submersible Electric Motor Motor shall consist of a 4" Franklin Electric Motor 230 volt/ 3 phase All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBaOCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 00-228add6 ITB #00-228, Addendum #5 P" City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TM STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164 hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #5 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility MAILED TO VENDOR: October 13, 2000 CLOSE DATE: October 19, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find enclosed the specifications for section 15010, 15065, 15094, 15105, 15220, 15301, 15450, 15829, 15840, 15870 not included in Addendum #2. .All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUB OCK Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 00-228add5 V 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the term "Mechanical Contractor" appears in this Division of the Specifications, it is to be construed as referring as being both individually and collectively to the air conditioning / heating Contractors. B. Any reference to the "Architect/Engineer" shall mean Contracting Officer. C. Any reference to the "Owner" shall mean Mansfield Independent School District. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Before submitting a Proposal, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the rules of all governing boards having jurisdiction, and shall notify the Owner before submitting a Proposal, if in his opinion, any Work or material specified is contrary to such rules; otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for the approval of all Work or materials at no extra cost to the Owner, and in the use of any material specified is not permitted, a substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no extra cost. B. Work shall conform to the latest edition of the following: 1. Local Mechanical and Building Codes. 2. Requirements of Electric Utilities Departments having local jurisdiction. 3. U.L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 4. I.E.E.E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. s� 6. A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing and Materials. 7. N.E.MA. National Electrical Manufacturing Association. •- 8. A.S.M.E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 9. O.S.H.A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 10. 10. N.F.C. National Fire Code. -+ 11. 11. A.R.I. American Refrigeration Institute. 12. 12. N.F.P.A. National Fire Protection Association. 13. 13. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, Air "^ Cond. Engineers 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor of Work specified herein is required to have engaged in mechanical .w contracting business for a minimum of two (2) years to Proposal date and be prepared to show evidence and references if required by Owner. �., B. It will be assumed that the Contractor, by submitting a Proposal, has become familiar with all regulatory agencies listed above and that the Work will be performed accordingly. 1.07 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. All Work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year for the date of final acceptance. Purchase and supply an additional Manufacturer's warranty on all components cover by such. B. Any material failing to give satisfactory service during the guarantee period shall be replaced with new materials. Guarantee shall include the replacement of materials, equipment, oil, refrigerant, and labor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF WORK A. All work may possibly take place while building is occupied. Proper precautions will be taken to insure the safety of the occupants. 1.09 SITE INVESTIGATION A. The Contractor is to visit the site and ascertain conditions to be met there in installing the Work and make due provisions for same in the Proposal. 1. It will be assumed that the Contractor in submitting a Proposal has visited the site and that the Proposal covers all Work necessary. 2. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for omission or faulty installation of any Work or for payment of extra compensation of Work covered by specifications and plans. B. Locations and elevations of utilities shown on plan have been obtained from site utility plans, existing plans, and site inspection. The Contractor shall examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall be adequately informed as to their relationship to the Work before entering into a contract. 1.10 SAFETY STANDARDS A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state and federal laws, School District Building and Site-Desian Safetv Reauirements includine OSHA and NFPA codes and standards. .n r 2. Where details are not shown, they shall be constructed according to the recommendations of the Manufacturer of the respective equipment and with the approval of the Architect. 3. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured in galvanized steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with a suitable plate at bottom end of the sleeve to hold the bolt. Allow one inch (1") below the equipment bases for alignment, leveling and grouting. 4. Grouting shall be done after the equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the foundation bolts shall be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmied, if necessary. 5. After removal of the forms, the surface of the foundation shall be rubbed. 6. Unless otherwise noted, foundations shall be six (6") inches high. Reinforcing n shall be #3 bars at six (6") inches on center each way unless indicated otherwise. 3.03 OPENINGS IN FIRE AND SMOKE -RATED FLOORS AND WALLS A. All openings in fire and smoke -rated floors and walls, shall be completely sealed roll after ducts and piping installation for a completely air -tight fire rated installation. Seal including fire dampers shall be non-combustible and UL approved and rated. 3.04 SLEEVES A. Where concealed pipes pass through partitions, walls, and floors, provide galvanized steel pipe sleeves of sizes to readily accommodate pipe, or pipe plus insulation. .�. 1. For vertical pipes and conduit through concrete beams, provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe. B. Pipe projecting through structure to be made water -tight. 3.05 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Equipment bases for all HVAC equipment shall be provided for by the Contractor as detailed on the plans. The Contractor shall support all items with necessary equipment to be directly supported on roof. 3.06 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted, provide and install chrome -plated sectional floor and ceiling plates around pipes passing exposed through walls, floors and ceilings. B. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 6 SFPTFMRFR ii MAn C;FNFRAT. MPMANTrAL PROVISIONS B. Where mechanical Work occurs in masonry walls, the installation shall be = sufficiently complete in advance of construction. 1. Fittings, appurtenances, etc., shall be installed in such a manner and at such locations as to avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry units. 2. Work erected in advance of masonry shall be securely supported, permanently braced and held in position to prevent displacement. Cutting and fitting of masonry around properly located equipment will be done by masons. 3. Place Work located in partitions or ceilings ahead of the construction, with equipment wired in place. 4. The Subcontractors shall have a representative on the job during all concrete pours to insure that all of the equipment is adequately supported and protected and will not be adversely affected by such operations. C. Cooperate with the local utility companies in such a manner that the installation of all services proceeds in an orderly manner, and meets all requirements of the specific companies involved. 3.12 SUPERVISION A. All Work in connection with this Contract will be under the supervision and to the entire satisfaction of the Owner or an authorized representative who shall determine all questions as to the satisfactory completion of the Work, or any part thereof, and defects to be remedied. B. The Contractor shall give personal attention to all parts of the Work and shall employ only skilled and reliable Workers in the performance thereof. They shall accord the Owner the right to decide upon and discontinue the services of any Worker who does not possess satisfactory skill and qualifications, or its otherwise objectionable. 3.13 PARTS LIST AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At the close of the job, 30 days prior to final review, four bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect and Owner for review and acceptance. 1. Equipment warranties. 2. Contractor's warranty. 3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment with names and addresses of Manufacturers. 4. Operating Instructions (in writing). 5. Balance and Test readings. 6. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the systems. 7. As -built equipment shop drawings, all cuts and capacity information. B. Brochures shall be bound, indexed and tabbed, referencing items to the plans and specifications regarding locations of equipment and materials. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15010 - 8 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 3.19 ACCESSIBILITY A. All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access (such as drain pans, drains, fire dampers, control dampers, control operators, motors, drives, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced, rest, replaced or recalibrated, etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. 1. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the general Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. 2. If this consultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested. 3.20 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the proper H " operation, maintenance, lubrication and general operating requirements of the system. A certificate stating the date shall be submitted so the Architect prior to final acceptance of the Work. B. The Contractor shall conduct start-up and operating test of each major item of equipment in accordance with Section 15050 - Testing and Balancing. 1. During The operating text, the Contractor shall operate each item of equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. At least seven days notice shall be given to the Engineer prior to Equipment start-up and operating test. 3. All test and balance reports required in Section 15050 shall be presented to the Engineer prior to these tests. 4. In addition, the "catalog data" called for shall be available prior to the test being made. 3.21 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. The Contractor shall inform the General Contractor of the location and size required. 1. The Contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joist unless shown on the Architectural or Structural drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. 2. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded. B. Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the general Contractor (roofer). (Curbs and counter flashing shall be by the Contractor.) C. Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15010 - 10 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS drawings, the subcontractor shall properly allow for this in his installation and price. PART 2 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS AND MATERIAL A. Domestic Underground Piping Exterior and Under Slab: Above Ground within Building: B. Sanitary Water and Vent within Building: Option Option C. Underground Storm Drainage: D. Gas Pipe: E. Condensate Drain F. Storm Drain Piping in Building Option Type K, Soft Copper annealed temper. Type L, hard drawn temper, wrought copper, soldered joint fittings. PVC; Cast iron soil pipe. Copper DWV. Galvanized steel (vents only) Same as Sanitary for both inside and outside building. Schedule 40 black steel. Type M Copper. Black steel Schedule 40, welded connections. Cast iron drainage pipe with hub joints or Victaulic couplings. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. Copper Pipe: Type K, L, and M Copper pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI H23.1. B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 1. Cast iron Soil pipe shall be service weight cast soft pipe ASTM-A-74 with neoprene gasket compression joints. 2. Where allowed by local coed "No Hub" neoprene sleeve and stainless steel band and clamp type joints will be allowed except underneath slabs. C. PVC Drainage Pipe: Drainage piping shall be poly -vinyl chloride drainage waste and vent piping ASTM-D-2665-73. Sanitary drainage pattern fitting shall be used throughout. Install in complete accordance with IAMPOIS 9-75. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS B. Provide hanger rods and loops or sleeves, to support the pipe at the height and grade required for proper drainage and air elimination. C. Welding: 1. In general, black steel piping systems 2 1/2" in size and larger may be welded construction using either oxyacetylene or electric arc methods. 2. All welding shall be done by first class pipe welders meeting qualifications covered by the American Standard Code for Pressure Piping (ASA B31.1). Welding shall conform to the standards and requirements of this code and all applicable state and local codes. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require qualifying demonstrations of any welder assigned to the job by this contractor. 3. Except as specified otherwise, changes in direction, intersection of lines, and reductions in pipe size shall be made with factory -fabricated welding fittings. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching or straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction will not be permitted. Welding fittings for steel piping shall be wrought carbon steel butt -weld fittings conforming to ASTM specification No. A234 and ANSI standard B16.9 Weld fittings shall be standard weight. 4. Piping shall be cut smooth, square and burrs removed with a reamer before welding is begun. Welding electrodes shall be of the material compatible with the piping material used and shall be coated and of the diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of work being done. Chill or back up rings will not be permitted. All welds shall be carefully chipped and thoroughly brushed clean after each pass. 5. In no case shall Schedule 40 pipe be welded with less than three (3) passes including one (1) tack, one (1) filler, and one (1) lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than four (4) passes including one (1) tack, two (2) filler, and one (1) lacer. 6. Galvanized pipe shall not be joined by weld. 7. Care shall be exercised for safety and fire protection during on -site field welding. 8. Welded pipe joints or connections shall be subjected to tests with hydrostatic pressure. Initial test pressure shall be 50% of normal system pressure or 50 psig, whichever is the greatest. This pressure being maintained until each welded joint has received the hammer test. The weight of the hammer shall be approximately two pounds and should be hammered around the entire welded joint. Final test at 250 psig or one and one-half times the systenfs operating pressure, whichever is the greatest and maintained a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection to be made of all joints and connections. o.,r:— „F �n%y •inAIA ;Q nozicP fnr ;tc rPiPrttinn emmnlete removal and r. rewelding. 3. Gaskets used shall be ring form, dimensioned to fit accurately within the bolt circle, shall be 1/16" thick, and shall be machine -cut. Inside diameter shall conform to the nominal pipe size. 4. Bolts used shall be square head carbon steel bolts with semifinished hexagon nuts of ASTM A307-90 Grade B. Bolts shall each have a tensile strength of not less than 60,000 psi. 5. Flat -faced flanges shall be furnished where required to match flanges on check valves, strainers, pumps and other equipment. H. Grooved Joints: 1. Grooved black iron or steel pipe may be cut or hydraulically grooved; however, galvanized iron pipe shall only be hydraulically grooved. 2. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings, butterfly and check valves and mechanical - T stub -ins, as manufactured by the Victaulic Company, may be used for piping systems and connecting mechanical equipment in lieu of welded, and/or chilled, and fire protection water systems, in piping 4" and over. ' 3. Piping materials for grooved pipe shall be standard weight black steel grade pipe conforming to ASTM Specification A53, Grade B, Type E or S, or ASTM Specification A120, Type E or S, standard square cut grooved to coupling manufacturer's specifications. 4. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 75, 77, HP 70 and Style 07, "Zero -Flex" rigid type for grooved and pipe. Couplings segments shall be cast of ma1L1,1e iron rnnfnrmina to ASTM A-47 or ductile iron conforming to 2. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size. L. Expansion/Contraction: 1. Piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and in such a manner as to excessive strain and stress in the piping, in connection and in equipment to which piping is connected. Provide expansion loop and pipe anchor as required. Anchor should be located near beams or joist. M. Painting: 1. Refer to Section 15010 -General Mechanical Provisions. N. Insulating Bussings: 1. Insulating bussing to separate copper and galvanized and/or black steel pipe, at all points with cast iron water pipe, copper, galvanized or black steel pipe rise up out of ground on house side of gas meter and elsewhere as required. O. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals Installation: 1. Provide pipe sleeve of galvanized steel at each wall or floor penetration. Sleeve shall be no lighter than 18 gauge and shall be built into the wall or floor during construction of the wall. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeve shall allow for insulation thickness. 2. Wall sleeves shall be even with both sides of the finished wall. 3. Floor sleeves shall project approximately 1/2" above the finished floor and be even with the underside of the ' floor. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place or permanently sealed into the floor structure to prevent any water on the floor above from the following pipe system. P. Escutcheons Installation: 1. Install escutcheons on piping through walls and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view. 2. Install escutcheons on exterior of building on piping penetrations through walls. 3. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole and is flush with adjoining surface. 4. Escutcheons for small pipes may be spring clip type. Escutcheons for larger pipes shall be held by set screws. Q. Cleaning and Treating of Pipe Systems 1. Every pipe system shall be cleaned to remove trash, mill scale, cutting oil, and welding and burning splatter from the lines before any control devices are installed. If such debris has collected in valves, the valves shall be disassembled and cleaned prior to closing for the first time. 2. After several hours of operation, each strainer shall be blown down. This shall be repeated as often as necessary to produce a clean discharge from the blowdown. Prior to turning system over to the owner, every strainer shall be removed and cleaned. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15065 - 8 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS 6W PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Provide an adequate pipe suspension system in accordance with recognized .� Engineering practices, using, where possible, standard, commercially accepted pipe hangers and accessories. B. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping, B 31.1 and Manufacturer's Standardization Society documents MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. C. The pipe hanger assembly must be capable of supporting the line in all operating conditions. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each hanger in order to prevent excessive stress in either pipe or connected equipment. Where references below refer to "Type," there references shall be to Federal Specification WW-171. Where reference is to "Figure," it shall be to Fee & Mason designations used in their catalog. Equivalent products by Grinnell and others are acceptable. 1. Concrete Inserts - Where piping is supported from a concrete structure, inserts shall be type 18 or 19, or structural shapes where provided where a continuous insert is required. Where support rod size exceeds 7/8" diameter or where the pipe load exceeds the recommended load for the insert, use two inserts with a trapeze -type connecting member below the concrete. 2. Beam Clamps - Where piping is to be supported from structural steel, beam clamps, type 21, 28, 29, 60, or 31 shall be used. Beam clamp selections shall be on the basis of the required load to be supported. Where welded beam attachments are required, they shall be Figure 90, 131, 251, or 256. Holes drilled in structural steel for hanger support rods will not be permitted. 3. Riser Clamps - All vertical runs of piping shall be supported at each floor, and/or at specified intervals, by means of type 8 clamp for steel pipe, or Figure 368 clamp for copper tubing. For riser loadings in excess of the maximum recommended loads shown for the above items, clamps shall be designed in accordance with Figure 395 or 396. 4. Hanger Rods - Hanger fords shall be A.S.T.M. A-107 continuous threaded rod. Eye rods shall be Figures 288 and 228 WL. Where hanger rod sizes are catalog listed for a specified hanger, these sizes shall govern. Where hanger rod sizes are not listed, the load on the hanger shall be the determining factor listed, the load on the hanger shall be the determining factor, and the maximum recommended hanger rod load as shown below shall govern. 5. Hanger Rod Loading - Maximum hanger rod load shall not exceed: Rod Diameter Maximum Load 3/8" 610 pounds 1/2" 1130 pounds LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 I5094 - 2 HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES n The type 41 shield shall be applied to distribute the hanger load over the insulation and to eliminate damage to the vapor barrier on the covering. f. Base supports shall be type 39. 8. Brackets and Racks - Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns, welded steel brackets, types 32, 33 and 34 shall be used as base supports. Multiple pipe racks or trapeze hangers shall be fabricated from channel and accessories designed for this purpose. 9. Spring Hangers - Spring hangers shall be installed at hanger points where vertical thermal movement occurs. For light loads and non -critical movements in excess of 1/4" , type 49, 50, or 51 variable spring supports shall be used. 10. Critical Systems - On critical systems, where movement is in excess of 1/2" constant supports, type 52 shall be used. For vibration and/or shock loadings, use Figure 470, 471 or 472 sway braces. Where it is necessary to reduce pipe vibration and sound transmission to building steel, Figure 403 or 404 vibration control hangers shall be used. 11. Anchors, Guides, Sliding Supports - Anchors shall be installed as shown on the piping drawings. They may be Figure 140, 141, or 159. Guides shall be Figure 120, 121, 122, or 165. Sliding supports shall be Figure 143 or 145. 12. Auxiliary Steel - All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall receive one shop coat of primer paint. 2.02 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide pipe sleeve of galvanized steel at each wall or floor penetration. Sleeve shall be no lighter than 18 gauge and shall be built into the wall or floor during construction of the wall. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeve shall allow for insulation thickness. B. Wall sleeves shall be even with both sides of the finished wall. C. Floor sleeves shall project approximately 1/2" above the finished floor and be even with the underside of the floor. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place or permanently sealed into the floor structure to prevent any water on the floor above from - - following the pipe system. 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide escutcheon on each side of wall or floor penetrations to provide a finished appearance. For insulated pipes, the escutcheons shall surround the outside of the insulation. B. Escutcheons'for small pipes may be spring clip type. Escutcheons for larger pipes shall be held by set screws. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15094 - 4 HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES r-a PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Provide and install all valves that are shown on the drawings and/or specified hereinafter. B. Water supplies to every plumbing fixture specified hereinafter or provided and installed by others and to every item of equipment to be equipped with shut-off or stop valves. C. Where valves have discs, are to be selected for intended service using those materials recommended by manufacturer. D. Connections between valves and copper lines to be made using copper to IPA flange connections, or solder end valves. E. Where valves installed in chrome plated lines, are to be chrome plated to match. F. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Valves: 1. All valves shall be similar and approved equal to Crane Company numbers listed. If they comply with these Specifications, valves manufactured by Stockham, R. P. & C., Wallworth, Nibco-Scott, Hammond, Jenkins, Fairbanks, or Lunkenheimer will be acceptable. 2. Check valves, strainers, etc., shall be as specified herein under the paragraph entitled "Miscellaneous Piping Accessories". 3. All domestic hot and cold water valves shall be in accordance with the following schedule: a. Gate Valves: 1) Galvanized steel piping up to 3" - Crane No. 438 or Jenkins No. 370, or equal, brass wedge disc non -rising stem gate valve for 150 hound saturated steam working pressure. 3.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and turn over to the General Contractor for installation, access doors required to operate or service equipment, valves, and shock absorbers. 1. Access doors to be sizes. indicated or required for proper access, with mounting straps, concealed hinges, screwdriver locks, designed so they will open 180 degrees. 2. Doors to be constructed from 16 gauge steel with door and frame finished in prime coat finish. 3. Approved manufacturer's: Milcor, Zurn, Wade, Josam, Titus or equal. END OF SECTION 15105 r- "°" LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15105 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 VALVES FOR MEP SYSTEMS 4 - 4. Vacuum breakers 5. Hose bibs 6. Wall hydrants 7. Backflow prevented 8. Trap primer assemblies 9. Shock absorbers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All water pipe, both cold and hot shall be as specified in Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings. B. Fittings shall be wrought copper. C. Pipe and fittings shall be Anaconda, Nibco, Meuller, Revere, Chase Manufacturing or equal D. All underground water pipe shall be as specified in Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings. E. Unions shall be installed where piping is connected to equipment. F. Clean cut ends of copper pipe with emery cloth before making joints. G. Solder shall be approved lead free solder. H. Where copper pipe connects to non-cuprous pipe and equipment, install reinforced insulating couplings or unions. Where nipples come through a wall or partition to a fixture connection use brass nipples to make the connections. The supplies within the chases shall be securely anchored to prevent movement of connections. I. Iron pipe must not be used in connection with the water system; and screw pipe connections, etc., shall be iron pipe thickness brass. J. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below rim of fixture, or is threaded to receive a hose, and all hose bibbs, and wall hydrants provide and install r 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Piping to run above exposed ceilings. No water piping shall run below slabs on grade unless shown on drawings. B. Water piping system shall generally be run level, free of traps, without any unnecessary bends, as high as possible an to suit the necessity of clearances for other mechanical work. Water piping shall be so graded and valved to provide for the complete drainage and control of the system. Piping shall be installed so as to cause no unusual noise from the flow within the building system. Piping shall be installed to take care of the expansion and contraction. All hot and cold water piping should be insulated. C. 0 E. Hot and cold water piping shall be separated by at least 6" and every precaution shall be taken to see that the pipes do not come into contact. Where piping is paralleled, space shall be provided for proper thickness of covering. All runs of water piping outside shall be minimum 24" depth for freeze protection, unless otherwise noted. Other lines shall be run in due regard for freeze protection. Cold water piping to be held as far away as possible from sanitary sewer and storm sewer and installation is to conform to all codes. 3.02 STERILIZING A. After the installation of all water piping is made, it shall be flushed out and thoroughly sterilized by this Contractor with a solution of HTH in accordance with the regulations of the State Department of Health. After sterilizing, drain lines and completely flush out. 3.03 TESTING: A. Each piping system shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks to one and 1 1/2 times the system's operating pressure or 150 psi, whichever is larger. Equipment in the system which might be damaged by such pressure will be blocked off and disconnected during the tests. B. Equipment in the system which may be damaged by such pressure will be blocked "~ off and disconnected during the test. C. Lead test on the water main shall be performed after all new plumbing fixtures have been installed. The lead text shall include water samples taken from all water outlets of both new and existing plumbing fixtures. The report shall list the name of LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS A B. Interior Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: Use of PVC Drain pipe is to be used throughout; (Unless prohibited by code). 1. Sanitary soil, waste and drainage lines inside of buildings: Standard or service weight PVC drain pipe schedule 40; and/or cast iron soil pipe and fittings. a. If used cast iron pipe and each cast iron fitting: heavily coated at factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and have manufacturer's mark or name cast on it. b. Vent Lines: PVC or Cast iron pipe or galvanized iron pipe as accepted by code (2 inches or smaller). C. Vent stacks shall terminate a minimum distance of 10 feet from air intake or rooftop units or be a minimum of 3 feet above such openings. 2. Interior sewer line below the foundation slab shall be service weight PVC DWV Schedule 40 pipe unless approved otherwise. C. Test Tees and Cleanouts: Shall be Zurn, Josam, Wade or equal. 1. Exterior Cleanouts: Zurn Z-1325-12 with cast iron top. . . 2. Wall Cleanouts: J.R. Smith 4402 w/ Round Cover with polished bronze access cover sized as required. 3. Floor cleanout plugs: Polished bronze adjustable tops and to be numbered as follows: a. Zum Z-1325-5 Supremo inlay type cleanout with recessed access cover and frame for inlay of floor covering material on floor construction shall be covered in all finished areas. b. Zurn Z-1324 Supremo floor level cleanout with round access cover and round frame for all other floor construction in maintenance areas. C. Cleanout plugs shall be of a size required and the access covers and frames to be set with tops flush with finished floors. d. Equal cleanouts by Josam or Wade or J.R. Smith will be acceptable. D. Floor Drains: Josam Series 30003-E with Nikaloy top and "P" Trap for toilet rooms. Josam Series 31100 for unfinished areas or J.R. Smith 2005A-P 3" N.L. W 5" Nickel Bronze Strainer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Exterior Sanitary Sewer Piping to point of connection to exterior lines (five feet outside building). 1. Sanitary sewer outlets from buildings shall be collected, run to and connected to city sewer at points as indicated and required each connection to be extended outside building line in PVC schedule 40 drain pipe or standard weight cast iron pipe and continued in same material as to point of connection. 2. Pipe to be laid true and straight at uniform grades with a minimum of 1/8" fall per foot. 15301 -2 i 14. Vents through roof: a. Furnish to roofing Contractor for installation, all flashings as shown on r the Architectural plans. b. Turn top of lead flashing over into pipe extending up through roof to make a watertight seal per Architectural drawings. C. All final flashing shall be as approved by Architect. D. Test Tees and Cleanouts: 1. Test tees with brass plugs shall be installed at base of each soil and vent stack. 2. Cleanouts: Straight thread, tapered shoulder plug to seal against caulk lead seat and of same size as pipes except that cleanouts larger than 4" will not be required. 3. Cleanouts to be extended up into floor or wall where indicated. a. Cleanouts shall be installed to service each horizontal run at base of every riser, at each change of direction and at end of each horizontal runoff waste or drain pipe to an individual fixture, every fifty feet in long lengths of horizontal lines, and elsewhere required by code. . 4. Exterior cleanouts occurring in soil or asphalt paved areas shall be extended up flush with finished grade and encased in a neatly finished'16" square by 6" thick concrete block. Double cleanouts shall be in 24" long by 16" wide by 6" thick concrete blocks. a. Same cleanouts shall be used in install flush in sidewalks. ..ri 5. All wall cleanouts shall be installed with frame and cover set flush with finished wall in a neat and Workman -like manner. E. Floor Drains: 1. Floor drains shall be set with top flush with finished floor as approved by Owner. F. Flash all pipe openings through the roof, using lead sheet as shown on the Architectural drawings. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall fabricate flashing and turn over to the roofer to install the flashing on the roof and after completion of this installation, he shall bend over the top the flashing into the vent piping as shown on the Architectural drawings. END OF SECTION 15301 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15301 - 4 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM e �- 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Fixtures furnished complete with all working trim at each location and as indicated by symbol and abbreviation and Drawings. 1. Fixtures shall be standard products of approved manufacturers and shall be .• material, appearance and operation. Care shall be taken when selecting substitutions to see that physical appearance and arrangement very nearly approaches the descriptions given hereinafter. ¢-* 2. Each unit shall be free from mars and chips, new, of first quality and furnished with adequate and sufficient supports to securely hang or install the fixture involved. �^^ 3. Each unit furnished with first line chromium plated all brass trim unless specifically mentioned to the contrary and furnished with chromium plated loose key stops and flexible risers, except that mop sink basin fittings shall ^^ have built-in screw -drive stops. B. Fixtures are to be installed to meet the requirements of the Drawings, Specifications, and local plumbing codes. C. Fixtures shall be as specified, or equal, per Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Plans. D. Plumbing fixture acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Crane, or Kohler. E. Flush valve acceptable manufacturers: Sloan Valve Company, Zum, or Delany. F. Fixture carrier acceptable manufacturers: Josam Manufacturing Company, Kohler �,, Company, Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries, or Smith Plumbing. L. The contractor shall make a test of the water system for lead content after all new plumbing fixtures and outlets have been installed. 1. The lead test shall include water samples taken from all water outlets and plumbing fixtures (both new and existing). A report of the test shall be fiunished to the Architect for approval and shall list the name of each fixture sample, whether new or existing outlet, and the lead content for each sample taken in parts per billion. 3.02 USE OF FIXTURES: A. Under no circumstances shall fittings, equipment and materials installed in the building be used for any purpose prior to installation. 1. After installation, fixtures shall not be used for disposal of waste material, cleaning of paint brushes, etc. -1-11 L_ 1L_l.3 «.:t_t F « +U- 2. Centrifugal fans statically and dynamically balanced. Fan belt or direct driven as scheduled. Motor thermally protected. Belt drives with adjustable pulleys. Bearings thrust type permanently lubricated. 3. Back draft dampers, multi -blade balanced type felt edges. 4. Bird screen. 5. Self-contained electric disconnect. 6. Manufactured by Acme, Greenheck, Loren Cook, or equal. B. Supply Air Fans: 1. Supply air fans shall be of the belt driven curb mounted type, same as the r=I 1-� - ,r r 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Duct sizes: For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain sizes inside lining or insulation. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are inside (air stream) dimensions, and outside dimensions of the duct are to be increased to accommodate the insulation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductwork: 1. Rectangular Ductwork: Standard galvanized steel sheets with one mil thick minimum coating of zinc on both sides, by hot dipped process. Gauge as recommended in the "Duct Manual." Structural shapes (bars, angles, rods, etc.) to be galvanized carbon steel for exposed ductwork. 2. Flexible Connections: 30 ounce UL approved, glass fabric Neoprene coated on both sides, Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas" complete with attachment accessories. 3. Flexible Duct: Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be a factory assembly of 1 1/2" thick fiberglass (1 lb. per cu. ft. density) inside two vapor barrier materials (inside and outside surfaces) wrapped around a spring helix for support. Genflex type S-1, or equal. 4. Round or oval ductwork, shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Round ductwork shall be furnished complete with all starting collars, branch take -offs, elbows, etc., and shall terminate in register plenum box ceiling outlet collar. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Rectangular metal ductwork fabricated in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Manual and sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air Conditioning System", to the dimensions shown on the Plans. B. Duct accessories fabricated by detailed in SMACNA Standards. C. Dampers and fire dampers all by same manufacturer. All fusible links, stops, etc., to comply with NFPA 90A. D. Duct dimensions shown are clear inside dimensions. E. Standing seams, bar slip seams, or pocket slip seams shall not be used on rectangular ductwork exposed in the room. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15840 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK PA 8. 0" a 10. C. One 1/8" band for ducts up to 60" wide, and trapeze type with rods for larger ducts. Instrument Test Openings: a. In accessible locations where required for air stream static pressure, velocity and temperature measuring access. b. Openings complete with gaskets and insulation extended necks. Ductwork: a. Install duct firmly supported or hung neatly aligned. Ductwork hung tight to building structure. b. Space hangers as required to support ducts without sagging, as required by the building frame -work, and as required by other interference's. C. Location and spacing of hangers and supports coordinated by the Subcontractor. d. Furnish necessary supporting material and additional structural members. e. Provide for inherent movement and expansion of the duct system. f. Seal open space between ducts and wall sleeves or openings. g. Coordinate ducts with all other service lines, pipes and ducts. h. Install dampers and devices required to balance the system, provide proper diffusion, and even temperature. i. Lighting fixtures, electrical conduit and ceilings shall not be supported from ductwork of ductwork hangers. j. Make necessary changes in duct sizes, provide crossovers, etc., as required to fit ductwork into ceiling and other space. Flashing: a. Provide all necessary flashing and counter flashing where ducts penetrate exposed wall or roof to make entire installation weatherproof. 3.02 VOLUME CONTROL AND AIR DAMPERS A. Splitters, where shown, one gauge heavier than duct walls in which the damper is located, but not less than 16 gauge; having shafts, bearings and locking devices in accordance with S.M.A.C.N.A. recommendations. OP— B. Multi -leaf opposed or parallel blade type control dampers conforming to S.M.A.C.N.A. Duct Manual. 1. In addition to construction requirements detailed in Duct Manual, multi -leaf dampers shall have minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel blades, maximum blade with of 10", damper blades welded, pinned, splined or bolted to the shaft (set screws not acceptable), bronze oilite or nylon bearings, minimum 1/2" steel axles, and blade stops at top and bottom of frames. 2. Automatic control dampers furnished with wind stops at side of frames and blades furnished with blade gaskets cemented and riveted to the top and bottom edges of the blade. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15840 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK eR - B. Verify outlet locations and make necessary adjustments to conform with Architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Titus, Kruger or Equal Provide and install items as listed in Schedule on Plans. B. Return and Exhaust Grilles: 1. For sidewall and ceiling exhaust grilles, provide streamlined blades, depth of �., which exceeds 3/4". Provide spring tension or other device to set blades. Provide units with horizontal face. 2. Provide 1-1/4" (32mm) margin frame with countersunk screw holes. 3. Fabricate of steel with 20 gauge minimum frames and 22 gauge minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gauge minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions. 4. Provide exhaust grilles, where not individually connected to exhaust fans, t with integral, gang -operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face. 5. Finish in factory to be baked enamel, white or color as approved by Architect. 6. Door grilles where shown on plans to be siteproof and soundproof as scheduled on plans. C. Rectangular Supply Diffuser: 1. Provide rectangular, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi -core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated or required. 2. Diffusers shall have surface -mount type frame. 3. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel finish, white or color as approved by Architect. 4. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. D. Perforated Face Diffuser: 1. Provide perforated face diffuser with fully adjustable pattern and removable face. 2. Provide inverted T-bar type frame. 3. Fabricate of steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel finish, white or color as approved by Architect. 4. Provide radial opposed damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. E. Slot Diffusers: 1. Provide slot diffusers with fully adjustable pattern controller blades end -to - end in each slot. These blades are independently movable. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15870 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 AIR OUTLETS ITB #00-228, Addendum #4 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13TH STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: POW ADDENDUM #4 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility October 13, 2000 October 19, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. r°^! ` 1. Please find attached the drawings and specifications, which comprise Addendum #4. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 ►•* Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY OF LUBBOCK Ron Shuf field Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 00-228add4 ADDENDUM NO. 4 OCTOBER 12, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 c' Fri �'�t!✓ The Construction Documents for the above referenced project, dated August 30, 2000 shall OWN be amended as follows: SPECIFICATIONS Item No. 1 (RE: ADDENDUM 3, ITEM NO. 4, SPECIFICATION SECTION 02231— ,,,, CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE) Section 02231, amend paragraph 3.03, subparagraph A. as follows: All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop during compaction shall .�. be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. The all weather surface shall be checked for grade and cross section... Item No. 2 (RE: ADDENDUM 3, ITEM NO. 4, SPECIFICATION SECTION 02231 — CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE) Section 02231, paragraph 3.04 — MAINTENANCE, delete and replace as follows: All weather surface shall be inspected after construction has been completed. ." Any maintenance needed to fix items as specified in item 3.03 shall be ------------------ n ADDENDUM NO. 4 OCTOBER 12, 2000 ^' CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas I"" BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 2 I ow Item No. 5 (RE: SECTION 06100 — CARPENTRY) Section 06100, paragraph 2.01, add the following: D. Wood Fascia: Provide rough sawn cedar in nominal size,1 inch x size indicated on drawings. .., Item No. 6 (RE: SECTION 08800 - GLAZING) Section 08800, amend paragraph 2.02, subparagraph A-2 as follows: 2r. Glass Thickness. Outer: 1/4 inch (6 mm). Item No. 7 (RE: SECTION 08710 -FINISH HARDWARE) Section 08710, paragraph 2.01, for all items: Note: Sargent is an acceptable manufacturer. Item No. 8 (RE: SECTION 08800 — GLAZING) Section 08800, amend paragraph 2.02, subparagraph A-4 as follows: 4. Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) thick units. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, tinted inner panes. 1/4 inch thick, clear outer panes. 1/2 inch air space between. Item No. 9 (RE: SECTION 11890 — SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT) Section 11890, paragraph 2.02, subparagraph B-2c, clarification: For both handgun and rifle ranges, local controls are installed at each shooting point, mounted as specified on shooting separators (RE: Section 11890, paragraph 2.02, subparagraph A). DRAWINGS Item No. 1 (RE: Sheet T 1.1) Master keynote list, modify the following keynotes: "2.06 CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE. RE: ADDENDUM 3, SPECIFICATION SECTION 02231" Item No. 2 (RE: 5/A2.3, AD1.5) Revise tube sections shown in AD1.5, Addendum #2, to be W-sections per structural. Item No. 3 (RE: 6/A2.3, AD 1.6) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD4.1. Note: steel tubes shown here are size 8 inch x 6 inch x 3/16 inch. Continuous fillet weld at columns. fpm ADDENDUM NO. 4 OCTOBER 12, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 3 Item No. 4 (RE: 7/A2.3) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD4.2. Item No. 5 (RE: 8/A2.3, AD 1.7) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD4.3. Item No. 6 (RE: 12/A2.3) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD4.4. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4******************************** I p IR.. .... BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD `:`•>':':> ARCHITECT S .........:::: .....:....... &m;,►smwr SM20 lit,2 DAUAS,MM 73204 www.brwarch.com DATE October 12, 2000 P70JECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility F Lubbock, Texas Ps _ JECT NO.* 9936.01 SWJECP. Exterior Detail - RE: 6/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 7.07 7.02 A 5.03 Q 6.05 7.04 7.01 5.03 9.04 6.09 7.01 7.08 8.08 7.01 8.07 DRAWING MAWM NO. AD4.1 I ::.:.::::..::...:::::.:::::::: BROWN REYNOIDS WATFORD '•.`•. ":'•: ??' ARCHITECT S 396'TRAva STREET Sure 250 LB 102 DAUAS TEXAS 7SM4 2MMAWN www.brwarch.com DATE October 12, 2000 P7OiECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas P_ O=T NO-- 9936.01 SUBJECT: Exterior Detail - RE: 7/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = V-0" r., 7.07 7.02 6.18 5.03 8.10 6.06 5.03 7.01 7.01 8.06 BROWN REYNOIDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS w3M WAVE SlUff am t2w MM DAUM IMM 7SM4 MUMN www.brwarch.com DATE October 12, 2000 FrOJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas P yOJECT NO-- 9936.01 SUBJECT: Exterior Detail - RE: 8/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = V-0" W" A r-hff"hr- NDUM DRAWWG 7.07 7.02 A 7.05 7.06 7.)1 > w A 5.03 6.19 108r-al DRAWNG NO. AD4.3 ro: ADDENWM DMVVM A R C H I T E C T S �yy ITB #00-228, Addendum #3 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #3 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility MAILED TO VENDOR: October 4, 2000 OLD CLOSE DATE: October 12, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. NEW CLOSE DATE: October 19, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. !^ The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been change from October 12, 2000 at 2:00 P. Mato the new closing date of October 19, 2000 at 2:00 P. M. 2. Please find attached the drawings and specifications, which comprise Addendum #3. .All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 P" or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us P" 00-228add3 THANK YOU, CITY F LUBBOCK Ron Shu field Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. ADDENDUM NO. 3 OCTOBER 6, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 The Construction Documents for the above referenced project, dated August 30, 2000 shall be amended as follows: SPECIFICATIONS Item No.1 (RE: SECTION 02230 — SITE CLEARING) Section 02230, paragraph 3.03, subparagraph A, add the following: "Clearing and grubbing extents only as required for new construction. Remainder of site to remain in current state." Item No. 2 (RE: SECTION 02300 — EARTHWORK) Section 02300, paragraph 2.01, subparagraph A, add the following: "Excavation to create berm is acceptable in the Surface Danger Zone area, as defined on Cl.l. Maximum excavation depth is 3'-0". At Contractor's option, berm may be constructed completely with topsoil, as opposed to topsoil layer specified." Item No. 3 (RE: SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK) Section 02300, paragraph 3.05, subparagraph A, add the following: "Provide 1" excelsior blanket to protect topsoil surfaces at berm." Item No. 4 (RE: ADDENDUM #2, SECTION 02730 — GRAVEL SURFACING) Replace section 02730 with attached 02231 — CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE Item No. 5 (RE: SECTION 08410 — ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS) Section 08410, amend paragraph 2.04, subparagraph A-1 as follows: "Vertical Stile: 5 inch (125mm) ..." _ Item No. 5 (RE: SECTION 08410 — ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS) Section 08410, amend paragraph 2.04, subparagraph A-4 as follows: "l inch (24mm) thick insulated ..." Item No. 6 (RE: SECTION 08410 — ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS) Section 08410, paragraph 2.07, add subparagraph G. as follows: G. Hardware to be provided by Storefront Door supplier. F6 ADDENDUM NO. 3 OCTOBER 6, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 2 Item No. 7 (RE: SECTION 08800 — GLAZING) Section 08800, amend paragraph 2.02, subparagraph A-1 as follows: "... 1/4 inch tempered..." DRAWINGS Item No. 1 (RE: 1/C1.1 SITE PLAN) Clarification: Extents of chain link fencing is as shown on drawing. Item No. 2 (RE: l/C1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN & l/C1.4 SITE PLAN) Grade to spot elevations as shown on attached Drawing AD3.1 & AD3.2. Item No. 3 (RE: 1/C 1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN & C 1.3 WATER & SEWER UTILITY PLAN) Clarification: Additional walks & curbs, East & West of the parking lot, as shown on C1.3 are for future scope. Reference 1/C1.2 for correct scope. a Item No. 4 (RE: l/C1.3 WATER & SEWER UTILITY PLAN and 1/C1.4 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN) Delete drain sump at ranges. Range surface drains to the South. Item No. 5 (RE: C1.5 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS) Clarification: All work associated with water well is included in the bid. Item No. 6 (RE: 5/S2.1 HANDGUN RANGE STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS) Add the following note: 4-3/4" diameter anchor bolts,16" long with nuts each end. Item No. 7 (RE: S2.1 HANDGUN RANGE STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS and S2.2 RIFLE RANGE STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS) Add the following note to the framing plans: Add 6"x0xl/4" steel plate for connecting purlins to steel beams. Shop weld plate to beam & field weld purlin to plate. Item No. 8 (RE: SHEET 8/A2.3 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS) Addendum #2, Sheet AD1.7: Replace keynote 5.03 with 5.07. Item No. 9 (RE: SHEET 1 l/A2.3 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS) Addendum #2, Sheet AD 1.9: Non -specified structural tube section, & connecting member to larger structural tube (keynote 5.03) shall be HSS 4"x4"xl/4". PM ADDENDUM NO. 3 OCTOBER 6, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 3 Item No.10 (RE: SHEET 15/A2.3 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS) At the top of truss, the angle @ the backside not noted shall be 5"x5"xl/4" continuous steel angle. Continuously weld to steel truss. '"" Item No. 11 (RE: SHEET MEP-3 MEP SITE PLAN) Revise Note #2 to read: The power poles (P2) and light fixtures (S2) are to be furnished and installed by the local power company under a separate contract. The City of Lubbock will pay necessary fees. The GC shall coordinate all requirements with the power company, as noted on Sheet MEP-1. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3******************************** Pon SECTION 02231 - CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE F"s PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE I P" A. This section covers excavating, crushing, hauling, and spreading base material and wetting, compacting and shaping it to form a 6" flexible base course surface to the lines, grades and typical cross sections shown on the plans, and as specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor and superintendence and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1.02 BASE MATERIAL A. The base material shall consist of argillaceous limestone, calcareous or calcareous clay particles, with or without stone, conglomerate, gravel, sand or other granular materials. Materials for use in constructing the base course shall be furnished by the Contractor from a source approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for locating the source of caliche, securing approval of the source, and for making arrangements with the owner of the property, on which the pit is located, for use of the material. The pits shall be stripped of all unacceptable material and the stripping shall be disposed of in a manner agreeable to the owner of the property on which the pit is located. The pits shall be opened so as to immediately expose the vertical faces of all of the various strata of acceptable material. Unless otherwise directed, the material shall be secured in successive vertical cuts extending through all of the exposed strata. Any incidental costs, including securing, stripping, or crushing the base material, shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall be included in the bid price. 1.03 MATERIAL TESTS A. Contractor will provide all preconstruction testing of material to verify it meets the requirements of 2. LA and 2. LB below. Material shall not be shipped until such results have been examined and approved by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CALICHE MATERIAL All acceptable material shall be screened and the oversized material crushed and returned to the screened material in such a manner that a uniform material is produced. The processed base material, when properly slaked and tested by the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) standard laboratory methods, shall meet the following requirements: A. Sieve Analysis Retained on 1-3/4" Sieve ............. . 0% Retained on No. 4 Sieve .................. 45 to 75% Retained on No. 40 Sieve ................. 50 to 85% Retained on No. 200 Sieve ................ 85 to 100% 02231 - 1 CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE '+ B. Soil Binder The material passing the No. 40 sieve shall be known as soil binder and shall meet the following requirements when prepared in accordance with Test Method TEX-101-E procedure: The liquid limit shall not exceed ....................... 45 ^! The plasticity index shall not exceed ............. 12 The linear shrinkage shall not exceed ................ 8.5 PART 3 EXECUTION r" 3.01 HAULING AND PLACING A. Prior to placing any base material, the subgrade shall be shaped, wetted, rolled and compacted to the cross sections and grades specified in accordance with the specification Section 02300 "Excavation." B. Flexible base shall be constructed in one course. The material shall be delivered in approved vehicles of uniform capacity, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply v the amount of material required to construction the base course to the thickness shown on the plans. Spreading and shaping shall be done in a manner which will thoroughly mix the !�! material and prevent segregation. Sprinkling during this process will be required if necessary to prevent segregation. When shaping is completed the material shall be uniformly well graded and of the proper thickness. Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather or other unforseen circumstances renders impractical the spreading of the material during the day in which it is deposited, the material shall be scarified, mixed and spread as directed by the Owner. All areas and nests of segregated coarse of fine materials shall be corrected and removed or replaced with well graded material. If additional or corrective binder is required, it shall be furnished and applied in the amount directed by the Owner. Such binder material shall be carefully and evenly incorporated with the material in place by scarifying, harrowing, or other approved method. 3.02 COMPACTING AND FINISHING A. After the material has been properly spread, it shall be sprinkled, rolled and bladed until thoroughly compacted. During the process of compaction, water shall be applied in such a manner as to maintain optimum moisture in the material and the base course shall be bladed sufficiently to insure a uniform distribution of base materials and a smooth uniform surface, true to section and grades established, after final compaction. Compaction shall be accomplished by rolling with pneumatic and steel wheeled rollers as approved by the Owner. In areas not accessible to the roller, the base material shall be compacted with mechanical tampers or other approved methods to secure uniform compaction over the entire paved area. Throughout the entire operation, the shape of the base course shall be maintained by blading; blading and rolling shall continue until the course is thoroughly compacted and the surface is smooth and in conformity with the typical sections shown on the plans and to the lines and grades established. The material shall be compacted to 97% of maximum density, at optimum moisture, as determined by the ASTM D 698 Method B or D. 02231 - 2 •�• CALICHE BASE ALL WEATHER SURFACE 3.03 IRREGULARITIES, DEPRESSIONS OR WEAK SPOTS A. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop during compaction shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or removing material as required, reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. Immediately prior to placing of surfacing, the base shall be checked for grade and cross section, and any deviation in excess of three -eights (3/8) inch from grade or true cross section shall be corrected. 'Blue tops" set to finished base elevations shall be set by the Contractor, in order to check the base for proper grade and elevation. 3.04 MAINTENANCE A. If the base course is opened to traffic before application of the surfacing, the base shall be satisfactorily maintained by wetting, blading and rolling until the wearing surface is placed thereon. END OF SECTION BROWN Rn NOWS WKMORD ARCHITECTS i K... un wAvs srw RM2W L8102 D W.Af 7OWB 7=4 wwW.lrwafCh.eon DATE: October 6, 2000 71ROJECT: CRY of Lubbock a Lubbock Poulcre Academy 5 m 2 Air mg a Facifty Lubbock, Ire= RO)ECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Enlarged Site Plan - RE:1/C1.2 is Scale: l" = 201-01 n ADDENDUM DRAWING L/R!\WNG NC (AD3.1 LO 10-.97 2:29. 1 4 .34 NOTE -ALL •CONCRETE'•:PAVING AND ..SIDEWALKS : •: ' ' .. '. .`'3 gC 1'50 SLOPE . MAX. • •ALL:, DIRECTIONS 10.07 n :12/C 1:2:' qu � D BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS g i u :.,.:.10•t.AM mHi ue no u m DATE dWN TOM IM Mr~ www.bewarch.com October 6, 2000 PROJECT: city of Lubbock - Lubbock poolce Asaaalmyr 6o=M Am= Rmp P&Mfty Lubbock bock irvm PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan - RE:1/C1.4 Scale: I' - 80'4' ADDENDUM DRAWING MAWM NO. (AD3.2 PLANS IN FILE SEE RESOLUTION ACCO, J�04[6' le 71 cW60 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY BID #00-228 ADDENDUM #2 ITB #00-228, Addendum #2 .•e City of Lubbock ADDENDUM #2 PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING ITB #00-228 1625 13T" STREET Lubbock Police Academy Small LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 Arms Range Facility FAX:(806)775-2164 MAILED TO VENDOR: October 4, 2000 CLOSE DATE: October 12, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not «� affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached the drawings and specifications, which comprise Addendum #2. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer *- City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: Rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us ,.° THANK YOU, CIT F LUB OCK ram+ Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. rr+ ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 The Construction Documents for the above referenced project, dated August 30, 2000 shall be amended as follows: SPECIFICATIONS Item No. 1 (RE: SECTION 01500 — TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS) Section 01500, amend paragraph 3.02, add the following: "I: Water Service:Water is not available to serve the site or construction operations. Contractor shall make arrangements to provide all water required for construction operations and sanitary facilities." Item No. 2 (RE: SECTION 02821 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES) Section 02821, amend paragraph 2.03, subparagraph D. as follows: "Top Rail and Intermediate Rails..." Item No. 3 (RE: SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE) Section 08710, add paragraph 3.02 as follows: 3.02 HARDWARE SETS HW 1 Door 1 (Pair) 3 EA. HINGE W/SECURITY STUD (NRP) 1 EA. MORTISE LOCKSET (STOREROOM FUNCTION) 1 EA. THRESHOLD i SET GASKETING 1 EA. SWEEP 1 EA. OVERHEAD STOP 3 EA. SILENCERS 2 EA. FLUSHBOLTS (AT INACTIVE STOP) 1 EA. ASTRAGAL ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 2 HW2 Door 2 3 EA. HINGE W/SECURITY STUD (NRP) 1 EA. MORTISE LOCKSET (STOREROOM FUNCTION) 1 EA. THRESHOLD 1 SET GASKETING 1 EA. SWEEP 1 EA, OVERHEAD STOP 3 EA. SILENCERS HW3 Doors 3 and 4 EACH OPENING TO RECEIVE: 3 EA. HINGE I EA. CLOSER 1 EA. THRESHOLD 1 SET GASKETING 1 EA. SWEEP 1 EA. WALL STOP 2 EA. PUSH-PLATE/PULL HANDLE 3 EA. SILENCERS 1 EA. MORTISE DEADBOLT HW4 Door 5 3 EA. HINGE I EA. MORTISE LOCKSET (STOREROOM FUNCTION) I EA. CLOSER I EA. WALL STOP 3 EA. SILENCERS HW5 Doors 6 and 7 EACH OPENING TO RECEIVE: 3 EA. HINGE W/SECURITY STUDS 1 EA. MORTISE CYLINDER W/SECURITY COLLAR 1 EA. STOREFRONT DEADLOCK I EA. CLOSER 1 EA. THRESHOLD I SET GASKETING 1 EA. SWEEP I EA. WALL STOP r" ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Pr 6 No.: 9936.01 _ Page 3 Item No. 4 (RE: SECTION 00010 -TABLE OF CONTENTS) Refer to Section 00010 dated 30 August 2000: replace with Section 00010 -Table of ,., Contents, dated 25 September 2000. Note: additional specifications sections: 00010 - Table of Contents 01 - 03 ,,,.. 02730 - Gravel Surfacing 01 - 03 11890 - Shooting Range Equipment 01 - 06 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions 01 - 11 f., 15065 - Pipe and Fittings for MEP Systems 01 - 09 15094 - Hangers, Anchors, Supports and Sleeves 01 - 05 15105 - Valves for MEP Systems 01 - 04 •• 15220 - Domestic Water System 01 - 05 15301 - Soil, Waste, and Vent System 01 - 04 15450 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 01 - 04 �* 15829 - Exhaust/Supply Fans 01 - 02 15840 - Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork 01 - 05 15870 - Air Outlets 01 - 03 16010 - General Electrical Provisions 01 - 07 16110 - Raceways 01 - 05 16120 - Conductors 01 - 04 16140 - Wiring Devices 01 - 03 16160 - Branch Circuit Panelboards 01 - 03 16170 - Disconnects 01 - 02 16181 - Fuses and Short Circuit Current 01 - 04 16450 - Grounding 01 - 04 16500 - Light Fixtures 01 - 03 16740 - Telephone System/Other Empty Conduit 01 - 02 DRAWINGS r- Item No. 1 (RE: Sheet T1.1) Master keynote list, add/modify the following keynotes: "2.12 6" CONCRETE WITH #4'S @ 12" O.C.E.W." "2.13 2 #5'S CONTINUOUS" "2.14 #3_'S @ 18" O.C." "4.07 VERTICAL REINFORCING" "6.23 SIMPSON ANCHOR" "6.24 CONTINUOUS P.T. 2X WOOD BLOCKING @ 4'-0" O.C." "9.04 PAINT EXPOSED STRUCTURE" r - "10.14 NOT USED" "16.07 LIGHT POLE BY CITY OF LUBBOCK" Item No. 2 (RE: 1 &2/C 1.1 SITE PLAN) ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 4 Revised range locations per plat review as shown on attached Revised Sheet C1.1. Item No. 3 (RE: 1/C1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLAN) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD1.1. Item No. 4 (RE: 12/C 1.2 SITE DETAIL) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.13. Item No. 5 (RE: 14/C 1.2 PAVEMENT MARKING) Delete `TRAFFIC ARROW' portion of drawing. Item No. 6 (RE: 15/C 1.2 SITE DETAIL) Add reinforcing as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.2. Item No. 7 (RE: 16/C 1.2 SITE DETAIL) Replace keynote 2.10 with keynote 2.17. .- Item No. 8 (RE: SHEET C 1.3 WATER AND SEWER UTILITY PLAN) Sheet C 1.3 reissued in its entirety. Item No. 9 (RE: SHEET C 1.4 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN) Sheet CIA reissued in its entirety. Item No. 10 (RE: 1/Al.1 FLOOR PLAN — HANDGUN RANGE) Replace exterior elevation marks 8/A2.1 with 8/A2.2. Item No. 1.1 (RE: 1/A1.2 FLOOR PLAN — RIFLE RANGE) Replace exterior elevation marks 8/A2.1 with 8/A2.2. Item No. 12 (RE: 2/A1.2 FLOOR PLAN — RIFLE RANGE) Revised dimensions as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.3. Item No. 13 (RE: 4/A1.2 ENLARGED PLAN) Revise column grids 2 and 3 to 3 and 4, respectively. Item No. 14 (RE: 5 & 6/A2.2 BUILDING SECTIONS) Delete keynotes 6.17. ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 5 Item No. 15 (RE: SHEET A2.3 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS) Add General Note as follows: "Bond Beams not otherwise noted shall be reinforced with 1- #4. Vertical Cells at all exterior corners shall be reinforced and grouted. Vertical cells at ,, door jambs shall be grouted solid." Item No. 16 (RE: 1, 2,3 & 16/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Replace keynote 10.14 with keynote 9.03. Item No. 17 (RE: 1 & 19/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Replace keynote 6.17 with keynote 6.09. Item No. 18 (RE: 1/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32". Provide #4 x 4'0" straight dowels to foundation at 32". Item No. 19 (RE: 2/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Replace keynote 6.17, pointing to suspending ceiling, with keynote 6.09. Item No. 20 (RE: 2/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Delete keynote 6.17, pointing to wood bracing. Item No. 21. (RE: 2/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32" . Provide #4 x 4'0" straight dowels to foundation at 32" . Bond Beam at 9'-0" opening shall be a 16" deep bond beam reinforced with 244 bars. Item No. 22 (RE: 3/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Replace keynote 6.16 with keynote 6.15. Item No. 23 (RE: 3/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32" . Provide #4 x 4'0" straight dowels to foundation at 32" . Bond Beam at Door 1 shall be an 8" deep bond beam reinforced with 2- #4 bars. Item No. 24 (RE: 4/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Revised as shown on attached Drawing ADIA. Item No. 25 (RE: 4/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32" foundation at 32" . Item No. 26 (RE: 5/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Provide #4 x 4'0" straight dowels to I I 9 ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 6 Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.5. Item No. 27 (RE: 6/A2.3 WALL SECTION) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.6. Item No. 28 (RE: 7 & 12/A2.3 EXTERIOR DETAIL) Replace keynote 6.15 with keynote 5.03. Item No. 29 (RE: 8/A2.3 EXTERIOR DETAIL) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.7, Item No. 30 (RE: 10/A2.3 EXTERIOR DETAIL) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.8. Item No. 31 (RE: I I/A2.3 EXTERIOR DETAIL) Revised as shown on attached Drawing AD 1.9. Item No. 32 (RE: 16/A2.3 EXTERIOR DETAIL) Replace keynote 6.23 with keynote 6.24. Item No. ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 7 Item No. 40 (RE: SHEET A2.3) 1. Detail 1: Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32". Provide #4 x 4'-0" straight dowels to foundation at 32". 2. Detail 2: Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32". Provide #4 x 4'-0" straight dowels to foundation at 32". Bond Beam at 9'-0" opening shall be a 16" deep bond beam reinforced with 244 bars. 3. Detail 3: Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 a, 32". Provide 44 x 4'-0" beam reinforced with 244 bars. 4. Detail 4: Vertical Reinforcing in CMU shall be #4 @ 32". Provide #4 x 4'-0"straight dowels to foundation at 32". 5. General: Bond Beams not otherwise noted shall be reinforced with 144. Vertical cells at all exterior corners shall be reinforced and grouted. Vertical cells at door -jambs shall be grouted solid. Attachments: Sheet MEP 1 dated 21 Sep 2000 Sheet MEP 2 dated 21 Sep 2000 Sheet MEP 3 dated 21 Sep 2000 ADDENDUM NO. 2 OCTOBER 4, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas BRW Project No.: 9936.01 Page 8 16160 - Branch Circuit Panelboards 01 - 03 16170 - Disconnects 01 - 02 16181 - Fuses and Short Circuit Current 01 - 04 16450 - Grounding 01 04 16500 - Light Fixtures 01 - 03 16740 - Telephone System/Other Empty Conduit 01 - 02 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2********************* W" 1 BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 353S TRAVS STREET .. S FTE 250 LB 302 DALLAS TDCAS 75204 2$45288704 www.brwarcb.com a.- DATE- September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Enlarged Site Plan - RE: 1/C1.2 Scale: 1" = 20'-0" 16.07 16.07 196 V)V, NORTH AL DRAWII DRAWING AD1.1 e ONNo eRI M .o I 10.07 ,0.19 2.03 ° 2.02 = 0 • 2.34 I � 2.10 10.19 10.07 ° 0 16.07 J2AC1.2 BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS .. - 3.535 TRAMS STREET SUTE 250 LB ID2 DAUAS TEXAS 75204 Zki52 www . b rwarch.com DATE September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO-- 9936.01 SUBJECT: Site Detail - RE: 15/0.2 Scale: 1 " = V-0" r �.I c . r� F t TARGET LINE I II. I ) F, E- a 0� d OOO� a e a • � I I I 2'-6" 2'-6" SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWL PV DRAMG ADL 7/8"0 GALVANIZED STEEL ROD 3.01 2.12 BROWN REYNOLDS WA'TFORD ARCHITECTS r 3535 TRAVIS STREET ARE 250 LB X/2 DALLAS TEXAS 75204 214MB.8704 www.brwarch.com DATE: September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas NO.: 9936.01 ,,,,,,,;PROJECT SUBJECT: RESTROOM BUILDING FLOOR PLAN - RE: 2/A1.2 -� Scale: 1 /8" = V-0" DRAWN DRAWING NC AD1.3 N 3 a ►<1 2. N � i I I F 3 - 4 I 1150..0140 'n 1 15.05 8' 00 4 6 8 - 4 - 6' 10.08 105 5 A j3 A1.2 5/A2.2 w 0 E A OM I\ NORTH PLANS IN FILE SEE RESOLUTION lU o" Ut61 A�72 1 --)'0'00 I BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD A R C H I T E C T S DATE: I PROTECT: �l PROJECT NO.: SUBJECT: F 3535 TRAMS STREET SUITE 250 LB D2 DALLAS TEXAS 75204 214528A704 w w w. b r w a r c h. c o m September 21, 2000 City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas 9936.01 Exterior Detail - RE: 6/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = 11-011 ADDENDUM DRAWI DRAWING I ADV PM BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS IM TRAVtS SMEEI SUITE 2S0 LB 102 .. DALL S TEXAS 75204 29S2"704 www.brwarch.com DATE September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Exterior Detail - RE: 8/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A P+ pow" DRAW[ DRAWING CADL I BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD A R C H I T E C T S 3535 TRAVLS STREET SUITE 250 LB n2 DALLAS TEXAS 75204 21452&8704 www.brwarch.com DATE: September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Exterior Detai I - RE: 10/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = V-0" B I 5.02 6.21 108 -11"gk A.F.F. 6.09 6.22 6.09 I 108'-0" J, A.F.F. 7.01 DRAM DRAWING ADt, °"BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD A R C H I T E C T S DATE: PROJECT: ,,,PROJECT NO.: SUBJECT: 3S35 TRAVLS STREET SLITF 250 LB 102 DALLAS TEXAS 75204 21452&a7D4 www.brwarch.com September 21, 2000 City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas 9936.01 Exterior Detail Q Rifle Range - RE: 11/A2.3 Scale: 1 1/2" = V-0" ADDENDUM DRAWING DRAWING NO ADt9 "BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 3535 TRAV6 STREET SURE 250 LB R12 DALLAS TEXAS 75204 21452&UO4 w w w. b r w a r c h. c o m DATE September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 SUBJECT: Door & Frame Types - RE: Type 'C' Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" 8.11 8.09 00 I t0 0 6,r 6" i Ln 00 o N C DOOR AND FRAME WITH SIDELIGHT A4 DRAWINC DRAWING NO ADtio 1 :ROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 3S35 TRAVISSTREET SME 2SO LB n2 .... - DALLAS TEXAS 75204 214528.6704 w w w. b r w a r c h. c o m )ATE September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 iUBJECT: Restroom Building Reflected Ceiling Plan - RE: 2/A2.3 r Scale: 1 /8" = 1 '-0" DRAWING DRAWING NO. AD1.11 ) 10 I 7)ROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 3535 TRAVIS STREET RATE 250 LB 102 DAUAS TEXAS 75204 .. 214528.8704 w w w. b r w a r c h. c o m )ATE: September 21, 2000 PROJECT: City of Lubbock - Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas PROJECT NO.: 9936.01 UBJECT: Restroom Building Finish Plan - RE: 2/A3.3 1 Scale: 1/8" = 1'-01' ^r` IDUM DRAWING SC ------ ------ I I I I 105 I M SC - EP ST1 WOMEN'S i MEN'S 103 I 104 SC - EP ST1 _ _ I SC - EP ST1 I I I ELEC. I 102 I SC - EP ST1 STORAGE Milk I101 I 1 I SC - EP ST1 I I I j I L- - - - - - - - - - - - - NORTH DRAWING NO. AD1.12 1 I BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS '^* 3535 TUVLS STREET SURE 25D LB 182 DATE: PROJECT: PROJECT NO.: SUBJECT: DMLAS TEAS 75M4 214528.8n4 w w w. b r w a r c h. c o m September 21, 2000 City of Lubbock Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Facility Lubbock, Texas 9936.01 Site Detail - RE: 12/C1.2 Scale: 1" = V-0" /-3/8" R. SUPPLEMENTAL DRAWIN, DRAWING NI AD1-: SECTION 00100 - TABLE OF CONTkNT§ Pages Original Latest Issue Issue 00100 - Table of Contents 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 25 Sep 00 00015 - List of Drawings 01 30 Aug 00 00300 - Information Available to Bidders 01 - 02 30 Aug 00 Soil Investigation 01 - 49 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 - Summary 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 01250 - Contract Modification Procedures 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 01270 - Unit Prices 01 - 02 30 Aug 00 01290 - Payment Procedures 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 01310 - Project Management and Coordination 01 - 06 30 Aug 00 01320 - Construction Progress Documentation 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 (Sample Form: Request for Interpretation) ,., 01330 - Submittal Procedures 01 - 10 30 Aug 00 (Sample Form: Submittal Transmittal) 01400 - Quality Requirements 01 - 07 30 Aug 00 (Sample Form: Submittal Transmittal) 01420 - References 01 - 15 30 Aug 00 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 - 11 30 Aug 00 01600 - Product Requirements 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 ►.� (Sample Form: Substitution Request) 01700 -Execution Requirements 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 01731 - Cutting and Patching 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 01770 - Closeout Procedures 01 - 09 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02230 - Site Clearing 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 i 02361 - Termite Control 01 - 02 30 Aug 00 ,�. 02670 - New Water Well 01 - 06 30 Aug 00 02673 - Submersible Well Pump 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 02730 - Gravel Surfacing 01 - 03 25 Sep 00 02750 - Concrete Paving 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 02760 - Paving Specialties 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 02821 - Chain Link Fences and Gates 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 00100 - TABLE OF CONTENTS Pages Original Latest Issue Issue DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 - Carpentry 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 06175 - Wood Trusses 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 06400 - Architectural Millwork & Casework 01 - 04 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07260 - Vapor Barrier Membrane 01 - 02 30 Aug 00 07300 - Shingle Roofing & Flashing 01 - 04 30 Aug 00 07900 - Sealants 01 - 04 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 - Metal Doors & Frames 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 01 - 06 30 Aug 00 08500 - Metal Windows 01 - 05 30 Aug 00 08710 - Finish Hardware 01 - 04 30 Aug 00 08800 - Glazing 01 - 06 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09910 - Painting 01 - 12 30 Aug 00 09931 - Exterior Wood Stains 01 - 06 30 Aug 00 09960 - High Performance Coatings 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 09963 - Elastomeric Special Coatings 01 - 08 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10170 - Plastic Toilet Compartments 01 - 04 30 Aug 00 10520 - Fire Protection Specialties 01 - 03 30 Aug 00 10810 - Toilet Accessories 01 - 07 30 Aug 00 DIVISION 11 - EOUIPMENT 11890 - Shooting Range Equipment 01 - 06 25 Sep 00 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NONE IN THIS CONTRACT DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONNONE IN THIS CONTRACT DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMSNONE IN THIS CONTRACT LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 00010 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS w, SECTION 00100 -TABLE OF CONTENTS Pages Original Latest Issue Issue DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL ,•y 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions 15060 - Pipes and Pipe Fittings 15065 - Pipe and Fittings for MEP Systems 15094 Hangers, Anchors, Supports and Sleeves 15100 - Valves and Miscellaneous Items 15105 - Valves for MEP Systems 01-11 01-07 O1 - 09 O1 - 05 O1 - 03 01-04 25 Sep 00 30 Aug 00 25 Sep 00 25 Sep 00 30 Aug 00 25 Sep 00 SECTION 02730 - GRAVEL SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Work to include construction of gravel surface parking lot at location shown on drawings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 COARSE AGGREGATES A. General: Coarse aggregates shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, crushed gravel or a combination of these. Gravel and crushed gravel shall consist of clean, hard, durable particles, free from adherent coating, thin or elongated pieces, soft or disintegrated particles, dirt, organic or deleterious substances. Crushed stone shall consist of the clean, dust free product resulting from crushing of stone. There shall be no adherent coatings, clay loam, organic or deleterious substances. B. Deleterious Substances: The maximum amount of deleterious substances shall not exceed the following percentage by weight: Material removed by decantation 1.0% Shale, slate or other similar material 1.0% Clay lumps 0.25% Soft fragments 3.0% Other deleterious substances, including friable, thin, elongated or laminated pieces 3.0% The sum of all deleterious substances, exclusive of material removed by decantation, shall not exceed by weight. 5.0% Aggregates shall be free from an excess amount of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable matter. At the time of their use, aggregates shall be free from frozen and/or foreign material which may have become mixed with them in the stockpile. r- C. Tests: Coarse aggregates shall have a percent wear of not more than 45 when tested by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles Machine, ASTM Designations C131 and C535. D. Graduation: Coarse aggregates shall be well graded in size from coarse to fine. When tested by standard laboratory methods, coarse aggregates shall meet the LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02730 - 1 ,,,, SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GRAVEL SURFACING requirements of "Coarse Aggregate Grading", as specified herein, for percentage passing each sieve by weight. Coarse aggregates of different characteristics, through tested and approved, shall not be mixed with other aggregates; but shall be stored, batched and weighed separately. E. Rejection: Coarse aggregates which fail to meet the requirements of these specifications may be rejected by the Owner. Such rejections shall incur no cost to the Owner. Coarse aggregate sources, from which materials with properties not meeting these specifications are delivered, may be rejected as a further supply sources to the project by the Owner. Such rejection shall incur no cost to the Owner. F. Coarse Aggregate Grading: Aggregate shall meet ASTM C33 - Size No Sieve 1 1 /2" (37.5 mm) 1" (25.4 mm) 3/4" (19.0 mm) 1 /2" (12.5 mm) No. 4 (4.75 mm) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 5 Requirements: Percentage Passing 100% 90 - 100% 20 - 55% 0 - 10% 0 5% A. Preparation of the subgrade shall be in conformity with the requirements of Section 02200 Earthwork and as follows: 1. Compact 6" subgrade to 95% stD Proctor ASM D1557. B. Material shall be placed at a minimum 4" final thickness. C. Material placed upon the subgrade shall be spread and shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather or other unforeseen circumstances cause the spreading and shaping of the material during the first 24 hours after delivery to be impracticable, the material shall be scarified, if necessary, and spread. The material shall be sprinkled and then bladed, dragged and shaped to conform to the sections required. All areas and nests of segregated coarse or fine material shall be corrected or removed and replaced with well -graded material. All irregularities, depressions or weak spots which develop in the foundation course shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding suitable material as required, reshaping and compacting by sprinkling and rolling. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02730 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GRAVEL SURFACING 0" j D. Compaction rolling shall be done with tamping rollers and/or pneumatic tire rollers, as directed by the Owner. Finish rolling shall be done with three wheeled, 10-ton (9000 kg) rollers. E. One roller unit of the type required by the Owner shall be provided for each 100 cubic yards (75 m3 ), or fraction thereof, of material placed per hour. The quantity placed per hour shall be determined by averaging the total quantity of material placed in any one day. The use of weights, extra rollers, drums, tires or other equipment attached to a roller unit shall not be considered as sufficient to reduce the number of roller units required on the project. F. Any deviation in excess of 1/4" (6 mm), as shown by the straightedge or template on the finished foundation course, shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping and re -compacting by sprinkling and rolling. G. Succeeding courses shall be constructed by the same methods as specified for the first course. H. The completed base course shall have a uniform density of not less than 92% of the maximum density determined by ASTM D1557. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum. END OF SECTION 02730 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 02730 - 3 GRAVEL SURFACING ii SECTION 11890 - SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 4. Agenda: a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions and requirements for equipment installation. b. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. -. C. Review shop drawings. d. Approve proposed equipment. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to equipment — installation and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for -- coping with unfavorable conditions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Contractor shall submit complete detailed shop drawings, product - data specs, and equipment list to the Architect for review prior to fabrication or ordering of materials. Shop drawings shall indicate all mounting heights, rough opening requirements, anchorage devices, etc. B. Operation Instructions: Provide three sets of operation and service manuals including safety procedures, instructions on proper operation of all equipment, parts listing, recommended parts inventory, purchase source listing, copies of warranties and certificates, etc. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials properly packaged and protected. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation and erections against any damage and stains. B. The manufacturer shall provide spare parts for two years of normal operation to the extent required by each of the subsequent sections. These shall be tagged or ,. failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual, 711 unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions. Defective materials shall be removed by the Owner, shipped prepaid to the manufacturer, replaced and returned by the manufacturer at no cost to the Owner and reinstalled by the Owner. 1. The warranty period is 12 months starting on date of beneficial occupancy and use of the shooting range. 2. During the warranty period, the manufacturer shall send at no charge, a Technician to service the range as many times as may be required for its successful operation provided that the Owner's required service has been performed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Action Target: 1-801-377-8033, Contact: Quin Seamons �,, 2.02 EOUIPMENT of fugitive bullet particles from oblique misdirected shots that may enter them. 4. Constructional Requirements a. The separators shall be rigidly constructed and permanently attached the floor at their bases, to the sidewalls and across their tops by means of cross -members. The cross -members shall be furnished by the rpanufacturer and fabricated according to field dimensions to fit the — M 004 C. push button is in the firing line security system, and places the range under cease-fire ,emergencycondition when latched on. Range -master Call Feature - Adjacent and parallel to the activities control there shall be a field of indicator lights. Each light latches on when called by its corresponding local control. A switch allows the range -master to unlatch (turn off) the lights when the situation has been resolved. 2) Local Controls - The local control shall provide one switch for the range -master call feature. When engaged it illuminates a corresponding light on the activities control. 3) Signal Light Terminals - The illumination of the lights shall follow the range -master's controls for the direction of the shooters. All red lights shall illuminate whenever the range -master uses the emergency switch and whenever triggered by the firing line security system. 4) Miscellaneous Requirements - This system shall operate on low voltage circuits (24 vdc) and be electrically compatible with all subsystems in the range such as the range timer, firing line security system, etc. Firing Line Security System 1. Firing Line Security System - A violation of the firing line (someone advances downrange from the firing line) shall be monitored by a firing line security system. This shall sound an audible alarm within the range to warn those occupying the range of the danger. 2. There shall be a field on the master control panel for the firing line security system. It shall provide an indicator light to show when the system is armed, a warning light to show when violated, a reset button, and an audible alarm on/off switch. 3. Multiple bays - The firing line security system shall function as specified in the previous section but shall be divided into bays as shown on the plans. Each bay shall have an individual firing line security system. If anyone is violated, all of the range condition lights change to red, and an indicator light on the master control panel shows in which bay the violation occurred. Separate reset switches on the master control panel shall allow the range - master to activate and to reset the bays separately. D. Communications system 1. Audio communication system - two way communication shall be provided between rangemaster and shooters. 2. The rangemaster shall be able to selectively communicate with an individual, a group or all shooters in unison. 3. Each firing position shall be equipped with an audio station that has both speaker and microphone capabilities. 4. Master audio console - shall contain a channel selection panel, a talk/listen button separate volume controls for sending and receiving transmissions and a call button to communicate with all channels simultaneously. A call in from LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 11890 - 5 SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT an individual station shall activate an audible tone and an LED indicator light on the master console. A pre -tone sound at the individual audio stations shall notify the shooter of a transmission from the rangemaster. 5. A separate gooseneck microphone and volume control shall be provided and installed in desk console. E. Rifle Target System 1. Popper Target by Action Target, Inc. a. Popper HP steel silhouette b. Air compressor actuation C. Located as per plans d. "Ultra" range control by Action Target, Inc. F. Handgun Target System 1. DLX 90 by Action Target, Inc. a. "Smart" range control by Action Target, Inc. b. Air compressor actuation C. Located as per plans PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. B. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment as per manufacturer's written instructions in compliance with approved shop drawings. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operating and maintenance procedures for all range equipment and systems to designated Owner representative. END OF SECTION 11890 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 11890 - 6 SHOOTING RANGE EQUIPMENT SECTION 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Proposal Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Work included in Division 15 includes furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, drayage, rigging, fees, permits, inspections, etc., necessary for proper complete installation and operation of all mechanical equipment and Work as shown on the drawings and / or specified herein. All Work that may be called for in the specifications but not shown on the drawings; or, all Work that may be shown on the drawings but not called for in the specifications, shall be performed by the Contractor as if described in both. Should Work be required for fulfilling of the intent thereof; then, the Contractor shall perform all such Work as fully as if it were specifically set forth in the contract documents. C. Mechanical Drawings accompanying the plans are necessarily diagrammatic and can not show every detail or every line of piping in its exact location. They are subject to the requirements of ordinances, structural, and Architectural conditions that compose this facility. D. Investigate site and finish conditions and arrange Work accordingly; furnish all f ttings and accessories required to meet the conditions and give satisfactory I peration. Work shall be laid out to be concealed in furred chases and suspended above ceilings, etc., in finished portions of buildings, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work to be installed to avoid any negative impact or crippling of structural members. E. The Contractor, by submitting a Proposal, sets forth that he has the necessary technical training and ability and that he will install his Work in a satisfactory and good Workmanlike manner up to the best standard of the trade, complete and in good Working order. The right to make any reasonable change in the location of the outlets, apparatus, and equipment up to time of rough -in is reserved by the Owner without involving additional expense to the Owner. F. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of equipment up to time of roughing -in without involving any additional expense. G. Design Criteria: 1. Cooling: Outside:102°Fdb / 75°Fwb Cooling: Inside: 72°Fdb / 50%RH, 85°F 2. Heating: Outside: 10°Fdb .�• Heating: Inside: 740Fdb LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 1 �+ SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the term "Mechanical Contractor" appears in this Division of the Specifications, it is to be construed as referring as being both individually and collectively to the air conditioning / heating Contractors. B. Any reference to the "Architect/Engineer" shall mean Contracting Officer. C. Any reference to the "Owner" shall mean Mansfield Independent School District. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Before submitting a Proposal, the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the rules of all governing boards having jurisdiction, and shall notify the Owner before submitting a Proposal, if in his opinion, any Work or material specified is contrary to such rules; otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for the approval of aII Work or materials at no extra cost to the Owner, and in the use of any material specified is not permitted, a substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no extra cost. B. Work shall conform to the latest edition of the following: 1. Local Mechanical and Building Codes. 2. Requirements of Electric Utilities Departments having local jurisdiction. — 3. U.L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 4. I.E.E.E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 5. A.W.S. American Welding Society 6. A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing and Materials. 7. N.E.M.A. National Electrical Manufacturing Association. 8. A.S.M.E. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 9. 'O.S.H.A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 10. 10. N.F.C. National Fire Code. 11. 11. A.R.I. American Refrigeration Institute. 12. 12. N.F.P.A. National Fire Protection Association. 13. 13. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, Air Cond. Engineers 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor of Work specified herein is required to have engaged in mechanical contracting business for a minimum of two (2) years to Proposal date and be — prepared to show evidence and references if required by Owner. B. It will be assumed that the Contractor, by submitting a Proposal, has become — familiar with all regulatory agencies listed above and that the Work will be performed accordingly. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS I A. Plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and arrangements as indicated therein. 1. Shop drawings approval and/or submittals indicates only the acceptance of the Manufacturer and quality, and assumes that the specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans and specifications. 2. The Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, furnish all accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and perform all Work necessary for proper functioning and to fit any substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated on the plans and specifications. B. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, drywall, C.M.U., Contractor shall certify by marking the submittal indicating that he has checked all applicable Contract Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed. C. Submittal shall be made for the following (but not necessarily limited to the following): Valves and specialties. Air distribution equipment. HVAC equipment. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings shall contain sufficient plans, elevation, sections, and schematics to clearly describe the apparatus. All shop drawings shall be drawing to at least 1/8" = F-0" scale. 2. Shop drawings shall be done for the following (but are not necessarily limited to ) a. All ductwork (horizontal and vertical). b. HVAC equipment. C. Connection point details of all HVAC equipment, air distribution equipment, roof drains and other apparatus deemed necessary by the Engineer. d. Control diagrams. 1.06 FEES A. Procure all necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all Work installed including tap fees: 1. Deliver to Owner before final acceptance. 2. Pay all charges for connection to utilities. 3. Pay all inspection fees necessary. B. Coordinate with local utilities for the furnishings of all electrical meters. Contractor shall arrange for and pay all costs, tap fees and deposits for complete meter system and service entrance. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 3 .•, SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 1.07 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. All Work shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year for the date of final _ acceptance. Purchase and supply an additional Manufacturer's warranty on all components cover by such. B. Any material failing to give satisfactory service during the guarantee period shall be replaced with new materials. Guarantee shall include the replacement of materials, equipment, oil, refrigerant, and labor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF WORK A. All work may possibly take place while building is occupied. Proper precautions will be taken to insure the safety of the occupants. 1.09 SITE INVESTIGATION A. The Contractor is to visit the site and ascertain conditions to be met there in installing the Work and make due provisions for same in the Proposal. 1. It will be assumed that the Contractor in submitting a Proposal has visited the site and that the Proposal covers all Work necessary. 2. Failure to comply with this requirement shall not be considered justification for omission or faulty installation of any Work or for payment of extra compensation of Work covered by specifications and plans. B. Locations and elevations of utilities shown on plan have been obtained from site utility plans, existing plans, and site inspection. The Contractor shall examine the site and verify the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall be adequately informed as to their relationship to the Work before entering into a contract. 1.10 SAFETY STANDARDS A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to initiate, maintain, and supervise all safety precautions required by local, state and federal laws, School District Building and Site Design Safety Requirements including OSHA and NFPA codes and standards. B. All Manufacturers named are a basis as a standard of quality, and substitutions of any equal product will be considered for acceptance. The judgment of equality of product substitution shall be made by the Engineer. _ C. Procure all necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all Work installed, including tap fees, and: _ 1. Deliver to Owner before final acceptance. 2. Pay all charges for connection to utilities, 3. Pay all inspection fees necessary. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS i 0- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the Manufacturer's name, trade name and the UL label in every case where a standard has been established. The equipment to be furnished under each Section shall be the standard product of a Manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment. Furnish all accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to fully complete the Work in good Working order. B. Contractor shall site fabricate only those items which cannot be shop fabricated. All ductwork shall be shop fabricated. C. The Contractor is responsible for the fabrication and manufacturing of all equipment which is purchased for installation as a part of this project. The Owner shall look solely to the Contractor for remedy of defects and deficiencies in the fabrication and manufacture of equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LOCAL MECHANICAL BOARDS A. After the contract has been signed, the Contractor is responsible for having all Work meet with the requirements of the governing ordinances and appeal boards. B. No extra to the contract will be granted to correct any discrepancy existing between the Work and the local ordinances. C. Before submitting a Proposal, Contractor shall familiarize himself with the rules of all governing boards having jurisdiction, and he shall notify the Owner before submitting his Proposal, if in his opinion, any Work or material specified is contrary to such rules; otherwise, the Mechanical Contractor is responsible for the approval of all Work or materials, and in case the use of any material specified is not permitted, substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no increase in cost. 3.02 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS A. Concrete foundations and pads required for equipment shall be provided under the Section that includes the equipment (except where otherwise noted) in conformity with details on drawings. 1. All dimensions shown on the plans are for a specific Manufacturer and the dimensions may require changing if another Manufacturer is used. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 5 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 2. Where details are not shown, they shall be constructed according to the recommendations of the Manufacturer of the respective equipment and with the approval of the Architect. 3. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured in galvanized steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with a suitable plate at bottom end of the sleeve to hold the bolt. Allow one inch (1") below the equipment bases for alignment, leveling and grouting. 4. Grouting shall be done after the equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the foundation bolts shall be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmied, if necessary. 5. After removal of the forms, the surface of the foundation shall be rubbed. 6. Unless otherwise noted, foundations shall be six (6") inches high. Reinforcing shall be #3 bars at six (6") inches on center each way unless indicated otherwise. 3.0 OPENINGS IN FIRE AND SMOKE -RATED FLOORS AND WALLS F _ A. All openings in fire and smoke -rated floors and walls, shall be completely sealed after ducts and piping installation for a completely air -tight fire rated installation. Seal including fire dampers shall be non-combustible and UL approved and rated. 3.04 SLEEVES A. Where concealed pipes pass through partitions, walls, and floors, provide galvanized steel pipe sleeves of sizes to readily accommodate pipe, or pipe plus insulation. 1. For vertical pipes and conduit through concrete beams, provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe. B. Pipe projecting through structure to be made water -tight. 3.05 EQUIPMENT BASES A. Equipment bases for all 1iVAC equipment shall be provided for by the Contractor as detailed on the plans. The Contractor shall support all items with necessary equipment to be directly supported on roof. 3.06 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted, provide and install chrome -plated sectional floor and ceiling plates around pipes passing exposed through walls, floors and ceilings. B. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 6 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 3.07_ PATCHING A. Should any structural difficulties prevent installation of fixtures, equipment, running of pipes, ducts, etc., at all points shown on plans, then necessary minor deviations therefrom, as determined by the Owner, may be permitted and must be made without additional cost to the Owner. B. Any necessary cutting into partitions, walls, floors to be neatly and carefully done. No cutting into structural parts of building, likely to impair strength of building, to be done without approval of Owner. C. Mechanical Contractor to be held responsible for all damage caused by his Work or through the neglect of his Workmen. All patching and repairing of damaged Work to be done under direction of the Owner at the expense of the Contractor. 3.08 SCAFFOLDING A. Furnish and erect at Contractor's expense and risk, any and all appliances, scaffolding, lights, guards, temporary walks, tools, transportation, etc., required for the proper construction or protection of this Work. 3.09 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT A. Immediately upon installation, all HVAC equipment shall be covered with tarpaulins or other suitable means to prevent damage, entry of plaster, debris or insulating materials. 3.10 LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Fixtures and equipment shall be as shown on the Architectural Plans and Elevations. Locations of fixtures or equipment not shown on the Architectural Drawings shall be established or verified in writing or by shop drawings. B. Contractor to be responsible for coordination of all equinment_ nininu_ etc__ in B. Where mechanical Work occurs in masonry walls, the installation shall be sufficiently complete in advance of construction. _ 1. Fittings, appurtenances, etc., shall be installed in such a manner and at such locations as to avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry units. 2. Work erected in advance of masonry shall be securely supported, permanently braced and held in position to prevent displacement. Cutting and fitting of masonry around properly located equipment will be done by masons. 3. Place Work located in partitions or ceilings ahead of the construction, with equipment wired in place. 4. The Subcontractors shall have a representative on the job during all concrete pours to insure that all of the equipment is adequately supported and protected and will not be adversely affected by such operations. C. Cooperate with the local utility companies in such a manner that the installation of all services proceeds in an orderly manner, and meets all requirements of the specific companies involved, 3.12 SUPERVISION A. All Work in connection with this Contract will be under the supervision and to the entire satisfaction of the Owner or an authorized representative who shall determine all questions as to the satisfactory completion of the Work, or any part thereof, and defects to be remedied. B. The Contractor shall give personal attention to all parts of the Work and shall employ only skilled and reliable Workers in the performance thereof. They shall accord the Owner the right to decide upon and discontinue the services of any Worker who does not possess satisfactory skill and qualifications, or its otherwise objectionable. 3.13 PARTS LIST AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. At the close of the job, 30 days prior to final review, four bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal to the Architect and Owner for review and acceptance. 1. Equipment warranties. 2. Contractor's warranty. 3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment with names and addresses of Manufacturers. 4. Operating Instructions (in writing). 5. Balance and Test readings. 6. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the.systems. 7. As -built equipment shop drawings, all cuts and capacity information. B. Brochures shall be bound, indexed and tabbed, referencing items to the plans and specifications regarding locations of equipment and materials. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 8 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS A. At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a set of reproducible tracings showing all ductwork, equipment, piping, valves, etc., installed by the Contractor. 1. These drawings shall be complete in every detail and shall incorporate all changes made during the course of the project. 2. These drawings shall be prepared in such a manner as to enable the Owner to properly maintain, operate, and repair both concealed and exposed Work. 3.15 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be refinished to present a neat, workmanlike appearance which the original equipment color. B. Any painting of equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed under this Section of the Specifications will be under the painting section of the specification. However, the Contractor shall leave his Work clean and free from any grease, dirt, rust, etc., in suitable condition for painting. 3.16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. All items of mechanical equipment shall be identified by approved name plates to be provided by the Contractor furnishing the equipment. 1. Name plates shall be securely affixed to each individual piece of equipment and also to each starter, switch, relay, transformer, etc., which controls that equipment. ..� 2. Name plates shall bear notations corresponding to the same notations of the framed wiring diagrams and/or operating instructions. N FOE B. Name plates to be aluminum, 2 1/2" x 3/4", with a black enamel background, with etched or engraved natural aluminum lettering (unless specifically described elsewhere in this specifications). Aluminum name plates are furnished by Seton Name Plate Corp., 06505. 3.17 VIBRATION ISOLATION: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any and all objectionable vibration transmission associated with any system provided under this division after completion and shall correct same as directed at his own expense. 3.18 TEMPORARY WATER FAUCETS AND EQUIPMENT A. Refer to the General Conditions for temporary utilities. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15010 - 9 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS 3.19 ACCESSIBILITY A. All equipment shall be installed in such a way that all components requiring access (such as drain pans, drains, fire dampers, control dampers, control operators, motors, drives, etc.) are so located and installed that they may be serviced, rest, replaced or recalibrated, etc., by service people with normal service tools and equipment. 1. If any equipment or components are shown in such a position that this Contractor cannot comply with the above, the Contractor shall notify the T general Contractor and attempt to resolve the problem of access. 2. If this consultation is not successful, the Architect and Engineer shall be notified in writing and a decision requested. 3.20 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation, maintenance, lubrication and general operating requirements of the system. A certificate stating the date shall be submitted so the Architect prior to final acceptance of the Work. B. The Contractor shall conduct start-up and operating test of each major item of equipment in accordance with Section 15050 - Testing and Balancing. 1. During The operating text, the Contractor shall operate each item of equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. At least seven days notice shall be given to the Engineer prior to Equipment start-up and operating test. 3. All test and balance reports required in Section 15050 shall be presented to the Engineer prior to these tests. 4. In addition, the "catalog data" called for shall be available prior to the test being made. 3.21 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Openings in floors, walls, and roof shall be furnished by the General Contractor. The Contractor shall inform the General Contractor of the location and size required. 1. The Contractor shall furnish all sleeves, frames, including framing between joist unless shown on the Architectural or Structural drawings, access doors, prefabricated curbs, and other accessories necessary for a complete installation. 2. Only those items specifically shown and/or specified in other Sections are excluded. B. Flashing of roof for curbs, pipes, stands, etc., shall be by the general Contractor (roofer). (Curbs and counter flashing shall be by the Contractor.) C. Power wiring, including final connections, is by the Electrical Contractor. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15010 - 10 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS r-+ 1. The Contractor shall install all motors and furnish the starting equipment to the Electrical Contractor for installation 2. Control wiring, including 115 volt from power source, conduit, switches, thermostats, interlocks, etc., shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings. 3. The Contractor shall see that the electrical equipment does not block access to service areas of equipment, i.e., disconnect switched mounted on the compressor or control access doors of equipment. END OF SECTION 15010 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15010 - 11 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS SECTION 15065 - PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the ., Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also include furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc., necessary for proper installation of pipe, pipe fittings, pipe jointing, protective coating, floor and ceiling plates and painting. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15220 Domestic Water Systems C. Section 15301 Soil, Waste and Vent System D. Section 02550 Site Utilities 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials B. AWS - American Welding Society C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute r" 1.04 SERVICES A. This Subcontractor shall make all connections between the utility mains and the building, sanitary sewer, domestic water and gas systems. Before any installation is started the contractor shall verify on site the locations and elevations of all utility connections. B. Extensions of services into the building shall be fabricated from the same serials as the utility lines or those materials herein after specified for the building service. Where dissimilar metals are used, proper dielectric isolators as here in before specified shall be installed. Should points of service vary from that shown on the LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 1 �, SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS drawings, the subcontractor shall properly allow for this in his installation and price. PART 2 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS AND MATERIAL A. Domestic Underground Piping Exterior and Under Slab: Above Ground within Building: B. Sanitary Water and Vent within Building: Option Option C. Underground Storm Drainage: D. Gas Pipe: E. Condensate Drain F. Storm Drain Piping in Building Option Type K, Soft Copper annealed temper. Type L, hard drawn temper, wrought copper, soldered joint fittings. PVC; Cast iron soil pipe. Copper DWV. Galvanized steel (vents only) Same as Sanitary for both inside and outside building. Schedule 40 black steel. Type M Copper. Black steel Schedule 40, welded connections. Cast iron drainage pipe with hub joints or Victaulic couplings. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. Copper Pipe: Type K, L, and M Copper pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI H23.1. B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 1. Cast iron Soil pipe shall be service weight cast soft pipe ASTM-A-74 with neoprene gasket compression joints. 2. Where allowed by local coed "No Hub" neoprene sleeve and stainless steel band and clamp type joints will be allowed except underneath slabs. C. PVC Drainage Pipe: Drainage piping shall be poly -vinyl chloride drainage waste and vent piping ASTM-D-2665-73. Sanitary drainage pattern fitting shall be used throughout. Install in complete accordance with IAMPOIS 9-75. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15065 - 2 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS D. Drainage Piping: Copper drainage pipe shall be Type DWV copper drainage tubing, ASTM-B-306 with cast bronze solder joint DWV fittings, Drainage pattern ANSI-B-16.23. Solder material 50-50 tin lead ASTM-b-32. E. Carbon Steel (Black or Galvanized): 1. Steel pipe shall be black conforming to ASTM-A-120, a-135, or A-53. Grade B, 3/4" - 1 1/2" Type F and 2" - 24" Type E or S, or hot dipped Galvanized as indicated. Sizes 2" and smaller shall be threaded and joined with 150 pound malleable iron fittings conforming to ASTM-A-47. Pipe shall be joined by using standard weight, factory fabricated fittings and weld on 2 1/2" and larger pipe. Galvanized steel pipe shall be joined by couplings. Welding and threading shall not be used to join galvanized pipe. 2. Use cast iron threaded drainage pattern, galvanized ANSI-B-12 for drainage and vent. Threaded fittings shall be malleable iron threaded and banded, ANSI-B-16.3 rated 140 PSIG SWP, 200 PSIG WOG. 2.03 FITTINGS: ELLS, TEES, CROSSES, BUSHINGS A. Materials for fittings shall match the pipe system category for pressure, temperature, and corrosion. B. Fittings for low pressure, and/or low temperature shall be: 1. Steel - galvanized or black a. Size under 2 inches: 1) Screwed, malleable iron fittings, Class 150 b. Size 2 inches and larger: 1) Screwed, malleable iron fittings, Class 150 Welded, steel butt - welding fittings, Schedule 40 Grooved couplings, ductile iron clamps, Schedule 40 fittings. 2. Copper - Wrought or cast copper, Solder type 3. PVC - PVC Schedule 40, solvent -welding fittings, schedule 40. C. Fittings for more severe service shall match the pipe system. 1. Steel - Screwed, ductile iron fittings, Class 300 welded, steel butt -welding fittings, Schedule 80 2. Copper - Cast copper 3. PVC - PVC Schedule 80, solvent welded type. 4. FRP - FRP heat -cured bonding agent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install concrete inserts, beam clamps, or other fixtures to support the pipe hangers acceptable to the engineer. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 3 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS B. Provide hanger rods and loops or sleeves, to support the pipe at the height and grade required for proper drainage and air elimination. C. Welding: 1. In general, black steel piping systems 2 1/2" in size and larger may be welded construction using either oxyacetylene or electric arc methods. 2. All welding shall be done by first class pipe welders meeting qualifications covered by the American Standard Code for Pressure Piping (ASA 1331.1). Welding shall conform to the standards and requirements of this code and all applicable state and local codes. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require qualifying demonstrations of any welder assigned to the job by this contractor. 3. Except as specified otherwise, changes in direction, intersection of lines, and reductions in pipe size shall be made with factory -fabricated welding fittings. — Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching or straight runs to form tees, or any similar construction will not be permitted. Welding fittings for steel piping shall be wrought carbon steel butt -weld fittings conforming to ASTM _ specification No. A234 and ANSI standard B 16.9 Weld fittings shall be standard weight. 4. Piping shall be cut smooth, square and burrs removed with a reamer before _ welding is begun. Welding electrodes shall be of the material compatible with the piping material used and shall be coated and of the diameter as recommended by the manufacturer for the type and thickness of work being done. Chill or back up rings will not be permitted. All welds shall be carefully chipped and thoroughly brushed clean after each pass. 5. In no case shall Schedule 40 pipe be welded with less than three (3) passes including one (1) tack, one (1) filler, and one (1) lacer. Schedule 80 pipe shall be welded with not less than four (4) passes including one (1) tack, two (2) filler, and one (1) lacer. 6. Galvanized pipe shall not be joined by weld. 7. Care shall be exercised for safety and fire protection during on -site field welding. 8. Welded pipe joints or connections shall be subjected to tests with hydrostatic pressure. Initial test pressure shall be 50% of normal system pressure or 50 psig, whichever is the greatest. This pressure being maintained until each welded joint has received the hammer test. The weight of the hammer shall be approximately two pounds and should be hammered around the entire welded joint. Final test at 250 psig or one and one-half times the system's operating pressure, whichever is the greatest and maintained a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection to be made of all joints and connections. General sweating of any weld is cause for its rejection, complete removal and — rewelding. D. Threaded and Coupled joints: — 1. Threaded and coupled piping systems shall utilize only American Standard pipe threads IPS threaded 2. Pipe shall be cut smooth and square and all burrs shall be removed with a — reamer. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS 3. Tapered threads sfia be properly cut so that when the pipe is pulled up tight in the coupling, at least three (3) full threads remain exposed. 4. Joints shall be made tight with graphite and oil applied to the pipe treads only and not to the fittings. No pipe tread caulking compound shall be used. 5. Threaded fittings shall be standard weight, malleable iron, conforming to ANSI B 16.19 or may be standard 150 psig or 300 psig cast iron threaded fittings. 6. Galvanized pipe shall be threaded and coupled. 4" E. Brazed or Soldered Joints: 1. Copper piping systems shall be jointed with solder joints except that water distribution systems buried below building slabs shall be joined with compression type fittings. NOTE THAT ALL SOLDER ON DOMESTIC WATER LINES SHALL BE LEAD FREE. 2. For solder type joints, the tubing shall be cut smooth and square and all burrs removed with a reamer and when necessa ry, tubing shall be rounded out with a sizing tool. Hack saw cut pipe ends will not be acceptable. 3. All surfaces shall be properly cleaned by polishing both cup and fitting and the tube end with steel wool or fine sand cloth. 4. After cleaning, brazing flux shall be applied to both the pipe and the fittings. The use of corrosive acid flux WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. During the silver brazing of refrigerant pipe and fittings, the pipe must be charged with nitrogen gas. 5. Solder shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the pressures involved, but shall generally be 95 5 hard solder. 6. After inserting tubing in cup of fitting, apply flame to outside of cup only. Do not apply solder until after the fitting and pipe have reached proper heat. After connection is made, remove excess solder with brush and wipe clean. V1 F. Cast Iron Joints: 1 Cast iron pipe systems shall be joined with lead and oakum, performed neoprene joints or no -hub connectors at the subcontractor's option, as allowed by code. 2. Piping shall be carefully handled after joint is made to insure that joint and material are not damaged. 3. Mechanical coupling joints shall be assembled in strict accordance with the recommendations of the coupling joint manufacturer. The bolts, fasteners, gaskets and lubricants shall be a product of the joint manufacturer. G. Flanged Joints: 1. Flanges for piping systems shall be 150 psig or 300 psig forged steel welding neck flanges. Forged carbon steel flanges shall be ANSI 150 psig or 300 psig design, conforming to ANSI B16.5 and ASTM AA-181 Grade I or II similar. 2. Each fitting shall be stamped as specified by ANSI B 16.9 and in addition shall have the _laboratory control number stenciled on each fitting for ready reference as to physical properties and chemical composition of the material. Complete test reports may be required for any fitting selected at random. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 5 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS 3. Gaskets used shall be ring form, dimensioned to fit accurately within the bolt circle, shall be 1/16" thick, and shall be machine -cut. Inside diameter shall conform to the nominal pipe size. 4. Bolts used shall be square head carbon steel bolts with semifinished hexagon nuts of ASTM A307-90 Grade B. Bolts shall each have a tensile strength of not less than 60,000 psi. 5. Flat -faced flanges shall be furnished where required to match flanges on check valves, strainers, pumps and other equipment. H. Grooved Joints: 1. Grooved black iron or steel pipe may be cut or hydraulically grooved; however, galvanized iron pipe shall only be hydraulically grooved. 2. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings, butterfly and check valves and mechanical - T stub -ins, as manufactured by the Victaulic Company, may be used for piping systems and connecting mechanical equipment in lieu of welded, and/or chilled, and fire protection water systems, in piping 4" and over. 3. Piping materials for grooved pipe shall be standard weight black steel grade pipe conforming to ASTM Specification A53, Grade B, Type E or S, or ASTM Specification A120, Type E or S, standard square cut grooved to coupling manufacturer's specifications. 4. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 75, 77, HP 70 and Style 07, "Zero -Flex" rigid type for grooved and pipe. Couplings segments shall be cast of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47 or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536. 5. Gaskets, elastomer type, shall have properties as designated ASTM C 2000. Water Service - Gasket supplied will be EPDM Grade "e" color coded green, conforming to ASTM 2000. Designation 2CA615A25B44Z for water services to 230 degrees F. 6. Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel. Conforming to ASTM A183, minimum tensile 110,000 psi. 7. Branch Stub -in connections, where permitted, shall be made with Victaulic Mechanical - T styles 920, 921, and 922 in lieu of welded stubs. 8. Fittings shall be of grooved or shouldered and designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings without field preparation, and shall be malleable iron - ASTM A-047; and/or ductile iron - ASTM A-536. 9. Flanges for connecting flanges components into a grooved system shall be Victaulic Vic -Flanges. Flanges shall conform to #125 cast iron and #150 steel bolt hole alignment. Steel Pipe - Vic Flanges for steel pipe shall be Style 741 in sizes 4" - 1215 . Materials - Malleable Iron ASTM - A-47 Ductile Iron ASTM A-536 10. Butterfly valves shall be Victaulic series 700, 703, and 704 or equal of grooved end design in sizes 4" through 12". Valves shall be lined with Grade "E" EPDM for operating conditions not to exceed - 30 to 200 degrees F temperature. All Butterfly valves 8" and larger shall be equipped with manual gear operator. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 6 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS 11. Check valve se ��,�� . nes ''10 orl T shall be grooved end design. Check valve will be of a non -slamming spring closing operation and suitable in a horizontal or vertical position. 12. Pipe Preparation: The pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. The dimensions should be according to the standard cut groove or roll groove specifications as recommended by Victaulic. Pipe grooving in the field shall be accomplished utilizing a Victaulic Automatic �., Depth -Stop Grooving Tool. 13. Pipe and fitting assembly requires that all nuts should be tightened to assure firm metal contact of the coupling pads. All grooved products shall be of one domestic manufacturer. 14. couplings may be used in lieu of expansion joints and loops. On pump hook- ups, a minimum of three (3) Victaulic style 77 couplings may be installed in lieu of flex connectors. 15. Manufacturer shall provide field service engineer to assure installers adhere to manufacturer's installation instructions. 16. Manufacturers of grooved products shall not be mixed. I. Pipe Protection: 1. Black or galvanized steel pipe, underground, shall be protected by factory wrapping coal tar primer; coal tar pitch, 15 pound tar saturated fiberglass felt draft paper wrapped. Equal protection factory applied polyvinyl chloride (Mill wrapped) by Standard Pipe Protection, Inc., or 3M epoxy coating or equal will be an acceptable substitute. J. Unions: 1. Materials for unions shall match the pipe system category for pressure, temperature, and corrosion. 2. Unions for low pressure and/or low temperature shall be: a. Steel - screwed, Class 150, malleable iron, O-ring or brass seat, welded neck flanges with gaskets C. PVC - solvent welded, flange to flange, with gasket 3. Unions for more severe service shall match the pipe system for pressure, temperature, and corrosion. a. Steel - screwed, Class 300, ductile iron, brass seat, welded neck flanges with gaskets b. Copper - cast brass flanges with gasket c: FRP - FRP flanges with gasket [i TN;n1--+r;- TT-:- A-11 ne.,n. ..4o nil P...... -A 2. Solid plates with set screws shall be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in adequate size. L. Expansion/Contraction: 1. Piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and in such a manner as to excessive strain and stress in the piping, in connection and in equipment to which piping is connected. Provide expansion loop and pipe anchor as required. Anchor should be located near beams or joist. M. Painting: 1. Refer to Section 15010 -General Mechanical Provisions. N. Insulating Bussings: 1. Insulating bussing to separate copper and galvanized and/or black steel pipe, at all points with cast iron water pipe, copper, galvanized or black steel pipe rise up out of ground on house side of gas meter and elsewhere as required. O. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals Installation: 1. Provide pipe sleeve of galvanized steel at each wall or floor penetration. Sleeve shall be no lighter than 18 gauge and shall be built into the wall or floor during construction of the wall. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeve shall allow for insulation thickness. 2. Wall sleeves shall be even with both sides of the finished wall. 3. Floor sleeves shall project approximately 1/2" above the finished floor and be even with the underside of the floor. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place or permanently sealed into the floor structure to prevent any water on the floor above from the following pipe system. P. Escutcheons Installation: 1. Install escutcheons on piping through walls and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view. 2. Install escutcheons on exterior of building on piping penetrations through walls. 3. Secure escutcheon to pipe or, insulation ,so escutcheon covers penetration hole and is flush with adjoining surface. 4. Escutcheons for small pipes may be spring clip type. Escutcheons for larger pipes shall be held by set screws. Q. Cleaning and Treating of Pipe Systems 1. Every pipe system shall be cleaned to remove trash, mill scale, cutting oil, and welding and burning splatter from the lines before any control devices are installed. If such debris has collected in valves, the valves shall be disassembled and cleaned prior to closing for the firsf time. 2. After several hours of operation, each strainer shall be blown down. This _ shall be repeated as often as necessary to produce a clean discharge from the blowdown. Prior to turning system over to the owner, every strainer shall be removed and cleaned. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 8 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS R. Identification and do Of' coding shall be provided for all piping systems in accordance with ANSI A13.1. S. TESTING 1. Every pipe system shall be tested at 1.5 times its operating pressure, but no less than 125 psi unless the engineer agrees to a lesser pressure. 2. Pipe and fittings shall be tested before any insulation or other covering is applied. 3. Testing may be performed in sections before vital equipment is connected if the test pressure is above the equipment rating. 4. Test medium shall be water under hydrostatic pressure with all air removed from the system. With engineer's consent, the test may be performed with compressed air to prevent danger from freezing. Hydrostatic pressure shall be held for no less than 2 hours with no drop in pressure. Air test shall be held for no less than 4 hours and the engineer may require longer test periods. Questionable joints shall be soaped to prove tightness. 5. The Engineer, shall observe all tests. Notice to the engineer shall be given four full days before the testing is to be performed. END OF SECTION 15065 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15065 - 9 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR MEP SYSTEMS SECTION 15094 - HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES PART 1 PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15011 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. The Mechanical Subcontractors Work shall also includes furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc., necessary for proper installation of pipe hangers, anchors, supports, sleeves through walls, floor and roof and all equipment foundations and supports including but not limited to the following: 1. Pipe hangers 2. Hanger rods 3. Concrete foundations 4. Sleeves 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15011 General Mechanical Provisions. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing and Materials. B. A.S.H.R.A.E. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer via the Architect, prior to installation the following information and data for review and acceptance: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets on all cataloged items to be used. 2. Sketches covering all specially designed hanger assemblies and fabrications. 3. Sketches showing locations, loads, calculated travel, type, and sizes of all spring hanger assemblies. All sketches shall clearly show location and reference to all hangers to be installed at said location. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15094 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Provide an adequate pipe Engineering practices, using, hangers and accessories. suspension system in accordance with recognized where possible, standard, commercially accepted pipe B. All pipe hangers and supports shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASA - Code for Pressure Piping, B 31.1 and Manufacturer's Standardization Society documents MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. C. The pipe hanger assembly must be capable of supporting the line in all operating conditions. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the supporting force at each hanger in order to prevent excessive stress in either pipe or connected equipment. D. Where references below refer to "Type," there references shall be to Federal Specification WW-171. Where reference is to "Figure," it shall be to Fee & Mason designations used in their catalog. Equivalent products by Grinnell and others are acceptable. 1. Concrete Inserts - Where piping is supported from a concrete structure, inserts shall be type 18 or 19, or structural shapes where provided where a continuous insert is required. Where support rod size exceeds 7/8" diameter or where the pipe load exceeds the recommended load for the insert, use two inserts with a trapeze -type connecting member below the concrete. 2. Beam Clamps - Where piping is to be supported from structural steel, beam clamps, type 21, 28, 29, 60, or 31 shall be used. Beam clamp selections shall be on the basis of the required load to be supported. Where welded beam attachments are required, they shall be Figure 90, 131, 251, or 256. Holes drilled in structural steel for hanger support rods will not be permitted. 3. Riser Clamps - All vertical runs of piping shall be supported at each floor, and/or at specified intervals, by means of type 8 clamp for steel pipe, or Figure 368 clamp for copper tubing. For riser loadings in excess of the maximum recommended loads shown for the above items, clamps shall be designed in accordance with Figure 395 or 396. 4. Hanger Rods - Hanger fords shall be A.S.TM. A-107 continuous threaded rod. Eye rods shall be Figures 288 and 228 M. Where hanger rod sizes are catalog listed for a specified hanger, these sizes shall govern. Where hanger rod sizes are not listed, the load on the hanger shall be the determining factor listed, the load on the . hanger shall be the determining factor, and the maximum recommended hanger rod load as shown below shall govern. 5. Hanger Rod Loading - Maximum hanger rod load shall not exceed: Rod Diameter Maximum Load 3/8" 610 pounds 1/2" 1130 pounds LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15094 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES 5/811 18 1 O'p6unds 3/4r' 2710 pounds 7/811 3770 pounds 6. Hanger Spacing - The maximum allowable spacing for pipe hangers shall be in accordance with tabulation below. Where concentrated loads of valves, fittings, etc., occur closer spacing will be necessary and shall be based on the weight to be supported and the maximum recommended loads for the hanger components. STEEL PIPE Nominal pipe size Maximum space between hangers up to 1 1/4" 7 feet 1 1/211 9 feet 2" & 381 10 feet 41' & 5" 14 feet 611 17 feet 811 19 feet 1011 & 12" 22 feet 1411 25 feet 16" 27 feet COPPER PIPE Nominal pipe size Maximum space between hangers up to V 5 feet 1 1/4 "to 2 7 feet 2 1/2" 9 feet 3 10 feet 74 3 1/2" & 411 12 feet FRP and PVC pipe supports - Consult manufacturer's data for conditions and temperatures involved. 7. Hangers a. All hangers for piping 2 inches or larger shall be provided with means of vertical adjustment. b. On uninsulated steel pipe, hangers shall be type 1, 4, 6, or 11. On piping 2 inches and smaller, Figure 9, 10, or 25 will be permitted. C. On uninslated copper tubing, hangers shall be Figure 307, 364, or 365, or type 10 or 11. d. On hot insulated steel pipe, hangers shall be Figure 261 or welded attachments Figure 90, 92, 94, or 96. Where thermal movements causes the hanger rod to deviate more than 5 degrees from the vertical or where longitudinal expansion causes a movement of more that 1/2' in the piping supported from below, roller hangers, type 42, 44, 45, 47, or 48, shall be used in conjunction with a protection saddle, type 40, to suit the insulation thickness. On insulated steel pipe for chilled water or similar service, the hanger must be placed on the outside of the insulation with a type 41 shield. e. On insulated copper tubing, hangers shall be Figure 199, 201, 202 or 215 and shall be placed on the outside of the insulation with a type 41 shield. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15094-3 The type 41 shield shall be applied to distribute the hanger load over the insulation and to eliminate damage to the vapor barrier on the covering. _ f Base supports shall be type 39. 8. Brackets and Racks - Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns, welded steel brackets, types 32, 33 and 34 shall be used as base supports. Multiple pipe racks or trapeze hangers shall be fabricated from channel and accessories designed for this purpose. 9. Spring Hangers - Spring hangers shall be installed at hanger points where vertical thermal movement. occurs. For light loads and non -critical movements in excess of 1/4" , type 49, 50, or 51 variable spring supports shall be used. 10. Critical Systems - On critical systems, where movement is in excess of 1 /2" _ constant supports, type 52 shall be used. For vibration and/or shock loadings, use Figure 470, 471 or 472 sway braces. Where it is necessary to reduce pipe vibration and sound transmission to building steel, Figure 403 or 404 vibration _ control hangers shall be used. 11. Anchors, Guides, Sliding Supports - Anchors shall be installed as shown on the piping drawings. They may be Figure 140, 141, or 159. Guides shall be Figure 120, 121, 122, or 165. Sliding supports shall be Figure 143 or 145. 12. Auxiliary Steel - All auxiliary steel necessary for the installation of the pipe hangers and supports shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Steel Handbook, shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall receive one shop coat of primer paint. 2.02 PIPE SLEEVES A. Provide pipe sleeve of galvanized steel at each wall or floor penetration. Sleeve shall be no lighter than 18 gauge and shall be built into the wall or floor during construction of the wall. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeve shall allow for insulation thickness. B. Wall sleeves shall be even with both sides of the finished wall. C. Floor sleeves shall project approximately 1/2" above the finished floor and be even with the underside of the floor. Floor sleeves shall be cast in place or permanently sealed into the floor structure to prevent any water on the floor above from following the pipe system. 2.03 ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide escutcheon on each side of wall or floor penetrations to provide a finished appearance. For insulated pipes, the escutcheons shall surround the outside of the insulation. B. Escutcheons for small pipes may be spring clip type. Escutcheons for larger pipes shall be held by set screws. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15094 - 4 - SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 HANGERS, ANCHORS, SUPPORTS AND SLEEVES PART 3 - EXECUTION k r A. Install concrete inserts, beam clamps, or other fixtures to support the pipe hangers acceptable to the Engineer. B. Provide hanger rods and loops or sleeves to support the pipes at the height and grade required for proper drainage and air elimination. C. Pipe through walls, floors, or roofs, the annular space surrounding pipe effectively sealed Oakum and Thiokol grouted smooth on both sides. Sealing material shall be non-combustible and UL approved. D. Pipe running up through roof to be flashed and counterflashed (make water tight). 3.02 STANCHIONS A. Piping near vessels and pumps in main mechanical spaces may be supported from the floor by means of stanchions. Stanchions fabricated from Schedule 40 black pipe having 8" x 8" x 3/8" steel base plate mounted on Neoprene pad. 3.03 FASTENINGS A. Fastenings to wood frame by means of wood screws; to masonry by means of threaded metal inserts, metal screws, or toggle bolts; and to steel by means of machine screws or by welding. 3.04 PAINTING A. All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted with oil base paint, color as selected by Architect. Metal surfaces in crawl spaces, mechanical rooms, etc., shall be painted with gray oil base paint. Refer to Division 9 for type of paint. SECTION 15105 — VALVES FOR MEP SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents:. Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. The Mechanical Subcontractors Work shall also include furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, etc., necessary for proper installation of valves ahead of each water heater, and at similar divisions in branch lines and elsewhere as indicated 1. Services to group of fixtures to likewise be valved. 2. Provide and install all other valves called for herein or indicated on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15060 Pipe and Fittings C. Section 15220 Domestic Water Systems rs- D. Section 01300 Submittals I 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. A.S.H.R.A.E. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall submit to the engineer via the architect, prior to installation the following information and data for review and acceptance: B. Provide Manufacturer's brochures on all valves to be used. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15105 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 VALVES FOR MEP SYSTEMS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL r^ A. Provide and install all valves that are shown on the drawings and/or specified hereinafter. B. Water supplies to every plumbing fixture specified hereinafter or provided and installed by others and to every item of equipment to be equipped with shut-off or stop valves. C. Where valves have discs, are to be selected for intended service using those materials recommended by manufacturer. D. Connections between valves and copper lines to be made using copper to IPA . flange connections, or solder end valves. E. Where valves installed in chrome plated lines, are to be chrome plated to match. F. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Valves: 1. All valves shall be similar and approved equal to Crane Company numbers listed. If they comply with these Specifications, valves manufactured by Stockham, R. P. & C., Wallworth, Nibco-Scott, Hammond, Jenkins, Fairbanks, or Lunkenheimer will be acceptable. 2. Check valves, strainers, etc., shall be as specified. herein under the paragraph entitled "Miscellaneous Piping Accessories". 3. All domestic hot and cold water valves shall be in accordance with the following schedule: a. Gate Valves: 1) Galvanized steel piping up to 3" - Crane No. 438 or Jenkins No. 370, or equal, brass wedge disc non -rising stem gate valve for 150 pound saturated steam working pressure. 2) 2 1/2" through 10" - Crane No 351, 2009 W. O. G., iron body, bronze trimmed, O.S. & Y., Class 125 B 16.1 flat faced flanges. b. Globe Valves: 1) Up to 2" - Crane No. 350, 2509 W. O. G., iron body, bronze rising stem, union bonnet, screwed ends. 2) 2 1/2" through 10" - Crane No. 351, 200# W. O. G., iron body, bronze trimmed, O.S. & Y., Class 125 B16.1 flanged ends. C. Equipment service valves 1" and smaller: Nibco S-29 or equal, bronze gate valve, non -rising stem, solid brass wedge disc, rated at 150 psi at 200 degrees F. d. Plug balancing cocks (for natural gas): 1) 2" and smaller: Healy 20TF combination tee handle flathead, gas cock, or equal. 2) 2 1/2" and larger: DeZurich Figure 4995 or equal. r r G. Pumped Sewage and Storm Valves: 1. Same as specified under the sub -paragraph entitled "Domestic Hot and Cold Water Valves." H. Plug Balancing Cocks (for natural gas) 1. 2" and smaller: Healy 20TF combination tee handle -flathead, gas cock, or equal. 2. 2-1/2" and larger: DeZurick Figure 4995 or equal. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING ACCESSORIES A. Check Valves: 1. Check valves located in domestic water pipes shall be spring loaded quiet type as manufactured by Mission, CPV, APCO, or Techno Corporation.Check valves rating shall be same as pressure class for piping as indicated on the drawings. Check pressure class for piping as indicated on the drawings. Check valve shall have full circle threaded lug body. Valve installed between companion flanges will not be acceptable. Check valves or pump discharges shall be installed so that the valve shaft is perpendicular to the pump shaft. 2.03 STRAINERS A. Strainers shall be similar and approved equal to the following: Mueller Steam Specialty Company model numbers: 1. 150 psig working pressure - up to 2": No. 351 with perforated 20 mesh monel screen with cleanout, flanged. 2. 150 psig working pressure - 2 1/2" and over: No. 751 with perforated monel screen with cleanout, flanged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Valves to have handles horizontal or above horizontal. B. Valves to match or be compatible with piping in which installed. C. Install all valves in accessible locations to facilitate removal for repair and replacement. 3.02 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean valves of all grease, cuttings, rust or dirt both inside and outside. B. Adjust valves as required for service flows specified. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15105 - 3 "�" SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 VALVES FOR MEP SYSTEMS 3.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and turn over to the General Contractor for installation, access doors required to operate or service equipment, valves, and shock absorbers. 1. Access doors to be sizes, indicated or required for proper access, with mounting straps, concealed hinges, screwdriver locks, designed so they will open 180 degrees. 2. Doors to be constructed from 16 gauge steel with door and frame finished in prime coat finish. 3. Approved manufacturer's: Milcor, Zurn, Wade, Josam, Titus or equal. END OF SECTION 15105 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15105 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 VALVES FOR MEP SYSTEMS SECTION 15220 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Q Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. e• B. The Mechanical Subcontractors Work shall also includes furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and performing all operations necessary for proper installation of noise and vibration isolation devices and systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, for the following: 1. Domestic cold water supply system - 2. Domestic hot water system 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15060 Pipe and Fittings C. Section 15100 Valves D. Section 15450 Plumbing fixtures and Trim 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Local city water department standards. B. National Plumbing Code. C. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC). D. Local/state plumbing code 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall submit, prior to installation, the following brochures, warranty and data for review and acceptance: 1. Water heaters (if required on this project) 2. Water heaters warranty 3. Water heater accessories LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 4. Vacuum breakers 5. Hose bibs 6. Wall hydrants 7. Backflow prevented 8. Trap primer assemblies 9. Shock absorbers PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All water pipe, both cold and hot shall be as specified in Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings. B. Fittings shall be wrought copper. C. Pipe and fittings shall be Anaconda, Nibco, Meuller, Revere, Chase Manufacturing or equal D. All underground water pipe shall be as specified in Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings. E. Unions shall be installed where piping is connected to equipment. F. Clean cut ends of copper pipe with emery cloth before making joints. G. Solder shall be approved lead free solder. H. Where copper pipe connects to non-cuprous pipe and equipment, install reinforced insulating couplings or unions. Where nipples come through a wall or partition to a fixture connection use brass nipples to make the connections. The supplies within the chases shall be securely anchored to prevent movement of connections. I. Iron pipe must not be used in connection with the water system; and screw pipe connections, etc., shall be iron pipe thickness brass. J. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below rim of fixture, or is threaded to receive a hose, and all hose bibbs, and wall hydrants provide and install a Watts No. 188 or equal vacuum breaker or Watts No. 8Ac or equal backflow preventer. Vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. They shall be chrome plated to match if installed in chrome plated liner. K. Hose Bibb (interior - mechanical room): Woodford Model 24C or equal, brass finish, #34HF vacuum breaker, wheel handle. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25. 2000 TVIMFCTir WATFR CVCTF.NdR L. Non -freeze Wall Hydrant: Josam Series 71000 non -freeze wall hydrant wit integral vacuum breaker and loose key. E `* M. Primer Trap Assemblies: Josam Series 88250 all bronze with primer valve. N. Backflow Preventer shall be "reduced pressure backflow preventer type" and shall be installs in locations shown on plans, and as required by local plumbing authorities. P" O. Electric Water Heater: 1. Rheem Energy Miser or equivalent Point -of -Use electric water heater shall be located on wall in adjacent janitors closet with hot water runs limited to a maximum of 25 feet. 2. The electric water heater shall be equipped with an automatic temperature control and over temperature protector. P. Atmospheric Gas Water Heater - Furnish and install atmospheric gas water heaters as shown on the plans. 1. Each water heater shall be PVI Ventura series or equivalent Model 40 V 125 with a gas input of 399,000 Btu/h, a recovery of 374 gph from 40" F. to 140° F, a storage capacity of 250 gallons, and an 8" vent (12" common if tied together). 2. Water heaters will operate with a thermal efficiency of no less than 78%. Heater will satisfy current ASHRAE 90 standards for standby heat loss and thermal efficiency. 3. The multi -flue tank shall be constructed in accordance with section IV of the ASME code, pressure tested at 225 psi, and National Board Registered and stamped for 150 psi operating pressure. 4. The heater will be equipped with: a. Two operating thermostats h. An ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve C. Temperature limiting device d. Ball drain valve e. Draft diverter f. Handhole cleanout g. Atmospheric burner h. Five year Manufacturers' Warranty 5. The heater shall be completely packaged requiring only hookup for electricity, gas, plumbing, and venting. 6. The heater shall be wrapped in a layer of heavy density fiberglass insulation, jacketed with enamel steel jacket, and mounted on heavy duty I-beam skids. 7. The heater will fit properly in the space provided and installation will conform to all local, state, and national codes. 8. The heater will be UL listed, including a listing for use with type B-1 venting materials. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 3 P0„ SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Piping to run above exposed ceilings. No water piping shall run below slabs on grade unless shown on drawings. B. Water piping system shall generally be run level, free of traps, without any unnecessary bends, as high as possible an to suit the necessity of clearances for other mechanical work. Water piping shall be so graded and valved to provide for the complete drainage and control of the system. Piping shall be installed so as to cause no unusual noise from the flow within the building system. Piping shall be installed to take care of the expansion and contraction. All hot and cold water piping should be insulated. C. Hot and cold water piping shall be separated by at least 6" and every precaution shall be taken to see that the pipes do not come into contact. Where piping is paralleled, space shall be provided for proper thickness of covering. D. All runs of water piping outside shall be minimum 24" depth for freeze protection, unless otherwise noted. Other lines shall be run in, due regard for freeze protection. E. Cold water piping to be held as far away as possible from sanitary sewer and storm sewer and installation is to conform to all codes. 3.02 STERILIZING A. After the installation of all water piping is made, it shall be flushed out and thoroughly sterilized by this Contractor with a solution of HTH in accordance with the regulations of the State Department of Health. After sterilizing, drain lines and completely flush out. 3.03 TESTING: A. Each piping system shall be tested hydrostatically for leaks to one and 1 1/2 times the system's operating pressure or 150 psi, whichever is larger. Equipment in the system which might be damaged by such pressure will be blocked off and disconnected during the tests. B. Equipment in the system which may be damaged by such pressure will be blocked off and disconnected during the test. C. Lead test on the water main shall be performed after all new plumbing fixtures have been installed. The lead text shall include water samples taken from all water outlets of both new and existing plumbing fixtures. The report shall list the name of LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS each fixture sample, state new or existing and the lead content for each sample in parts re billion. 3.04 WATER METER: A. Domestic water meters shall be new. Contractor shall verify size with city to insure size is adequate for new service prior to proposal. If a new service is required, the service 'shall be installed per the City requirements. END OF SECTION 15220 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15220 - 5 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS SECTION 15301- SOIL. WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install waste, drain and vent piping, test tees and cleanouts, and floor drains. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE pG` A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions. B. Section 15094 Hangers, Anchors, Supports and Sleeves. r- C. Section 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Local Plumbing Code. B. NPC - National Plumbing Code. C. All other applicable city and state codes. ki 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit brochures on all drains and cleanouts. B. Submit drawings showing method of waste pipe and "P" trap connections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Sanitary Sewer Piping: 1. Same as interior sewer pipe as specified below unless specified otherwise. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15301 - 1 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM B. Interior Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: Use of PVC Drain pipe is to be used throughout; (Unless prohibited by code). 1. Sanitary soil, waste and drainage lines inside of buildings: Standard or service weight PVC drain pipe schedule 40; and/or cast iron soil pipe and fittings. a. If used cast iron pipe and each cast iron fitting: heavily coated at factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and have manufacturer's mark or name cast on it. b. Vent Lines: PVC or Cast iron pipe or galvanized iron pipe as accepted by code (2 inches or smaller). C. Vent stacks shall terminate a minimum distance of 10 feet from air intake or rooftop units or be a minimum of 3 feet above such openings. 2. Interior sewer line below the foundation slab shall be service weight PVC Zia. 3. Commercially manufactured branches shall be installed where sewer connections are indicated on Plans, or where required. Cutting into pipe for connections, except in special cases when approved by Owner, shall be accepted. B. Joints and Connections: 1. Cast iron piping systems shall be joined with lead and oakum or performed neoprene joints at Contractor's option in conformance with code. a. If caulked joints used, spigots shall be placed in bell and properly centered and lined in piping before packing starts. .. b. Joints shall be packed with dry oakum and then caulked with approved r- C. material and by standard trade practices. C. Approved material shall be poured and caulked in layers and then faced off flush with hub. 2. At end of each day's Work, plug shut any open ends of pipe. Interior Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: 1. Soil, waste and drain lines shall be installed to fall with a continuous grade toward main sewer connection not less than1/4" per foot. Neoprene ring joints such as Tyler "Tyseal" or approved equal may be used except at cleanouts, connections to other piping materials, or changes in direction above grade. 2. No straight crosses, tapped crosses, or 1/4 bends may be used without Owner approval. Sanitary tees, sanitary crosses, "Y" fittings, 1/8 or 1/16 bends to be used where space permits. 3. Changes in pipe size on soil and drain lines shall be made with reduced fittings or recessed reducers. 4. Floor drains and waste outlets shall have deep seal straps, either integral or separate. Toilet room traps shall have primer taps. 5. Connections between traps and soil pipes shall be made using brass soldering nipples, brass ferrules, red brass pipe, type L hard drawn copper tubing, lead pipe, or galvanized wrought iron. Threaded joints shall be as heretofore specified. 6. Provide reducers, increases, special flanges and fittings, etc., where and as required between piping Work and fixtures for connection of Work for use. 7. Vent piping smaller than 2": Standard weight galvanized iron with malleable iron fittings. Galvanized pipe not acceptable in or under slabs on grade. 8. Vents 2" and larger: Standard weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings with joints fabricated as specified for waste piping. 9. Vent lines to be concealed in construction in all finished areas, and may be combined where practical to do so. 10. Vent pipes shall be concealed in construction in all finished areas, and may be combined where practical to do so. 11. Offsets in soil, waste, and vent piping to be made at an angle of not more than 45 degrees and must have at least minimum pitch required by local ordinance. 12. Cast iron vents above roof lines shall be painted with two coats of asphaltum paint, and flashed. 13. Vent pipes shall extend through roof only at locations indicated. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15301 -3 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM 14. Vents through roof. a. Furnish to roofing Contractor for installation, all flashings as shown on T the Architectural plans. b. Turn top of lead flashing over into pipe extending up through roof to make a watertight seal per Architectural drawings. C. All final flashing shall be as approved by Architect. D. Test Tees and Cleanouts: 1. Test tees with brass plugs shall be installed at base of each soil and vent stack. 2. Cleanouts: Straight thread, tapered shoulder plug to seal against caulk lead seat and of same size as pipes except that cleanouts larger than 4" will not be required. 3. Cleanouts to be extended up into floor or wall where indicated. a. Cleanouts shall be installed to service each horizontal run at base of every riser, at each change of direction and at end of each horizontal runoff waste or drain pipe to an individual fixture, every fifty feet in long lengths of horizontal lines, and elsewhere required by code. 4. Exterior cleanouts occurring in soil or asphalt paved areas shall be extended up flush with finished grade and encased in a neatly finished'16" square by 6" thick concrete block. Double cleanouts shall be in 24" long by 16" wide by 6" thick concrete blocks. a. Same cleanouts shall be used in install flush in sidewalks. 5. All wall cleanouts shall be installed with frame and cover set flush with finished wall in a neat and Workman -like manner. E. Floor Drains: 1. Floor drains shall be set with top flush with finished floor as approved by Owner. F. Flash all pipe openings through the roof, using lead sheet as shown on the Architectural drawings. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall fabricate flashing and turn over to the roofer to install the flashing on the roof and after completion of this installation, he shall bend over the top the flashing into the vent piping as shown on 1 MIp PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made apart of this Section. B. Furnish all labor and materials to install all plumbing fixtures, fixture trim, and rough -in for equipment furnished by others. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions. B. Section 15220 Domestic Water System. C. Section 15301 Soil, Waste and Vent System. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish brochures on all fixtures used showing all parts, materials, etc. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 4r:4+:-,...:- i L i - r 2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Fixtures furnished complete with all working trim at each location and as indicated by symbol and abbreviation and Drawings. 1. Fixtures shall be standard products of approved manufacturers and shall be similar and equal to those specified by manufacturer's name to quality, material, appearance and operation. Care shall be taken when selecting substitutions to see that physical appearance and arrangement very nearly approaches the descriptions given hereinafter.. 2. Each unit shall be free from mars and chips, new, of first quality and furnished with adequate and sufficient supports to securely hang or install the fixture involved. 3. Each unit furnished with first line. chromium plated all brass trim unless specifically mentioned to the contrary and furnished with chromium plated loose key stops and flexible risers, except that mop sink basin fittings shall have built-in screw -drive stops. B. Fixtures are to be installed to meet the requirements of the Drawings, Specifications, and local plumbing codes. C. Fixtures shall be as specified, or equal, per Plumbing Fixture Schedule on Plans. D. Plumbing fixture acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Crane, or Kohler. E. Flush valve acceptable manufacturers: Sloan Valve Company, Zurn, or Delany. F. Fixture carrier acceptable manufacturers: Josam Manufacturing Company, Kohler Company, Tyler Pipe, Zurn Industries, or Smith Plumbing. G. Fixture seats acceptable manufacturers: Bemis Manufacturing Company, Beneke Corporation, or Olsonite. H. Plumbing trim acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Delta Faucet, Kohler, Speakman, T & S Brass and Bronze Works, or Price Pfister. I. Stainless steel sinks (18 gauge) acceptable manufacturers: American Standard, Elkay Manufacturing Company, Just Manufacturing, Moen or Bootz. J. Water cooler acceptable manufacturers: Elkay, Halsey Taylor, Haws, or Oasis. Water valve mechanism shall be mechanical and not electronic. Unit shall be furnished lead free and shall be certified by EPA that model furnished is lead free in all regards. K. Each unit shall be furnished with first line chromium plated all brass trim, unless specifically mentioned to the contrary and shall be furnished with chromium plated wheel handle stops and flexible riser, except that shower valves and service sink _ fitting shave built-in screw driver stops. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15450 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 1. "P" traps on sinis lavatories electric water coolers and similar fixtures shall be not less than 17 gauge brass tubing, chromium plated with screw type cleanouts. 2. Connection between wheel handle stops and pipe systems shall be chromium plated brass threaded nipple. L. Where handicapped fixtures are designated on architectural drawings, they shall be furnished and installed to comply with applicable ANSI and ADA Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing fixtures complete where shown. B. , Individual fixtures and outlets for hot and cold water must have stops installed in hot and cold water supplies. C. During time the construction is going on, provided proper supports or backing for the wall construction of the building from which to hang or support fixtures in a substantial manner. D. Fixtures hung or supported from tile or other type masonry walls shall have hangers securely anchored to the walls with approved type toggle bolts in a manner as approved. E. Provide chrome plated supplies to fixtures and chrome plated escutcheons on piping through walls. F. Install wall -hung urinals and lavatories with carriers to match fixture. Anchor fixture rigidly in place. G. Install floor -mounted fixtures solidly to floor with firm and even bearing. H. Rigidly secure supply and waste piping within wall construction to prevent movement. I. Install plumbing fixtures level, plumb and parallel to walls. J. Set series of fixtures equally spaced, unless otherwise indicated. K. Install fixtures with appurtenances and accessories as required for a complete installation. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15450 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM L. The contractor shall make a test of the water system for lead content after all new plumbing fixtures and outlets have been installed. 1. The lead test shall include water samples taken from all water outlets and plumbing fixtures (both new and existing). A report of the test shall be furnished to the Architect for approval and shall list the name of each fixture sample, whether new or existing outlet, and the lead content for each sample taken in parts per billion. 3.02 USE OF FIXTURES: A. Under no circumstances shall fittings, equipment and materials installed in the building be used for any purpose prior to installation. 1. After installation, fixtures shall not be used for disposal of waste material, cleaning of paint brushes, etc. 2. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the strict enforcement of this provision. 3. Violation of this provision shall be grounds for rejection of the item involved. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Provide proper protection for fixture against damage while being installed before -- Work has been accepted. Fixtures damaged before final acceptance shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. 3.04 CLEAN-UP A. Clean fixtures and trimmings thoroughly before acceptance by Owner. 3.05 FINAL CONNECTIONS: A. This contractor shall make final connections of all water and sanitary drain lines required to serve equipment furnished by him. 1. Contractor shall rough -in and make final connections to all miscellaneous equipment famished and set in place under other sections of the work. 2. All roughing -in and connections shall be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. All final connections shall be fabricated from the same materials as piping system to which they are connected. END OF SECTION 15450 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15450 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM SECTION 15829 EXHAUST/SUPPLY FANS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install all exhaust air fans with supports, counter flashings, louvers, back draft dampers, bird screens, disconnects and accessories. Work includes the following general listings: 1. Self -flashing curb mounted low profile roof exhausters, centrifugal type. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15840 Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork C. Division 16 Electrical 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Fans to have A.M.C.A. certified seal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 7 A. Submit brochures on all fans used, including capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Curb Mounted Centrifugal Fans: 1. Each roof exhaust ventilation should be of heavy gauge galvanized steel with twin scroll arrangement, two discharge outlets, and fan base and ventilation of heavy gauge piece spun aluminum construction, self -flashing, curb mounted, low silhouette shaped unit. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15829 - 1 EXHAUST/SUPPLY FANS 2. Centrifugal fans statically and dynamically balanced. Fan belt or direct driven as scheduled. Motor thermally protected. Belt drives with adjustable pulleys. Bearings thrust type permanently lubricated. 3. Back draft dampers, multi -blade balanced type felt edges. 4. Bird screen. 5. Self-contained electric disconnect. 6. Manufactured by Acme, Greenheck, Loren Cook, or equal. B. Supply Air Fans: 1. Supply air fans shall be of the belt driven curb mounted type, same as the exhaust fans except used for supply service. 2. Fan performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with AMCA Standard 210 test code for air, moving devices and fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 3. Manufactured by Green heck, Acme, Loren Cook, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Self -flashing curb mounted fans with integral flashing base installed on curbs by General Contractor. Curbs complete with base flashing. Install back draft dampers and bird screens. Balance and adjust damper. B. Connect fans to ductwork as indicated on Drawings. C. Final electrical connections by Electrical Contractor. D. Adjust fan, belts and components as necessary for smooth operation, proper running amperage and minimum vibration. E. Replace components found out of alignment and balance. F. Touch up marks and abrasions to match original finish. END OF SECTION 15829 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15829 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 EXHAUST/SUPPLY FANS M ,.. A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 15013 - General Mechanical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and all service to install ductwork, grilles, registers, diffusers and dampers. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15013 General Mechanical Provisions. B. Section 15094 Hangers, Anchors, Supports and Sleeves. C. Section 15210 Vibration Isolation and Sound Control. D. Section 15250 Insulation. E. Section 15870 Air Outlets. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Air Moving and Control Association. B. National Fire Protection Association. C. A.S.H.R.A.E. D. S.M.A.C.N.A. (Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction). !" ° 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Duct sizes: For acoustically lined or internally insulated ducts, maintain sizes inside lining or insulation. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are inside (air stream) dimensions, and outside dimensions of the duct are to be increased to accommodate the insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductwork: 1, Rectangular Ductwork: Standard galvanized steel sheets with one mil thick minimum coating of zinc on both sides, by hot dipped process. Gauge as recommended in the "Duct_ Manual." Structural shapes (bars, angles, rods, etc.) to be galvanized carbon steel for exposed ductwork. 2. Flexible Connections: 30 ounce UL approved, glass fabric Neoprene coated on both sides, Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas" complete with attachment accessories. 3. Flexible Duct: Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be a factory assembly of 1 1/2" thick fiberglass (1 lb. per cu. ft. density) inside two vapor barrier materials (inside and outside surfaces) wrapped around a spring helix for support. Genflex type S-1, or equal. 4. Round or oval ductwork, shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Round ductwork shall be furnished complete with all starting collars, branch take -offs, elbows, etc., and shall terminate in register plenum box ceiling outlet collar. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Rectangular metal ductwork fabricated in accordance with SMACNA "Duct Manual and sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air Conditioning System", to the dimensions shown on the Plans. B. Duct accessories fabricated by detailed in SMACNA Standards. C. Dampers and fire dampers all by same manufacturer. All fusible links, stops, etc., to comply with NFPA 90A. D. Duct dimensions shown are clear inside dimensions. E. Standing seams, bar slip seams, or pocket slip seams shall not be used on rectangular ductwork exposed in the room. LU13BOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15840 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSULATION A. Ductwork: 1. Duct Joints and Seams: a. Longitudinal seams to be Pittsburg Lock, Button Punch Snap Lock, or Grooved, transverse joints in accordance with the "Duct Manual". b. Drive slips for rectangular ductwork on the short side only, up to a maximum 18" dimension. C. Gauge same as the duct. d. Bend drive slips over minimum 3/4" at corners. 2. Elbows and Tees: a. Constructed with curved or square elbows. b. Curved built with not less than a center line radius of 1 1/2 times duct width. C. Square fittings shall have double thickness foil section turning vanes. d. Vanes, a standard product, spaces as shown in the "Duct Manual". e. Round elbows constructed to have not less than the number or gores stipulated in S.M.A.C.N.A. "Duct Manual". 3. Transformations: a. Slope not to exceed 1" in 7" for high velocity or 1" in 4" for low velocity as shown in "Duct Manual", except where noted on Plans. i =0 C. One 1/8" band for ducts up to 60" wide, and trapeze type with rods for larger ducts. _ 8. Instrument Test Openings: a. In accessible locations where required for air stream static pressure, velocity and temperature measuring access. _ b. Openings complete with gaskets and insulation extended necks. 9. Ductwork: a. Install duct firmly supported or hung neatly aligned. Ductwork hung tight to building structure. b. Space hangers as required to support ducts without sagging, as required by the building frame -work, and as required by other interference's. C. Location and spacing of hangers and supports coordinated by the Subcontractor. d. Furnish necessary supporting material and additional structural members. e. Provide for inherent movement and expansion of the duct system. f. Seal open space between ducts and wall sleeves or openings. - g. Coordinate ducts with all other service lines, pipes and ducts. h. Install dampers and devices required to balance the system, provide proper diffusion, and even temperature. i. Lighting fixtures, electrical conduit and ceilings shall not be supported from ductwork of ductwork hangers. j. Make necessary changes in duct sizes, provide crossovers, etc., as — required to fit ductwork into ceiling and other space. 10. Flashing: a. Provide all necessary flashing and counter flashing where ducts penetrate exposed wall or roof to make entire installation weatherproof. 3.02 VOLUME CONTROL AND AIR DAMPERS A. Splitters, where shown, one gauge heavier than duct walls in which the damper is located, but not less than 16 gauge; having shafts, bearings and locking devices in accordance with S.M.A.C.N.A. recommendations. B. Multi -leaf opposed or parallel blade type control dampers conforming to S.M.A.C.N.A. Duct Manual. 1. In addition to construction requirements detailed in Duct Manual, multi -leaf dampers shall have minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel blades, maximum blade with of 10", damper blades welded, pinned, splined or bolted to the shaft (set screws not acceptable), bronze oilite or nylon bearings, minimum 1/2" steel axles, and blade stops at top and bottom of frames. 2. Automatic control dampers furnished with wind stops at side of frames and blades furnished with blade gaskets cemented and riveted to the top and bottom edges of the blade. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15840 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 LOW AND MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK ro, C. Fire dampers furnished where shown on the Drawings and as required by Code. Fire dampers constructed recommended by the S.M.A.C.N.A. "Duct Manual" meeting requirements of N.F.P.A. 90A. Provide access doors for fire dampers. L F" 3.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT INSTALLATION A. Flexible ductwork shall be installed at the termination of the outlet on the sunnly air 3.04 DUCTWORK SUPPORT A. All ductwork shall be supported from structural bar joists and beams. END OF SECTION 15840 PM ` SECTION 15870 - AIR OUTLETS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Referenced Documents: Division 1 - General Requirements, Proposal Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Section 15010 - General Mechanical Provisions, are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install all diffusers, grilles, outside louvers, diffuser boots and roof hoods. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions. B. Section 15050 Testing and Balancing. C. Section 15840 Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Make air flow tests and sound level measurements in accordance with applicable ADC equipment test codes and A.S.H.R.A.E. standards. B. Manufacturer shall certify cataloged performance and ensure correct application of air outlet types including sound ratings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Submit product data and shop drawings converging each item together with schedule of outlets and to also include sound data. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish, and mounting prior to submitting shop drawings and schedules of outlets. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 15870 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 AIR OUTLETS B. Verify outlet locations and make necessary adjustments to conform with Architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Titus, Kruger or Equal. Provide and install items as listed in Schedule on Plans. B. Return and Exhaust Grilles: 1. For sidewall and ceiling exhaust grilles, provide streamlined blades, depth of which exceeds 3/4". Provide spring tension or other device to set blades. Provide units with horizontal face. 2. Provide 1-1/4" (32mm) margin frame with countersunk screw holes. 3. Fabricate of steel with 20 gauge minimum frames and 22 gauge minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gauge minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions. 4. Provide exhaust grilles, where not individually connected to exhaust fans, with integral, gang -operated opposed blade dampers with removable key operator, operable from face. 5. Finish in factory to be baked enamel, white or color as approved by Architect. 6. Door grilles where shown on plans to be siteproof and soundproof as scheduled on plans. C. Rectangular Supply Diffuser: 1. Provide rectangular, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi -core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated or required. 2. Diffusers shall have surface -mount type frame. 3. Fabricate of steel with baked enamel finish, white or color as approved by Architect. 4. Provide radial opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. D. Perforated Face Diffuser: 1. Provide perforated face diffuser with fully adjustable pattern and removable face. 2. Provide inverted T-bar type frame. 3. Fabricate of steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel finish, white or color as approved by Architect. 4, provide radial onnosed damper and multi -louvered egualizinQ Arid with t� 2. Diffuser should be internally insulated. 3. Fabricated casing from galvanized steel. 4. Finish with black enamel on pattern controller blade and exposed slot faces. White enamel on T-bar (where finished). 5. The Contractor shall provide a sheet metal -plate in the ceiling grid -tract between slot diffusers (painted Blades and approved by Architect.) Plate shall be held into place with concealed hold down clips. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Rate units in accordance with ADC standards. B. Base air outlet application on space noise level of NC35 maximum. C. Provide supply outlets with sponge rubber seal around edge. D. Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns, or other obstructions within radius of diffuser operations.. E. Provide plaster frame for diffusers located in plaster surfaces. F. Provide anti -smudge frames or plaques on diffusers located in rough textured surfaces such as an acoustical plaster. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Paint ductwork visible behind outlets matte black. C. Seal all connections in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards or SMACNA High Pressure Duct Construction Standards, whichever applies. Maximum leakage will be 1" of specified cfm on systems operating at 2" WP or below and 1 % of specified cfin on systems operating from 2" to 10" WP. The "system" refers to the total air handling equipment of which the diffuser is a part. D. Bugler bars shall be installed in the duct openings which pass through the security screen wall where shown on plans. Maximum opening size between bars shall be 7" each way. END OF SECTION 15870 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 15870-3 AIR OUTLETS SECTION 16010 -GENERAL ELECTRICAL p120'VTSIONS PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS. SECTION A. Reference Documents:_ _Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Proposal Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Work included in Division 16: Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation service, rigging, fees, permits, inspections, and supervision. etc., necessary for the complete installation and operation of all electrical equipment, systems and work as shown on the plans and specified herein. Work includes the following general listings, in addition to which furnish all fittings, hangers, supports, conduits, sleeves, inserts and other such items and accessories required or necessary for the operation of the complete electrical system as shown on plans and/or, specified herein: 1. Control wiring as specified herein and in Division 15. 2. Branch circuit panelboards. 3. Conduits, feeders and branch circuit wiring. 4. Light fixtures. 5. Wiring device receptacles and switches 6. Fire alarm system. 7. Junction boxes and conduit for special systems (alarms, telephone system, security systems, etc.). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the term "Contractor". appears in this Division of the Specifications, it is to be construed as referring to the General Contractor and the Electrical Sub- contractor. The term "Owner" will be construed as referring to either the Owner or Owner's representative. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE •, A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15840 Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork. C. Section 15870 Air Outlets D. Section 16110 Raceways E. Section 16120 Conductors LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 1 ,� SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS F. Section 16140 Wiring Devices G. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall become familiar with the rules of the governing boards havingjurisdiction and shall notify the Owner before submitting a proposal, if in the Contractors opinion, any work or material specified is contrary to such rules. Otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for the approval of all work or material at no extra cost to the Owner, and in case the use of any material specified is not permitted, a substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no extra cost. B. Work to conform to the latest editions of the following: 1. National Electric Code (N.E.C.) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.) 3. All other applicable city, state and national codes 4. Underwriters;' Laboratories Inc. (U.L.), listed and labeled. 5. Power company's electrical standard requirements 6. Telephone company standard requirements. 7. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.) 8. Uniform Building Code (U.B.C.) 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) 1 Q,__National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.) 11. Illuminating Engineering Society (I.E.S.) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (I.E.E.E.) 13. United States of America Standards Institute (U.S.A.S.I.) 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor of work specified herein is to have been engaged in electrical contracting business for a minimum of five years prior to proposal date and be prepared to show evidence and references if required by Owner. B. It will be assumed that Contractor, by submitting a proposal, has become familiar with all the regulatory agencies listed in 1.04 above and that the work shall be performed accordingly. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and arrangements as indicated therein. Shop drawings approval and/or submittals indicates only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality and assumes that the specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans and specifications. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, furnish LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS all accessories, layouts, equipment, etc., and perform all work necessary for proper functioning and to fit any substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated on the plans and specifications. B. For any item to be installed in or on 'a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster wall), Contractor shall certify by marking the submittal indicating that he has checked all applicable Contract Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed. C. Submittal shall be made for the following (but are not necessarily limited to): 1. Light fixtures 2. Panelboards, switchboard, disconnects, fuses 3. Wiring devices, plates and conduits 4. Motor starters and controls 5. Other systems such as fire alarm, security, telephone, etc. 6. Any other items as designated by Owner. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and schematics to clearly describe the apparatus. All conduit runs, controls and similar shop drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/8" = V-0" scale. 2. Shop drawings shall be done for the following (but are not necessarily limited to) a. All major conduit runs and riser diagrams for all systems. b. Details of any electrical equipment, distribution equipment and any other apparatus deemed necessary by the Owner. 3. Technical review of equipment, systems, and materials must be coordinated by Contractor with other trades which may be involved with the item, such as, but not limited to, equipment substitutions which change electrical . u requirements, hanging or support weights or dimensions. Graphic symbols shall follow the latest issue of the ANSI standard. All symbols used shall be included in the legend on the drawings. 1.07 FEES A. Procure all the necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all work to be installed. Deliver same to the Owner before final acceptance. Pay all utility charges and necessary tap fees. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. All electrical work, equipment, devices, etc. performed and/or supplied under this contract to be guaranteed for a period of one year from date of acceptance by Owner unless otherwise noted. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 3 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS B. Upon notice of any electrical malfunction, Contractor shall remedy the malfunction including all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, etc. at no extra cost to Owner. 1.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF WORK A. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every connection in detail or every line conduit in its exact location. If conditions exist at job site which make it impossible to install work as shown, prepare and submit drawings to Architect for approval showing how the work may be installed and on approval and install this work without additional cost to Owner. B. Investigate structural and finish conditions and arrange work accordingly; furnish all fittings and accessories required to meet conditions and give a satisfactory operation. Coordinate with the other contractors to avoid interference with the work. C. Work shall be laid out, concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in the finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work is to be installed to avoid crippling of the structural numbers. D. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of the outlets, apparatus, lighting fixtures, and equipment up to the time of rough -in without involving any additional expenses. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name and the UL Label in every case where a standard has been established. The equipment is to be furnished under each Section and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment. Furnish all accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work. 2.02 FABRICATION A. The Contractor is to site fabricate only those items which cannot be shop fabricated. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS :. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. If Plans and Specifications differ from the required minimum standards set forth in the ordinances, the ordinances shall govern unless the Plans and Specifications shall govern. B. Any disagreement between the Plans, Specifications and Ordinances, attention must be called to same before signing of the contract. After the Contract has been signed, the Contractor is responsible for having all work meet with the requirements of the governing ordinances. NO EXTRA'S to the Contract will be granted to correct any discrepancy between the work and the ordinances. C. Where discrepancies exist between the Plans and Specifications or actual site conditions, the Contractor shall furnish the greater quantity of the items and / or higher quality of the materials. 3.02 LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Fixtures and equipment shall be as shown on the Architectural Drawings. The fixtures or equipment locations not shown on the drawings shall be verified in writing or by the Shop Drawings. 3.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Paint all equipment, metal work, conduit, hangers, and rods, etc., exposed to view and installed under, this Division, require two coats of oil based metal protective paint. Color per Owner. Refer to the Division_09 for painting requirements. 3.04 EXCAVATION TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Provide all excavation required in execution of the work. Remove any surplus excavated earth from the site. B. Arrange for and pay all costs of paving patching if excavation is required in city streets. C. Excavations are to be to the depths indicated or required, protected and kept dry at all times, and properly backfilled, moistened and mechanically tamped to maximum compaction at the completion in accordance with the Paragraph of Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling in Section 15013 and in Division 1. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 5 ",* SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 3.05 SLEEVES A. Provide galvanized sheet sleeves of sizes to readily accommodate conduits passing through partitions, walls and floors. B. Conduits projecting through the roof are to be made watertight by proper flashing, a sheet metal cap and tightening band. Flashing is to be furnished by the Contractor and installed by the Roofer. C. Conduits passing through the fire walls: Use proper fire stoppage material. 3.06 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Except otherwise noted, provide and install a chrome -plated sectional floor and ceiling plates around the pipe passing the exposed area through the walls, floors, and ceilings. B. , Solid plates with the set screws are to be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in the adequate size. 3.07 INTERIOR CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Should any structural difficulties prevent installation of fixtures, equipment, pipes, conduit, etc., at all points shown on the Drawings, then make the necessary minor deviations therefrom, as determined by the Owner without additional cost to the Owner. B. Any necessary cutting into the partitions, walls, and floors are to be neatly and carefully done. No cutting into the structural parts of the buildings without approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor is to be held responsible for all the damages caused by the Contractors work or through the neglect of the Contractors workers. All the patching and repairing of the damaged work is to be done under the direction of the Owner at the Contractors expense. 3.08 SCAFFOLDING A. Furnish and erect, at the Contractor's expense and risk, any and all appliances, scaffolding, lights, guards, temporary walks, tools, transportation, etc., required for the proper construction and /'or protection of this work. 3.09 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION A. Where electrical work occurs in masonry walls, installation shall be done sufficiently in advance of the construction; fittings, appurtenances, etc., shall be LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 6 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS installed in such.a manner and at such locations as to avoid unnecessary cutting of masonryunits. Work erected in advance of the masonry shall be securely supported and held in position to prevent displacement. Cutting and fitting of the masonry around properly located equipment will be done by the masons. The Contractor shall have a representative on the job during all concrete pours to insure all of his equipment is adequately supported and protected and will not be adversely affected •�• by such operations. B. Cooperate with the local utility companies in such a manner that the installation of all services proceeds in an orderly manner, and meets all requirements of the specified companies involved. 3.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS A. Except for such items that are normally wired up at their point of manufacture and unless specifically noted to the contrary in the documents, execute all electrical wiring of every character both for power supply and for pilot lights, controls and starters for the equipment. Others will erect all motors in place ready for connection. Mount all starters and control equipment, furnishing supporting structures where necessary. 3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING A. Testing equipment necessary to conduct the required tests shall be provided and the tests are to be made by the Contractor at his expense under the direction of and in the presence of the Owner. B. Equipment furnished and installed and / or connected under the provisions of these Specifications shall be demonstrated to function electrically in the manner required. C. The entire electrical installation shall be free from short circuits and improper grounds. Tests shall be made at each power panel and lighting panel with al switches closed. Each power circuit shall be tested at its switch. In testing for insulation values to ground, the power equipment shall be connected for normal operation. D. Insulation values shall not be less than those required by the N.E.C. Other specific tests shall be made in accordance with requirements stated in these Specifications. E. All loads shall be properly balanced on each phase of the system. r F. If the tests indicate unsatisfactory materials, workmanship or performance, Contractor shall remove such defective materials and replace with new material at his own expense and shall correct defective workmanship and shall then conduct same tests again until the satisfactory character of the work installed has been fully demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Owner. END OF SECTION 16010 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16010 - 7 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS PART 1- GENERAL WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and services to install electrical power and lighting wiring in conduit so as to make a continuous electrical system from the most remote outlet to its distribution center. c-r 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B. Section 16120 Conductors C. Section 16140 Wiring Devices D. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. National Electrical Code B. Local City Code and Regulations C. U. L. Listings and Labelings 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1; catalogue data of junction boxes, pull boxes, -- outlet boxes and conduits. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16110 - 1 PM SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 RACEWAYS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conduits: 1. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Hot -dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit, fittings and installation conforming to U.L. 1242 and N.E.C. Article 346. Use threaded fittings. 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized electrical metallic tubing conforming to U. L. 797 and N.E.C. Article 348. Use compression fittings with insulated bushings. 3. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings conforming to U.L. 651 and N.E.C. Article 347. Use solvent welded socket fittings. Schedule 80 PVC is required under roadways or heavy traffic or by local regulations. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit: Galvanized flexible steel conduit conforming to U.L. and N.E.C. Article 350. 5. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metalllic conduit with extruded polyvinyl chloride jacket over flexible hot dip galvanized steel core, U.L. listed and conforming to N.E.C. Article 351. Use liquidtight fittings. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Outlet Boxes: Standard gauge steel zinc -coated on all surfaces and edges. 2. Outlet Boxes for Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" Octagonal galvanized steel boxes not less than 1-1/2" deep; equipped with 3/8" fixture studs where required. Ceiling and wall outlets for fixtures of sizes warranting greater support than can be obtained by a 3/8" stud to be provided with hangers designed to sustain weight of proposed fixtures. 3. Outlet Boxes for Duplex Receptacle and Wall Outlets: Switch box type, galvanized, steel boxes not less than 1-1/2" deep furnished with plaster rings or tile tops where required. 4. Switch Boxes: Sectional type switch boxes, galvanized steel of proper depth, furnished with plaster bars where required. 5. Telephone Outlet and Junction Boxes: Same type and kind as those specified for convenience receptacles: Type approved by local telephone company for service intended. 6. Floor Outlet Boxes: Cast metal with treaded conduit entrances, weatherproof type with means of adjusting coverplate to finish level. Refer to Section 16140. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Junction and Pull Boxes: Appleton Electrical Company, or equal, of code - gauge steel. 2. Conform to N.E.C. for size and gauge of material. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16110 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 RACEWAYS A. Electrical power, controls and lighting wiring to be installed in conduit in accordance with N.E.C. 1. Rigid conduits in structural slabs to run between layers of reinforcing steel. a. Conduits_ larger than 1/2" in concrete slabs to run parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing bars and not diagonally. b. Conduits larger than 1/2" to run in joists or to be concealed before installation of wire. 2. Conduit to be reamed, butts removed, and cleaned inside before installation of wire. a. Conduit ends to be capped and plugged with standard accessories as soon as same has been permanently installed in place. b. Conduit entering boxes and fittings without threaded hubs to have two locknuts and bushings. C. Bushings on all conduit 1-1/4" and larger - insulating type, OZ products, or equal. 3. Lay out and install conduit runs to avoid proximity to hot pipes. In no case will conduit run within 6" of such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then conduit to be kept at least 1" from covering on pipe crossed. 4. Conduit shall be run concealed except in unfinished areas. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel, perpendicular, plumb and square with building lines and grouped. 5. Install conduits without sag or pockets and in general slope down toward the outlets or connects. All conduit bends shall be free from dents or flattening. -6. Use 1/2" as a minimum size for all conduits. 3/8" Flexible metal conduits may be used to connect lighting fixtures in lay -in ceilings, as permitted by local codes. 7. Install pull and junction boxes as required by N.E.C. or as required to facilitate installation of conductors or cables. 8. Use GRC where subject to weather or to physical damage. 9. Use PVC conduits where in contact with earth or in poured concrete. Provide grounding per N.E.C. for conduit run underground. 10. Use EMT indoors concealed in walls, above ceilings, and exposed in electric closets, telephone rooms and mechanical rooms where not subject to physical damage. 11. Where conduits cross building expansion joints, furnish and install expansion fittings for contraction, expansion or settlement. 12. Where rigid conduit enters any enclosure, install a locknut on each side of enclosure wall. 13. On all feeder conduit, install insulated throat grounding bushings at panelboards, switchboards, and pull boxes and connect to panel or LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16110 - 3 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 RACEWAYS switchboard ground lug or next grounding bushing using continuous copper conductor sized per N.E.C. Table 250-95. 14. Connect motors, transformers and equipment on vibration isolators using a 2'- 0" maximum length of flexible metal conduit; use liquid -tight flexible metal conduits for this purpose outdoors, in wet locations, or in mechanical rooms; when used for fluorescent light fixtures not to exceed 72". 15. Install insulating bushings or use insulated throat connectors on all conduits. 16. The use of pipe hooks, chains, plumbers tape, wire, nails or perforated metal for pipe support shall not be acceptable. 17. Aluminum conduit shall not be used. B. At outlet and switch locations, provide and install outlet boxes of proper size and height as noted. Boxes installed in masonry walls to be of sufficient depth (not less than 2-1/2") to permit conduits to be installed without cutting into outer web of tile; furnish plaster rings at ceilings. 1. Location of outlets shown on Plans are approximate. Carefully check the Architectural plans and coordinate with Owner for exact locations of all outlets before installation. 2. Study general building plans with relationship to spaces surrounding each outlet that this work may fit work of others, and that when fixtures are installed they will be symmetrically located and will not interfere with any work or equipment. 3. Outlets occurring in panels or other Architectural. fixtures to be centered accurately and clear trims and corners by 4". 4. Switch outlets located immediately inside of door is to be placed on strike side of door, except where outlet is shown in partition at right angle to partition in which door is located; outlet in such cases to clear door when open by 6". 5. Electrical, telephone, etc., outlets located in interior partition walls shall not be located back-to-back. These shall be installed at least 8" apart, separated by a stud and in no event will there be conduit connection between boxes. 6. Rigidly install all outlet boxes plumb and flush with finished surfaces before plates are installed. 7. Support outlets securely and independently to the building structures so that they do not rely on the conduit system for support. a. Boxes mounted vertically on wall - provide hinged covers and catchlocks. b. Boxes mounted horizontally in or on ceilings - furnish with screw covers. 8. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, mounting heights shall be as follows: Normal a. Wall switches 4'-0" A.F.F. b. Convenience and telephone outlets 1'-6" A.F.F. 1) Corridor 1'-6" A.F.F. 2) Classrooms 1'-6" A.F.F. 3) Offices 1'-6" A.F.F. 4) Toilet Rooms F-6" A.F.F. 5) Storage Rooms 1'-6" A.F.F. C. Manual Fire Stations 4'-0" A.F.F. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16110 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 RACEWAYS d. Fire Alarm AudioNisual Unit T-6" A.F.F. e. Wall mounted Telephones 4'-0" A.F.F. f. Clock Outlets T-6" A.F.F. g. Top of Lighting & Power Panels 64A.F.F. h. Thermostats 4'-0" A.F.F. The above mounting heights shall be verified and approved by the Architect before installation. All mounting heights shall conform with ADA Guidelines. 9. Insulating Bushings: Insulating bushings to be used to separate dissimilar materials as required on all conduit and junction boxes. Material separation is required between all connections of dissimilar material to building structure. 3.02 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Steel conduit run underground shall be protected by a factory applied coating or wrapping consisting of one of the following: 1. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company "Scotch-kote" Resin #202, factory -applied coating with two-ply "Scotch -wrap" #50 tape on field joints. 2. Coal tar primer, coal tar pitch, coal tar saturated felt, Kraft paper wrapped. All field joints must be similarly wrapped. 3. PVC plastic primer, followed by polyvinyl plastic coating as supplied by Lone Star Steel Company "Extra Coat" or approved equal. Field joints shall be wrapped in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Contractor shall submit samples and detailed specifications for final approval. END OF SECTION 16110 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 16110 - 5 RACEWAYS r, SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. .. B. Furnish labor, material, and equipment to install power to completely connect all wiring devices, motors, data cabling, etc. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE MGM A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B. Section 16110 Raceways. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Local City Code B. National Electrical Code :. C. ASTM Standards D. N.E.M.A. E. U.L. Listings and Labelings F. I.C.E.A, . 1.04 SUBMITTALS r„! A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1 catalogue data of conductors proposed with wiring insulation. ..r .M LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16120 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 CONDUCTORS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLES A. Wire and Cables: Must be new and of copper conductors with protective coatings, U.L. listed and labeled as specified below or on the Plans. All conductors shall be by the same manufacturer. 1. Rated 600 V type as manufactured by Anaconda, General Cable, Phelps, Dodge, Collyer, Triangle, General Electric or equal. a. Type TW standard wall insulation except as noted below or specifically noted on the Plans or required by codes. b. Wire passing through fixture channels: Type THHN, copper. C. Wire #6 and larger: Standard wall THW or THWN, copper power conductors; 75' C wet and dry location. d. All conductors shall be copper. No aluminum wiring is permitted. e. Minimum wire size shall be #12 A.W.G. except for control wiring the minimum allowed size will be #16. 2. Conductors and Strands of Conductors: Soft drawn, annealed, tinned copper of conductivity not less than 98% of pure copper. 3. Conductors run in raceways that are underground, in concrete, equipment rooms, completely encased in exterior masonry walls, directly exposed to the weather or in any other locations where adverse heat and moisture conditions prevail: Standard insulation THW. 4. Cables shall be surface printed with a contrasting color consisting of the manufacturer's name, cable size, cable type and voltage rating. B. Splices and Connections: 1. Joints and Splices in Wire #6 to 94/0: Mechanical type connectors. a. Connectors: Fully insulated; OZ type XW and XTP, Burndy VR and VRT or equal. 2. Joints and Splices in Wire #8 and Smaller: , Mechanical pre -insulated wire connectors, "Scotch Lock" or T&B "Sta-Kon" or equal. a. Wire nuts acceptable only if each joint is thoroughly insulated with rubber friction tape. b. Pre -insulated indent connectors, by T&B or equal, acceptable on #12 wire only. C. Mechanical connectors, T&B "Wedge -On", Sherman "Wedge -Grip" or equal, connectors acceptable if properly insulated with rubber of friction tape. 3. Taps and Splices in #250 MCM and Larger: Similar to OZ type HW and HT, Burndy NS and NT or equal. 4. Splices and taps to be insulated with a filing compound, Anaconda 150 or equal, rubber and friction tape. a. Insulating Covers: OZ, T&B, or equal. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16120 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 CONDUCTORS r b. Insulating Tapes: Okanite, G.E., Scotch, or equal rubber tape and Manson, Scotch or equal friction tape. C. Insulation on all joints and splices shall have flashover value at least rR 100% in excess of wire insulation. 5. Terminals and Lugs: a.' 'Stranded wire and cable #6 and above, and #8 where terminals permit up to and including #4/0, to terminate in solderless pressure type lugs, OZ type XL, Bumdy Type NA or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wiring: 1. Each wire between boxes must be continuous without weld, splice or joint throughout its length. 2. Not to be drawn into a conduit until all work of a nature which may cause injury is completed. Provide industry standard wire pulling compound for lubricant. Where two or more circuits run to a single outlet box, tag each circuit with linen tags as a guide to the fixture hanger in making fixture connections. 3. Have all stranded conductors furnished with copper connecting lugs, drilled or reamed the full diameter of the ' bare c ' onductors., . Mains and feeders shall be run their entire length in con tinuous pieces without joints or splices. 4. Conductors #6 and larger shall be terminated with approved compression type connectors properly sized and installed with proper compression tool and with an approved electrolite. 5. Wire #12 and #10: Factory color coded with colors for each phase and neutral as specified to be used consistently throughout the entire wiring installation. a. Large wires and other types - color coded by a V wide band of colored Scotch tape on ends of each conductor. IL --I-- --A— +— I— --A flk,- exrof,-rn- 9. Maximum voltage drop to be in accordance with N.E.C. 3.02 TESTING A. Cable shall receive standard manufacturer's physical and electrical test. Test shall be in accordance with ICEA S-68-516, Paragraph 6.27. Finished cables shall pass the partial discharge test specified in AEIC CS6 Corona Test and shall meet UL 1072. B. Test insulation resistance of each conductor after installation is complete and all splices, taps, and connections have been made, except connections at source and point. C. Insulation resistance shall be tested by a Proposaldle megger, operating at 1,000 volts D.C., by connecting one lead to the conductor and the other to the enclosing conduit. Observe readings after one minutes of megger operation at slip speed. Insulation resistance shall not be less than the following: Wire or Cable Size Resistance in Ohms No. 12 1,000,000 No. 10 & 8 250,000 No. 6, 4, & 2 100,000 No. 1, 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, & 4/0 50,000 _ 250 MCM & Larger 25,000 Testing of insulation values applies to service entrance and feeders only. Tabulate values and provide Engineer with two copies. D. Remove and replace any conductors not having insulation resistance equaling or exceeding the above values. E. Perform all insulation resistance tests in the presence of the Owner. END OF SECTION 16120 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16120 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 CONDUCTORS SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish labor and material to install the following: t v 1. Wall switches 2. Convenience and telephone outlets. 3. Plates. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16120 Conductors - D. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. N.E.C. B. Local City Code . , C. U.L., listings and labelings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following per Division 1: 1. Wall switches, convenience outlets and floor outlets. 2. Plates - samples to be provided. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16140 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 WIRING DEVICES r PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Single Pole Switches: 120V or 277V, 20 amps, toggle switch, Leviton, white in color. B. Illuminated Remote Pilot Light: Similar to single pole switches, Leviton. C. Duplex Receptacles: 120V,. 20 Amps, NEMA 5-20R grounded, Specification Grade Receptacle, Leviton, white in color. D. Computer Receptacles: All computer electric receptacles shall have an isolated ground and be identified with a green triangle. A separate grounding system shall be provided for all computer receptacles and electrical panels. E. Ground Fault Receptacles: 120V, 20 Amps, NEMA 5-20R, Specification Grade G.F.C.I. Duplex Receptacle, Leviton, white in color. F. Telephone Outlet Box and Plates: Division 16 shall provide the telephone outlet plates as required by telephone installer with modular plug, bushed opening or other application. Plates shall be stainless steel. G. Plates: Provide stainless steel plates throughout the building. Provide weatherproof - plates with covers for outdoor applications. H. Floor outlet boxes for receptacles and telephone outlets shall have metal round, rounded edges, brushed aluminum finish with spring loaded cover. 1 O. Colors for devices shall be approved by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting heights per Section 16110, unless specifically noted otherwise on plans. Mount all devices plumb and flush with walls. All devices shall clear door frames, door swing, etc. B. Confirm floor outlet locations with Architect. All floor penetrations shall be fire rated by use of fire rated poke-thru devices, etc. Floor outlet covers shall be level, flush, and low profile so as not to cause hazard to personnel. C. Mount all receptacles with the grounding terminal to the top of the receptacle. D. Mount all single pole switches so position "up" is "on". E. Coordinate receptacle locations with countertops, cabinets, etc. Conflicts shall be referred to Architect for adjustment on job site at no extra cost to Owner. F. Prior to "Rough -in", adjustments in location of devices may be accomplished by Architect to account for furniture layout. It shall be accomplished at no extra cost to project. r 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, CLEANING A Test Parh de.vire for mmner connection and aneeration prior to final inspection. Test SECTION 16160 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish all labor, materials and accessories to install lighting and power branch circuit panelboards as noted on plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ""� A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16170 Disconnects 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and so labeled. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1: 1. Brochures and other drawings to also show elevations. 2. Panelboard schedules showing circuit breaker quantity and sizes. 3. Short Circuit Analysis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lighting and Power Branch Circuit Panelboards: 1. 120/208 or 277/480 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire grounded wye panels as noted on plans; e D type NQOB or approved equal, factory assembled. 2. Automatic circuit breaker, bolted, dead front type. 3. Listed by U.L., as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, or Siemens. 4. Automatic bolted type molded case branch circuit breakers. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16160 - 1 ,�, SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS a. Circuit Breakers: Bolted -on, thermal -magnetic type unit construction, employing quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanisms for manual operation as well as automatic, operation. Common trip on all multi -pole breakers. b. Automatic Tripping: Indicated by breaker's handle assuming a clearly distinctive position from manual "On" and "Off' position; breakers to be removable from front of enclosure for inspection and replacement. C. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlet shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts resulting from frayed appliance cords. d. Where used as switches in 120, 277 volt lighting circuit, circuit breaker shall be approved for such switching duty and shall be marked "SWD". e. Breakers shall bej, 2 and 3 poles with an integral cross -bar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multi -pole circuit breakers. f. Circuit breaker shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489, as manufactured by Square D or approved equal. 5. Panelboard: Furnished with main lugs only or main circuit breakers as designated on plans. Solderless connectors furnished to connect panel feeder sized to accommodate size wire called for in panel feeder sized to accommodate size wire called for in panel feeder schedule on plans. 6. Doors: Equipped with chrome plated combination lock and catch, provide two keys with each lock. All locks to be keyed alike. 7. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breaker shall not be approved for switching light circuts. B. Bussing: 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main switch shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. The bus structure shall accommodate bolted on branch switches as indicated on the drawings without modification to the bus assembly. 2. Main bussing shall be copper with 98% minimum conductivity rated as shown on the plans. 3. The temperature rise above ambient shall not exceed 55' C rise in accordance with U.L. procedures. 4. External wiring connections to be compatible for copper wiring. 5. A-B-C type bus arrangement left to right, top to bottom and front to rear shall be used throughout to assure convenience, safe testing and maintenance. 6. The short circuit rating shall be established by short circuit testing in accordance with NEMA standard PB-1-1471 and shall be unitary rated. 7. All current carrying part of the bus assembly shall be plated. C. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted on the panelboard. The .don short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices an __ the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16160 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS Y t panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL67. The source shall be capable of supplying specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of a-+ panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. D. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of r steel cabinet shall be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of w wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Each front shall include a door and have a flush cylinder tubular type lock with catch and spring loaded stainless steel door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. E. U.L. Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. A PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards flush or surface -mounted as designated on plans. B. Installation to meet the latest edition of the N.E.C. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Protect all breakers and switches in panels during construction. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboards shall be identified by engraved plastic tags with the name, letter and/or number indicated on the plans. B. Provide a typed directory card of equipment, lighting, etc., served by circuit breakers inside each panelboard door. Circuit identification should be by equipment name, location and/or room name and number. END OF SECTION 16160 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16160 - 3 r SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS w�! SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install heavy duty safety switches and general duty safety switches and fuses as required and indicated on drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ., A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16120 Conductors 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. NEMA B. National Electrical Code "^ C. Local Electric Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1 and Section 16010. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fuses protecting circuit breakers or circuit breaker panelboards shall be silver -sand, fast -acting, current limiting UL Class K-1 and R for amperages 0-600 and UL Class Z for amperages 601-6000. Bussman Limitron, or equal, fast -acting fuse. Two spare links of each amperage used shall be given to Owner. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16170 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 DISCONNECTS B. Fused and Unfused Safety Disconnect Switches: (Fused disconnects not typical and used only where required) _ 1. Switches: Manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse, General Electric, or Cutler -Hammer. 2. General duty for 240 V service, heavy duty for 480 V services with pad locking features. j SECTION 16181- FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I -General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. NOW B. Furnish and install current limiting fuses to limit the A.I.C. to an acceptable interrupting rating as indicated on drawings and as required by N.E.C. Section 110. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16120 Conductors C. Section 16140 Wiring Devices �., D. Section 16164 Panelboards E. Section 01300 Submittals' r- 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. NFPA Codes B. National Electrical Code C. Applicable Building Codes D. Underwriters' Laboratories, listing and labels 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schematic riser diagram indicating available short circuit current and fuse 07 let-thru current. Contractor shall ensure that each feeder and apparatus is properly protected from short circuit current and shall calculate and verify the let-thru current at each point in the electrical riser diagram. B. Provide catalogue cuts for all fuses used indicating fuse size, let-thru current, curves, etc. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16181 - 1 �., SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT 1.05 WITHSTAND RATING A. The maximum specified value of voltage and current that equipment can safely "handle" is known as it's "Withstanding Rating" of the short circuit current mechanical forces and thermal energy which can destroy equipment and create hazardous conditions. 1.06 HANDLING MECHANICAL FORCES AND THERMAL ENERGY A. At any point in a distribution system, the equipment must be capable of handling the mechanical forces and thermal energy available should these exceed the capabilities of the equipment. Either the equipment must be reinforced or current limiting fuses must be used to reduce the amount of forces and energy available to the equipment, as required by NEC, Article 110. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES A. All fuses used on this project shall be UL listed, Class R, J or L as noted. All fuse contacting surfaces shall be plated and fuses shall be so selected as to provide a fully selective coordinated system. B. Spare fuse requirements are as follows: 1. 600 amp and smaller - 10% of each rating (minimum of three per rating). 2. 601 amp and larger - three of each rating. 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE & FEEDER CIRCUIT FUSES (601 AMP & LARGER) A. Rated 601 amp to 6,000 amp, 600 volt AC or less shall be UL listed Class L, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap Cat. No. A4BY, A4BT or approved equal. 2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE & FEEDER CIRCUIT FUSES (600 AMP & SMALLER) A. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RKI, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuse body shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap, Cat. No. A2K (250v) or A6K (600v) or approved equal. Note: Alternate Fuse Specification for Paragraph 2.03. B. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL lilted Class J, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Ruse body shall be high LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16181 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT .sy temperature, dimensionally stable, long life, non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap, Cat No. A4J, AJT (time delay) or approved equal. ,,. Note: Alternate Fuse Specification for Paragraph 2.03 C. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 260 to 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK5, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuse body shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life, non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Falt-Trap, Cat. No. FT (250v) or FTS (600v) or approved equal. 2.04 MOTOR, MOTOR CONTROLLER, TRANSFORMER & INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT FUSES A. Rated 1/10 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK5 current limiting time delay with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be constructed of high -temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non - hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Tri-onic, Cat. No. TR (250v) or TRS (600v) or approved equal. 2.05 MOTOR, MOTOR CONTROLLER, TRANSFORMER & INDUCTIVE .,, CIRCUIT FUSES A. Where more current limitation is required, rated 1/10 amp to 600 amp, 250 to 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK1, or Class J, current limiting time delay with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap II, Cat. No. A21) (250v), A61) (600v), AJG (600v) or approved equal. B. Where short-circuit current does not exceed 50,000 ampere RMS and for protection of individual equipment units, the following fuse specifications may be used: 1. Fuses rated 1 ampere to 600 ampere; 250 or 600 volt AC shall be UL listed Class K-5 with 50,000 ampere interrupting rating. Fuse shall be Gould Shawmut One-Tiome, Cat. No. OT (250v) or OTS (600v) or approved. C. NOTE: For protection of circuit breakers and circuit breaker panelboards use Gould Shawmut Amp -Trap (A2K/A6K) or Amp -Trap II (A2D/A6D) or Class J (A4J/AJT). Refer to Specification 2.03 and 2.05 above. Fusible safety switches and panelboards with short-circuit withstand ratings of 200,000 ampere RMS require Class R or Class J rejection fuse holder feature. (Compliance with N.E.C. Article 110-9 and 240-60b). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in devices as required and indicated on drawings. 3.02 GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, replace and repair any faulty material for one year from the date of acceptance. END OF SECTION 16181 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16181 - 4 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Referenced Documents: Division 1 - General Requirements, Proposal "^ Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Provide and install a single, complete, integrated grounding system, including all conductors, raceways, and connections, as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. C. The grounding system shall include the grounding of switchgear, panelboards, transformers, etc.; grounding grid systems with ground rods, structural system, and water pipe connections. D. The grounding system shall include the grounding conductors completely �^^ interconnecting the main water supply pipe, ground rods, distribution equipment, structural system, and other equipment requiring ground connections. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE .. A. Section 16110 Raceways B. Section 16120 Conductors 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. B. U.L. - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. IEEE -, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. r 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ►, A. Install complete grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16450 -1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GROUNDING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NERAL A. All grounding products shall be U.L. listed and labeled. 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be of soft drawn stranded copper. Size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. All grounding conductors shall run in building or embedded in concrete or run in conduit shall be insulated unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Insulation color shall be green. C. Insulation shall be 600 volt rated, continuously wrapped with green tape along the entire exposed surface. D. Exposed metallic raceways shall be electrically continuous to provide a ground fault path. E. All exposed non -current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways, and neutral conductors of the wiring system shall be grounded except where specifically indicated otherwise. F. Ground rods shall be copper -clad steel, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long. G. Building ground loop shall be No.. 4/0 bare copper conductor and shall be exothermically welded to a No. 4/0 bare copper conductor, minimum 20 foot long located in the bottom 1/3 of the foundation. Ground loop shall interconnect all driven ground rods. Ground loop shall be connected to the underground metallic domestic water piping system at point of entrance using No. 4/0 bare copper conductors. 2.03 CONNECTIONS A. Make all buried, concealed and accessible ground connections by exothermic welding. B. All connections to equipment or ground bus shall be only satisfactory bolted connectors. Bolt ground connectors shall be suitable for and match the grounding provisions furnished. C. Ground clamps for use on copper or brass pipes shall be of copper, brass or silicone bronze. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16450 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GROUNDING rr, 1114 �., D. Ground clamps for use on pipes shall be of galvanized or malleable iron, or of standard noncorrosive material. E. Ground clamps for use on pipes shall have rigid metal base providing good contact by proper seating on the pipe. Strap the clamps shall not be used. F. Where required in the specifications, grounding bushings shall be applies on both ends of the conduit run. G. Connections to a bus shall be: 1. For No. 2 AWG and larger use a crimp type compression lug. 2. For smaller than No. 2 use set screw lug. H. Connect the grounding system to the structural steel framing system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS A. Install grounding conductors and connectors so they will not be exposed to physical damage. All connections shall be firm and tight and protected from physical damage. Arrange conductors and connectors so there will be no strain on the connections. B. Below grade grounding conductors shall be buried at 30 inches below finished grade. Loops or taps shall be brought up for connection to equipment or other items to be grounded. C. Building grounding loop shall be connected to service entrance equipment and grounding copper rods as shown on the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS A. Install ground rods where indicated on the drawings. The top of the rod shall be 18 inches below the ground unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Measure the ground resistance of the rod and if it is not 25 ohms.or less, additional rods shall be driven at that location to obtain resistance of 25 ohms or less. B. The final resistance of the interconnected ground system shall be ten ohms or less, measured not less than 24 hours after rainfall. If the final resistance of the system exceeds ten ohms, additional ground rods and ground conductors shall be provided until the specified resistance of the interconnected ground system is obtained. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY I6450 - 3 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 GROUNDING 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Ground each piece of electrical equipment by means of a grounding conductor installed in the raceway feeding that piece of equipment. Grounding conductors shall be insulated copper wire sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. B. Connect transformer cases, transformer shielding, and neutrals to the grounding system. The neutral ground connection shall be at times the transformer terminal. Provide two separate, independent, diagonally opposite, connections so the removal of one connection will not impair the continuity of the other. K ; SECTION 16500 -LIGHT FIXTURES 7 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General_ Requirements, Conditions of the ^^ Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install light fixtures, complete with ballast, lamps, mounting brackets, circuits and switches, etc., as shown on plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16140 Wiring Devices 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Lighting Fixtures: 1. U. L. listed and labeled. 2. Standards of illumination set by I.E.S. 3. National Electrical Code. B. Ballast: ETL - CBM Certified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete fixture brochure showing all fixtures with voltage, lenses, lamps, ballast, colors, etc. noted on brochure as specified on plans and light fixture schedule in accordance to Division 1 and Section 16010. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fixtures shown on plans are for reference only, other equal fixtures will be considered if they are equal to fixture specified based on construction, material used, photometrics, brightness control, visual comfort and equivalent foot candle levels. B. Fixtures to be from manufacturer who has been in the lighting fixture business for a minimum of ten years. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16500 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 LIGHT FIXTURES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Light Fixtures: 1. Plastic Lenses: Virgin acrylic (.125 acrylic lenses for all fluorescent fixtures). All exterior light lenses shall be glass lenses approved by owner. 2. Fluorescent Fixture Ballast: Electronic ballast for use with T-8 lamps, sound _ r#jt ni of "A". -Class P and annroved by E.T.L.. 277V of 120V as shown on �Xyir PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Light fixture installation to conform to the following: 1. Recessed Fixtures: Complete with accessories required to fit the fixture to the ceiling construction. Contractor to verify ceiling type. 2. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Complete with supports above the ceilings, stems and canopies, swivel aligners and/or other accessories necessary to suspend the fixtures at specified height. 3. Surface or Wall Mounted Fixtures: Furnish and install supports above the ceiling or behind the wall, toggle bolts and other accessories which are required to adequately support the fixture. 3.02 PROTECTION A. After erection, protect exposed portions of work from contact with lime, plaster, mortar, concrete, cement, acids, and other harmful substances as well as from damage by careless handling of tools, machinery and material. 3.03 CLEANING A. When the protective materials have served their purposes, clean them thoroughly. B. Touch-up paint to any fixture that has been scratched. C. Damaged fixtures to be replaced at no extra cost to Owner. D. Any ballast failing within the Contractor's guarantee period to be replaced at no extra cost to the Owner.. 3.04 TESTING A. After all light fixtures are installed and are connected to their respective switches, -k SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the �^ Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install an empty conduit system, panelboards, junction boxes, terminal boxes, outlet boxes and all related items for complete installation of the telephone distribution system, data acquisition (computer) system, security system, and all others as shown on the plans. C. " Coordinate all work with the telephone company and other governing agencies. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Telephone Company: Conform to all company requirements B. Local Mechanical and Building Codes. C. Requirements of Electric Utilities Departments having local jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid PVC conduit Krayloy, or equivalent B. Thin wall conduit (EMT), steel, hot -dipped galvanized, inside and outside; fittings �- to be of a watertight construction or a compression type. C. Heavy wall, threaded, rigid steel, hot -dipped galvanized, inside and outside. a PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide empty PVC or rigid steel conduit mains for the telephone entry into the building and interior telephone service as shown on the plans. Rigid steel conduit mains are to be factory wrapped for underground installation. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16740 - 1 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT 1. Provide pull wire in conduits to outlets and to the telephone board. 2. Provide electrical power source (dedicated circuit) close to the telephone board as required by the local Telephone Company. 3. The Drawings show the location and the number of the outlets to be provided for the telephone service. Comply with all of the requirements of the local company's Engineer having jurisdiction over this particular project. No extra's will be authorized for work required by the companies and not shown on the Drawings or as specified herein. 4. Refer to Section 16140 for outlet box type. 5. Provide grounding per company requirements at the telephone board. B. In the typical classroom, at the student work station group location, a total of two (2) telephone drops shall be provided above the ceiling. For data installation provide a one (1) inch conduit drop at each student work station group location. C. In the typical classroom, the teacher's work station shall have a one (1) inch conduit provided for data installation. D. Provide pull wire in each conduit run for,the full length of the run. E. Outlet cover plate colors are to be selected by the Architect. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the outlet installation with the telephone company and other companies to insure that the total installation of the system is acceptable to the Owner. END OF SECTION 16740 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 16740 - 2 SEPTEMBER 25, 2000 TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT ITB #00-228, Addendum #1 r-+ City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us MAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: ADDENDUM #1 ITB #00-228 Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Facility September 28, 2000 October 12, 2000 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Section 16-Electrical not included in the original Contract Documents. a; The electrical specifications sections are as follows: Section 16010-General Electrical Provisions 7 Pages Section 16110-Raceways 5 Pages Section 16120-Conductors 4 Pages Section 16140-Wiring Devices 3 Pages Section 16160-Branch Circuit Panelboards 3 Pages Section 16170-Disconnects 2 Pages Section 16181-Fuses and Short Circuit Current 4 Pages 1 n s, SECTION 16010 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, and Proposal Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Work included in Division 16: Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation service, rigging, fees, permits, inspections, and supervision. etc., necessary for the complete installation and operation of all electrical equipment, systems and work as shown on the plans and specified herein. Work includes the following general listings, in addition to which furnish all fittings, hangers, supports, conduits, sleeves, inserts and other such items and accessories required or necessary for the operation of the complete electrical system as shown on plans and/or specified herein: 1. Control wiring as specified herein and in Division 15. 2. Branch circuit panelboards. 3. Conduits, feeders and branch circuit wiring. 4. Light fixtures. 5. Wiring device receptacles and switches 6. Fire alarm system. 7. Junction boxes and conduit for special systems (alarms, telephone system, security systems, etc.). 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever the term "Contractor" appears in this Division of the Specifications, it is to be construed as referring to the General Contractor and the Electrical Sub- contractor. The term "Owner" will be construed as referring to either the Owner or Owner's representative. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 General Mechanical Provisions B. Section 15840 Low and Medium Pressure Ductwork. C. Section 15870 Air Outlets D. Section 16110 Raceways E. Section 16120 Conductors F. Section 16140 Wiring Devices 16010 - 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS G. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall become familiar with the rules of the governing boards having jurisdiction and shall notify the Owner before submitting a proposal, if in the Contractors opinion, any work or material specified is contrary to such rules. Otherwise, the Contractor is responsible for the approval of all work or material at no extra cost to the Owner, and in case the use of any material specified is not permitted, a substitute shall be approved by the Owner and shall be provided at no extra cost. B. Work to conform to the latest editions of the following: 1. National Electric Code (N.E.C.) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (N.E.M.A.) 3. All other applicable city, state and national codes 4. Underwriters;' Laboratories Inc. (U.L.), listed and labeled. 5. Power company's electrical standard requirements 6. Telephone company standard requirements. 7. American Society for Testing and Materials (A.S.T.M.) 8. Uniform Building Code (U.B.C.) 9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) 10. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.) 11. Illuminating Engineering Society (I.E.S.) 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (I.E.E.E.) 13. United States of America Standards Institute (U.S.A.S.I.) 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor of work specified herein is to have been engaged in electrical contracting business for a minimum of five years prior to proposal date and be prepared to show evidence and references if required by Owner. B. It will be assumed that Contractor, by submitting a proposal, has become familiar with all the regulatory agencies listed in 1.04 above and that the work shall be performed accordingly. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Plans and specifications are based on specific equipment, accessories, processes and arrangements as indicated therein. Shop drawings approval and/or submittals indicates only the acceptance of the manufacturer and quality and assumes that the specific requirements and arrangements are in compliance with the intent of the plans and specifications. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, furnish all accessories, 16010 - 2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS layouts, equipment, etc., and perform all work necessary for proper functioning and to fit any substitute items to the intent and arrangement indicated on the plans and specifications. B. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster wall), Contractor shall certify by marking the submittal indicating that he has checked all applicable Contract Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed. C. Submittal shall be made for the following (but are not necessarily limited to): 1. Light fixtures 2. Panelboards, switchboard, disconnects, fuses 3. Wiring devices, plates and conduits 4. Motor starters and controls 5. Other systems such as fire alarm, security, telephone, etc. 6. Any other items as designated by Owner. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and schematics to clearly describe the apparatus. All conduit runs, controls and similar shop drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/8" =1'-0" scale. 2. Shop drawings shall be done for the following (but are not necessarily limited to): a. All major conduit runs and riser diagrams for all systems. b. Details of any electrical equipment, distribution equipment and any other apparatus deemed necessary by the Owner. 3. Technical review of equipment, systems, and materials must be coordinated by Contractor with other trades which may be involved with the item, such as, but not limited to, equipment substitutions which change electrical requirements, hanging or support weights or dimensions. Graphic symbols shall follow the latest issue of the ANSI standard. All symbols used shall be included in the legend on the drawings. 1.07 FEES A. Procure all the necessary and usual inspections and certificates for all work to be installed. Deliver same to the Owner before final acceptance. Pay all utility charges and necessary tap fees. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. All electrical work, equipment, devices, etc. performed and/or supplied under this contract to be guaranteed for a period of one year from date of acceptance by Owner unless otherwise noted. B. Upon notice of any electrical malfunction, Contractor shall remedy the malfunction 16010 - 3 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS including all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, etc. at no extra cost to Owner. 1.09 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF WORK EA. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every connection in detail or every line conduit in its exact location. If conditions exist at job site which make it impossible to install work as shown, prepare and submit drawings to Architect for approval showing how the work may be installed and on approval and install this work without additional cost to Owner. B. Investigate structural and finish conditions and arrange work accordingly; furnish all fittings and accessories required to meet conditions and give a satisfactory operation. Coordinate with the other contractors to avoid interference with the work. C. Work shall be laid out, concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in the finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. Work is to be installed to avoid crippling of the structural numbers. D. The Owner reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of the outlets, apparatus, lighting fixtures, and equipment up to the time of rough -in without involving any additional expenses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS r- 2.01 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name and the *-� UL Label in every case where a standard has been established. The equipment is to be furnished under each Section and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment. Furnish all accessories, connections and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work. 2.02 FABRICATION A. The Contractor is to site fabricate only those items which cannot be shop fabricated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. If Plans and Specifications differ from the required minimum standards set forth in the ordinances, the ordinances shall govern unless the Plans and Specifications shall govern. B. Any disagreement between the Plans, Specifications and Ordinances, attention must be called to same before signing of the contract. After the Contract has been signed, the Contractor is responsible for having all work meet with the requirements of the 16010 - 4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS governing ordinances. NO EXTRA'S to the Contract will be granted to correct any discrepancy between the work and the ordinances. C. Where discrepancies exist between the Plans and Specifications or actual site conditions, the Contractor shall furnish the greater quantity of the items and / or higher quality of the materials. 3.02 LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Fixtures and equipment shall be as shown on the Architectural Drawings. The fixtures or equipment locations not shown on the drawings shall be verified in writing or by the Shop Drawings. 3.03 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Paint all equipment, metal work, conduit, hangers, and rods, etc., exposed to view and installed under this Division, require two coats of oil based metal protective paint. Color per Owner. Refer to the Division 09 for painting requirements. 3.04 EXCAVATION TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Provide all excavation required in execution of the work. Remove any surplus excavated earth from the site. B. Arrange for and pay all costs of paving patching if excavation is required in city streets. C. Excavations are to be to the depths indicated or required, protected and kept dry at all times, and properly backfilled, moistened and mechanically tamped to maximum compaction at the completion in accordance with the Paragraph of Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling in Section 15013 and in Division 1. 3.05 SLEEVES A. Provide galvanized sheet sleeves of sizes to readily accommodate conduits passing through partitions, walls and floors. B. Conduits projecting through the roof are to be made watertight by proper flashing, a sheet metal cap and tightening band. Flashing is to be furnished by the Contractor and installed by the Roofer. C. Conduits passing through the fire walls: Use proper fire stoppage material. 3.06 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES 16010 - 5 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS A. Except otherwise noted, provide and install a chrome -plated sectional floor and ceiling ' plates around the pipe passing the exposed area through the walls, floors, and ceilings. B. Solid plates with the set screws are to be used on any lines where the sectional plates will not stay in place or are not available in the adequate size. 3.07 INTERIOR CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Should any structural difficulties prevent installation of fixtures, equipment, pipes, conduit, etc., at all points shown on the Drawings, then make the necessary minor deviations therefrom, as determined by the Owner without additional cost to the Owner. B. Any necessary cutting into the partitions, walls, and floors are to be neatly and carefully done. No cutting into the structural parts of the buildings without approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor is to be held responsible for all the damages caused by the Contractors work or through the neglect of the Contractors workers. All the patching and repairing of the damaged work is to be done under the direction of the Owner at the Contractors expense. 3.08 SCAFFOLDING A. Furnish and erect, at the Contractor's expense and risk, any and all appliances, scaffolding, lights, guards, temporary walks, tools, transportation, etc., required for the proper construction and / or protection of this work. 3.09 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION A. Where electrical work occurs in masonry walls, installation shall be done sufficiently in advance of the construction; fittings, appurtenances, etc., shall be installed in such a manner and at such locations as to avoid unnecessary cutting of masonry units. Work erected in advance of the masonry shall be securely supported and held in position to prevent displacement. Cutting and fitting of the masonry around properly located equipment will be done by the masons. The Contractor shall have a representative on the job during all concrete pours to insure all of his equipment is adequately supported and protected and will not be adversely affected by such operations. B. Cooperate with the local utility companies in such a manner that the installation of all services proceeds in an orderly manner, and meets all requirements of the specified companies involved. 3.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS 16010 - 6 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS Fa A. Except for such items that are normally wired up at their point of manufacture and unless specifically noted to the contrary in the documents, execute all electrical wiring of every character both for power supply and for pilot lights, controls and starters for the equipment. Others will erect all motors in place ready for connection. Mount all starters and control equipment, furnishing supporting structures where necessary. 3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING A. Testing equipment necessary to conduct the required tests shall be provided and the tests are to be made by the Contractor at his expense under the direction of and in the presence of the Owner. ^* R F.auinment furnished and installed and / or connected under the provisions of these -------------------- -------------------- it SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and services to install electrical power and lighting wiring in conduit so as to make a continuous electrical system from the most remote outlet to its distribution center. -- 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B. Section 16120 Conductors C. Section 16140 Wiring Devices D. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. National Electrical Code B. Local City Code and Regulations C. U. L. Listings and Labelings 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1; catalogue data of junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes and conduits. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS r A. Conduits: 1. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC): Hot -dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit, r., fittings and installation conforming to U.L. 1242 and N.E.C. Article 346. Use threaded fittings. 16110 - 1 RACEWAYS 2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized electrical metallic tubing conforming to U. L. 797 and N.E.C. Article 348. Use compression fittings with insulated bushings. 3. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings conforming to U.L. 651 and N.E.C. Article 347. Use solvent welded socket fittings. Schedule 80 PVC is required under roadways or heavy traffic or by local regulations. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit: Galvanized flexible steel conduit conforming to U.L. and N.E.C. Article 350. 5. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metalllic conduit with extruded polyvinyl chloride jacket over flexible hot dip galvanized steel core, U.L. listed and conforming to N.E.C. Article 351. Use liquidtight fittings. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Outlet Boxes: Standard gauge steel zinc -coated on all surfaces and edges. 2. Outlet Boxes for Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" Octagonal galvanized steel boxes not less than 1-1/2" deep; equipped with 3/8" fixture studs where required. Ceiling and wall outlets for fixtures of sizes warranting greater support than can be obtained by a 3/8" stud to be provided with hangers designed to sustain weight of proposed fixtures. 3. Outlet Boxes for Duplex Receptacle and Wall Outlets: Switch box type, galvanized, steel boxes not less than 1-1/2" deep furnished with plaster rings or tile tops where required. 4. Switch Boxes: Sectional type switch boxes, galvanized steel of proper depth, furnished with plaster bars where required. 5. Telephone Outlet and Junction Boxes: Same type and kind as those specified for convenience receptacles: Type approved by local telephone company for service intended. 6. Floor Outlet Boxes: Cast metal with treaded conduit entrances, weatherproof type with means of adjusting coverplate to finish level. Refer to Section 16140. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Junction and Pull Boxes: Appleton Electrical Company, or equal, of code -gauge steel. 2. Conform to N.E.C. for size and gauge of material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Electrical power, controls and lighting wiring to be installed in conduit in accordance with N.E.C. 1. Rigid conduits in structural slabs to run between layers of reinforcing steel. a. Conduits larger than 1/2" in concrete slabs to run parallel or at right angles to main reinforcing bars and not diagonally. b. Conduits larger than 1/2" to run in joists or to be concealed before installation of wire. 2. Conduit to be reamed, butts removed, and cleaned inside before installation of 16110 - 2 RACEWAYS a�+ wire. a. Conduit ends to be capped and plugged with standard accessories as soon as same has been permanently installed in place. b. Conduit entering boxes and fittings without threaded hubs to have two locknuts and bushings. ` C. Bushings on all conduit 1-1/4" and larger - insulating type, OZ products, or equal. 3. Lay out and install conduit runs to avoid proximity to hot pipes. In no case will conduit run within 6" of such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then conduit to be kept at least 1" from covering on pipe crossed., ` 4. Conduit shall be run concealed except in unfinished areas. Exposed conduit shall be run parallel, perpendicular, plumb and square with building lines and grouped. ,., 5. Install conduits without sag or pockets and in general slope down toward the outlets or connects. All conduit bends shall be free from dents or flattening. 6. Use 1/2" as a minimum size for all conduits. 3/8" Flexible metal conduits may be used to connect lighting fixtures in lay -in ceilings, as permitted by local codes. 7. Install pull and junction boxes as required by N.E.C. or as required to facilitate installation of conductors or cables. �^- 8. Use GRC where subject to weather or to physical damage. 9. Use PVC conduits where in contact with earth or in poured concrete. Provide grounding per N.E.C. for conduit run underground. 10. Use EMT indoors concealed in walls, above ceilings, and exposed in electric closets, telephone rooms and mechanical rooms where not subject to physical damage. 11. Where conduits cross building expansion joints, furnish and install expansion fittings for contraction, expansion or settlement. 12. Where rigid conduit enters any enclosure, install a locknut on each side of enclosure wall. On all feeder conduit, install insulated throat grounding bushings at panelboards, switchboards, and pull boxes and connect to panel or switchboard ground lug or next grounding bushing using continuous copper conductor sized per N.E.C. Table 250-95. 14. Connect motors, transformers and equipment on vibration isolators using a 2'-0" maximum length of flexible metal conduit; use liquid -tight flexible metal conduits for this purpose outdoors, in wet locations, or in mechanical rooms; when used for fluorescent light fixtures not to exceed 72". 15. Install insulating bushings or use insulated throat connectors on all conduits. 16. The use of pipe hooks, chains, plumbers tape, wire, nails or perforated metal for pipe support shall not be acceptable. 17. Aluminum conduit shall not be used. B. At outlet and switch locations, provide and install outlet boxes of proper size and height as noted. Boxes installed in masonry walls to be of sufficient depth (not less than 2- 1/2") to permit conduits to be installed without cutting into outer web of tile; furnish plaster rings at ceilings. 1. Location of outlets shown on Plans are approximate. Carefully check the Architectural plans and coordinate with Owner for exact locations of all outlets 16110 - 3 RACEWAYS before installation. 2. Study general building plans with relationship to spaces surrounding each outlet that this work may fit work of others, and that when fixtures are installed they will be symmetrically located and will not interfere with any work or equipment. 3. Outlets occurring in panels or other Architectural fixtures to be centered accurately and clear trims and corners by 4". 4. Switch outlets located immediately inside of door is to be placed on strike side of door, except where outlet is shown in partition at right angle to partition in which door is located; outlet in such cases to clear door when open by 6". 5. Electrical, telephone, etc., outlets located in interior partition walls shall not be located back-to-back. These shall be installed at least 8" apart, separated by a stud and in no event will there be conduit connection between boxes. 6. Rigidly install all outlet boxes plumb and flush with finished surfaces before plates are installed. 7. Support outlets securely and independently to the building structures so that they .�. do not rely on the conduit system for support. a. Boxes mounted vertically on wall - provide hinged covers and catchlocks. b. Boxes mounted horizontally in or on ceilings - furnish with screw covers. 8. Unless noted otherwise on the Plans, mounting heights shall be as follows: Normal a. Wall switches 4'-0" A.F.F. b. Convenience and telephone outlets 1'-6" A.F.F. 1) Corridor 1'-6" A.F.F. 2) Classrooms 1'-6" A.F.F. 3) Offices 1'-6" A.F.F. 4) Toilet Rooms 1'-6" A.F.F. 5) Storage Rooms 1'-6" A.F.F. C. Manual Fire Stations 4'-0" A.F.F. d. Fire Alarm AudioNisual Unit 7-6" A.F.F. e. Wall mounted Telephones 4'-0" A.F.F. f. Clock Outlets 7-6" A.F.F. g. Top of Lighting & Power Panels 64A.F.F. h. Thermostats 4'-0" A.F.F. The above mounting heights shall be verified and approved by the Architect before installation. All mounting heights shall conform with ADA Guidelines. 9. Insulating Bushings: Insulating bushings to be used to separate dissimilar materials as required on all conduit and junction boxes. Material separation is required between all connections of dissimilar material to building structure. 3.02 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Steel conduit run underground shall be protected by a factory applied coating or wrapping consisting of one of the following: 1. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company "Scotch-kote" Resin #202, factory -applied coating with two-ply "Scotch -wrap" #50 tape on field joints. 2. Coal tar primer, coal tar pitch, coal tar saturated felt, Kraft paper wrapped. All 16110 - 4 RACEWAYS 01, field joints must be similarly wrapped. 3. PVC plastic primer, followed by polyvinyl plastic coating as supplied by Lone Star Steel Company "Extra Coat" or approved equal. Field joints shall be wrapped in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Contractor shall submit samples and detailed specifications for final approval. ***END OF SECTION*** 16110 - 5 RACEWAYS SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish labor, material, and equipment to install power to completely connect all wiring devices, motors, data cabling, etc. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions. B. Section 16110 Raceways. 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Local City Code B. National Electrical Code C. ASTM Standards D. N.E.M.A. ►�+ E. U.L. Listings and Labelings F. I.C.E.A. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1 catalogue data of conductors proposed with wiring insulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLES A. Wire and Cables: Must be new and of copper conductors with protective coatings, U.L. listed and labeled as specified below or on the Plans. All conductors shall be by the same manufacturer. 16120 - 1 CONDUCTORS r* 1. Rated 600 V type as manufactured by Anaconda, General Cable, Phelps, Dodge, Collyer, Triangle, General Electric or equal. a. Type TW standard wall insulation except as noted below or specifically noted on the Plans or required by codes. b. Wire passing through fixture channels: Type THHN, copper. C. Wire #6 and larger: Standard wall THW or THWN, copper power conductors; 75' C wet and dry location. d. All conductors shall be copper. No aluminum wiring is permitted. e. Minimum wire size shall be #12 A.W.G. except for control wiring the Pon minimum allowed size will be 416. 2. Conductors and Strands of Conductors: Soft drawn, annealed, tinned copper of conductivity not less than 98% of pure copper. 3. Conductors run in raceways that are underground, in concrete, equipment rooms, completely encased in exterior masonry walls, directly exposed to the weather or in any other locations where adverse heat and moisture conditions prevail: ., Standard insulation THW. 4. Cables shall be surface printed with a contrasting color consisting of the manufacturer's name, cable size, cable type and voltage rating. B. Splices and Connections: 1. Joints and Splices in Wire #6 to #4/0: Mechanical type connectors. •-� a. Connectors: Fully insulated; OZ type XW and XTP, Burndy VR and VRT or equal. 2. Joints and Splices in Wire #8 and Smaller: Mechanical pre -insulated wire connectors, "Scotch Lock" or T&B "Sta-Kon" or equal. a. Wire nuts acceptable only if each joint is thoroughly insulated with rubber friction tape. b. Pre -insulated indent connectors, by T&B or equal, acceptable on #12 wire only. C. Mechanical connectors, T&B "Wedge -On", Sherman "Wedge -Grip" or equal, connectors acceptable if properly insulated with rubber of friction tape. 3. Taps and Splices in #250 MCM and Larger: Similar to OZ type HW and HT, Burridy NS and NT or equal. 4. Splices and taps to be insulated with a filing compound, Anaconda 150 or equal, rubber and friction tape. a. Insulating Covers: OZ, T&B, or equal. b. Insulating Tapes: Okanite, G.E., Scotch, or equal rubber tape and Manson, Scotch or equal friction tape. C. Insulation on all joints and splices shall have flashover value at least 100% in excess of wire insulation. 5. Terminals and Lugs: a. Stranded wire and cable #6 and above, and #8 where terminals permit up to and including #4/0, to terminate in solderless pressure type lugs, OZ type XL, Bumdy Type NA or equal. 16120 - 2 n CONDUCTORS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wiring: 1. Each wire between boxes must be continuous without weld, splice or joint throughout its length. 2. Not to be drawn into a conduit until all work of a nature which may cause injury is completed. Provide industry standard wire pulling compound for lubricant. Where two or more circuits run to a single outlet box, tag each circuit with linen tags as a guide to the fixture hanger in making fixture connections. 3. Have all stranded conductors furnished with copper connecting lugs, drilled or reamed the full diameter of the bare conductors. Mains and feeders shall be run their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices. 4. Conductors #6 and larger shall be terminated with approved compression type connectors properly sized and installed with proper compression tool and with an approved electrolite. 5. Wire #12 and #10: Factory color coded with colors for each phase and neutral as specified to be used consistently throughout the entire wiring installation. a. Large wires and other types - color coded by a 1" wide band of colored Scotch tape on ends of each conductor. b. Following color code to be used throughout the system: .R, 120/208V 277/480 1) Phase A: Black Brown 2) Phase B: Red Orange k•, 3) Phase C: Blue Yellow 4) Neutral: White White 5) Ground: Green Green *� 6. Splices in wire shall be eliminated where possible, and necessary splices made only in readily accessible pull and outlet boxes. Taps and splices in wire sizes #6 and larger shall be made with mechanical type ON connectors after wire has been cleaned. Connectors shall be fully insulated after joint has been made tight. 8. All electrical power wiring, except as otherwise noted shall be installed in MR conduit, and coupled so as to make a continuous electrical system from the most remote outlet to its distribution center. 9. Maximum voltage drop to be in accordance with N.E.C. 3.02 TESTING A. Cable shall receive standard manufacturer's physical and electrical test. Test shall be in accordance with ICEA S-68-516, Paragraph 6.27. Finished cables shall pass the partial discharge test specified in AEIC CS6 Corona Test and shall meet UL 1072." B. Test insulation resistance of each conductor after installation is complete and all splices, taps, and connections have been made, except connections at source and point. C. Insulation resistance shall be tested by a Proposaldle megger, operating at 1,000 volts 16120 - 3 CONDUCTORS D.C., by connecting one lead to the conductor and the other to the enclosing conduit. Observe readings after one minutes of megger operation at slip speed. Insulation resistance shall not be less than the following: Wire or Cable Size Resistance in Ohms No. 12 1,000,000 No. 10 & 8 250,000 No. 6, 4, & 2 100,000 No. 1, 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, & 4/0 50,000 250 MCM & Larger 25,000 Testing of insulation values applies to service entrance and feeders only. Tabulate values and provide Engineer with two copies. D. Remove and replace any conductors not having insulation resistance equaling or exceeding the above values. E. Perform all insulation resistance tests in the presence of the Owner. ***END OF SECTION*** FIR v 1 �1 16120 - 4 CONDUCTORS SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made apart of this Section. B. Furnish labor and material to install the following: 1. Wall switches 2. Convenience and telephone outlets. 3. Plates. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE POO A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16120 Conductors D. Section 16500 Light Fixtures 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. N.E.C. B. Local City Code C. U.L., listings and labelings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following per Division 1: 1. Wall switches, convenience outlets and floor outlets. 2. Plates - samples to be provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Single Pole Switches: 120V or 277V, 20 amps, toggle switch, Leviton, white in color. 16140 - 1 WIRING DEVICES B. Illuminated Remote Pilot Light: Similar to single pole switches, Leviton. C. Duplex Receptacles: 120V, 20 Amps, NEMA 5-20R grounded, Specification Grade Receptacle, Leviton, white in color. D. Computer Receptacles: All computer electric receptacles shall have an isolated ground and be identified with a green triangle. A separate grounding system shall be provided for all computer receptacles and electrical panels. E. Ground Fault Receptacles: 120V, 20 Amps, NEMA 5-20R, Specification Grade G.F.C.I. Duplex Receptacle, Leviton, white in color. F. Telephone Outlet Box and Plates: Division 16 shall provide the telephone outlet plates as required by telephone installer with modular plug, bushed opening or other application. Plates shall be stainless steel. G. Plates: Provide stainless steel plates throughout the building. Provide weatherproof plates with covers for outdoor applications. H. Floor outlet boxes for receptacles and telephone outlets shall have metal round, rounded edges, brushed aluminum finish with spring loaded cover. I. Devices listed in these specifications are for reference as to style and quality required for this project. Other manufacturer's products may be approved if of equal style and quality. Provide samples of devices if requested by Architect or Engineer. J. Special purpose outlets required on plans not specified herein shall be of similar quality to those specified herein. K. Lock switches (key switches) Leviton or equal, white in color. All switches must be able to use Leviton keys. Locate only where shown on plans (corridors, cafeteria and restrooms). L. 3-Way and 4-way switches shall match single pole switches in style and color. M. All devices to be U.L. listed and labeled and to be manufactured by Leviton. N. Provide ground fault receptacles or breakers in accordance with National Electric Code where shown on plans. O. Colors for devices shall be approved by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting heights per Section 16110, unless specifically noted otherwise on plans. Mount all devices plumb and flush with walls. All devices shall clear door frames, door 16140 - 2 WIRING DEVICES swing, etc. B. Confirm floor outlet locations with Architect. All floor penetrations shall be fire rated by use of fire rated poke-thru devices, etc. Floor outlet covers shall be level, flush, and low profile so as not to cause hazard to personnel. C. Mount all receptacles with the grounding terminal to the top of the receptacle. D. Mount all single pole switches so position "up" is "on". E. Coordinate receptacle locations with countertops, cabinets, etc. Conflicts shall be referred to Architect for adjustment on job site at no extra cost to Owner. F. Prior to "Rough -in", adjustments in location of devices may be accomplished by Architect to account for furniture layout. It shall be accomplished at no extra cost to proj ect. 3.02 TESTING, ADJUSTING, CLEANING A. Test each device for proper connection and operation prior to final inspection. Test each receptacle for correct Hot -Neutral -Ground connection. B. Clean all devices and plates and replace any defective/scratched devices, plates, etc. before final acceptance. * * * END OF SECTION 16140 - 3 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16160 - BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish all labor, materials and accessories to install lighting and power branch circuit panelboards as noted on plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16170 Disconnects 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and so labeled. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1: 1. Brochures and other drawings to also show elevations. 2. Panelboard schedules showing circuit breaker quantity and sizes. 3. Short Circuit Analysis. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lighting and Power Branch Circuit Panelboards: 1. 120/208 or 277/480 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire grounded wye panels as noted on plans; Square D type NQOB or approved equal, factory assembled. 2. Automatic circuit breaker, bolted, dead front type. 3. Listed by U.L., as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, or Siemens. 4. Automatic bolted type molded case branch circuit breakers. a. Circuit Breakers: Bolted -on, thermal -magnetic type unit construction, employing quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanisms for manual 16160 - 1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS operation as well as automatic operation. Common trip on all multi -pole breakers. b. Automatic Tripping: Indicated by breaker's handle assuming a clearly distinctive position from manual "On" and "Off' position; breakers to be removable from front of enclosure for inspection and replacement. C. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlet shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts resulting from frayed appliance cords. d. Where used as switches in 120, 277 volt lighting circuit, circuit breaker shall be approved for such switching duty and shall be marked "SWD". e. Breakers shall be 1, 2 and 3 poles with an integral cross -bar to assure simultaneous opening of all poles in multi -pole circuit breakers. f. Circuit breaker shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 489, as manufactured by Square D or approved equal. 5. Panelboard: Furnished with main lugs only or main circuit breakers as designated on plans. Solderless connectors furnished to connect panel feeder sized to accommodate size wire called for in panel feeder sized to accommodate size wire called for in panel feeder schedule on plans. 6. Doors: Equipped with chrome plated combination lock and catch, provide two keys with each lock. All locks to be keyed alike. ^� 7. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breaker shall not be approved for switching light circuts. B. Bussing: 1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main switch shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. The bus structure shall accommodate bolted on branch switches as indicated on the drawings without modification to the bus assembly. 2. Main bussing shall be copper with 98% minimum conductivity rated as shown on the plans. 3. The temperature rise above ambient shall not exceed 55' C rise in accordance with U.L. procedures. 4. External wiring connections to be compatible for copper wiring. 5. A-B-C type bus arrangement - left to right, top to bottom and front to rear shall be used throughout to assure convenience, safe testing and maintenance. 6. The short circuit rating shall be established by short circuit testing in accordance with NEMA standard PB-1-1471 and shall be unitary rated. 7. All current carrying part of the bus assembly shall be plated. C. Integrated Equipment Short Circuit Rating: Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. This rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted on the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL67. The source shall be capable of supplying specified panelboard short circuit 16160 - 2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. r- D. Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel cabinet shall be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Each front shall include a door and have a flush cylinder tubular type lock with catch and spring loaded stainless steel door pull. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. E. U.L. Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by UL and shall bear the UL label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards flush or surface -mounted as designated on plans. B. Installation to meet the latest edition of the N.E.C. 3.02 PROTECTION Protect all breakers and switches in panels during construction. .., 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboards shall be identified by engraved plastic tags with the name, letter and/or „ number indicated on the plans. B. Provide a typed directory card of equipment, lighting, etc., served by circuit breakers inside each panelboard door. Circuit identification should be by equipment name, location and/or room name and number. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 16160 - 3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS SECTION 16170 - DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B� r switches and fuses as required and indicated on drawings. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16110 Raceways C. Section 16120 Conductors 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. NEMA B. National Electrical Code C. Local Electric Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with provisions in Division 1 and Section 16010. switches and PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fuses protecting circuit breakers or circuit breaker panelboards shall be silver -sand, fast - acting, current limiting UL Class K-1 and R for amperages 0-600 and UL Class Z for amperages 601-6000. Bussman Limitron, or equal, fast -acting fuse. Two spare links of each amperage used shall be given to Owner. B. Fused and Unfused Safety Disconnect Switches: (Fused disconnects not typical and used only where required) 1. Switches: Manufactured by Square D, Westinghouse, General Electric, or Cutler - Hammer. 16170 - 1 DISCONNECTS M 2. General duty for 240 V service, heavy duty for 480 V services with pad locking features. 3. Switches: Quick -make, quick -break use; switches of sizes indicated on drawings. a. Where used to serve motors will bear horsepower rating equal to or exceeding that of motor which they serve, regardless or size or type specified on drawings. b. Equipped with arc -quenching devices. 4. Exterior Switches: NEMA 3R, even if not noted on drawings. 5. Interior Switches: NEMA, Type 1. 6. Disconnects and fuse sizes for all mechanical equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. Fused disconnects used only where required. Contractor to verify before submitting a Proposal. No extras will be granted after signing the contract. C. Small Disconnects: Furnish small 20 amp, 1-P disconnects on all motors including fans, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fuses: Furnish and install operation fuses in each device requiring same and noted on drawings. B. Safety Disconnect Switches: 1. Fused or unfused units as needed and noted on Plans. 2. Contractor to furnish fused or unfused disconnect switches wherever required by NEC and local authorities even if not shown on design drawing at his own expense. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Disconnect switches shall be identified by engraved plastic tags, indicating the apparatus served, amperage and voltage. B. Paint all emergency switches, panels, etc. red in accordance with NFPA and local codes. * * *END OF SECTION * * * 16170 - 2 DISCONNECTS r•■ ' SECTION 16181 - FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT '^ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION '^* A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install current limiting fuses to limit the A.I.C. to an acceptable interrupting rating as indicated on drawings and as required by N.E.C. Section 110. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions ,,.,. B. Section 16120 Conductors C. Section 16140 Wiring Devices D. Section 16164 Panelboards E. Section 01300 Submittals 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. NFPA Codes B. National Electrical Code C. Applicable Building Codes D. Underwriters' Laboratories, listing and labels 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide a schematic riser diagram indicating available short circuit current and fuse let- thru current. Contractor shall ensure that each feeder and apparatus is properly protected from short circuit current and shall calculate and verify the let-thru current at each point in the electrical riser diagram. B. Provide catalogue cuts for all fuses used indicating fuse size, let-thru current, curves, etc. 16181 - 1 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT milk 1.05 WITHSTAND RATING A. The maximum specified value of voltage and current that equipment can safely "handle" is known as it's "Withstanding Rating" of the short circuit current mechanical forces and thermal energy which can destroy equipment and create hazardous conditions. 1.06 HANDLING MECHANICAL FORCES AND THERMAL ENERGY A. At any point in a distribution system, the equipment must be capable of handling the mechanical forces and thermal energy available should these exceed the capabilities of the equipment. Either the equipment must be reinforced or current limiting fuses must be used to reduce the amount of forces and energy available to the equipment, as required by NEC, Article 110. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUSES A. All fuses used on this project shall be UL listed, Class R, J or L as noted. All fuse contacting surfaces shall be plated and fuses shall be so selected as to provide a fully selective coordinated system. B. Spare fuse requirements are as follows: 1. 600 amp and smaller - 10% of each rating (minimum of three per rating). 2. 601 amp and larger - three of each rating. 2.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE & FEEDER CIRCUIT FUSES (601 AMP & LARGER) A. Rated 601 amp to 6,000 amp, 600 volt AC or less shall be UL listed Class L, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap Cat. No. A4BY, A4BT or approved equal. 2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE & FEEDER CIRCUIT FUSES (600 AMP & SMALLER) A. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RKl, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuse body shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap, Cat. No. A2K (250v) or A6K (600v) or approved equal. Note: Alternate Fuse Specification for Paragraph 2.03. B. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL lilted Class J, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Ruse body shall be high temperature, dimensionally stable, long life, non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap, Cat No. A4J, AJT (time delay) or approved equal. 16181 - 2 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT Note: Alternate Fuse Specification for Paragraph 2.03 C. Rated 1 amp to 600 amp, 260 to 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK5, current limiting with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuse body shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life, non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould-Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Falt-Trap, Cat. No. FT (250v) or FTS (600v) or approved equal. 2.04 MOTOR, MOTOR CONTROLLER, TRANSFORMER & INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT FUSES A. Rated 1/10 amp to 600 amp, 250 or 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK5 current limiting time delay with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be constructed of high -temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Tri- onic, Cat. No. TR (250v) or TRS (600v) or approved equal. 2.05 MOTOR, MOTOR CONTROLLER, TRANSFORMER & INDUCTIVE CIRCUIT FUSES A. Where more current limitation is required, rated 1/10 amp to 600 amp, 250 to 600 volt AC, shall be UL listed Class RK1, or Class J, current limiting time delay with 200,000 ampere RMS interrupting rating. Fuses shall be constructed of high temperature, dimensionally stable, long -life non -hygroscopic material equivalent to Gould Shawmut Supr-Tube. Fuses shall be Gould-Shawmut Amp -Trap II, Cat. No. A2D (254v), A61) (600v), AJG (600v) or approved equal. B. Where short-circuit current does not exceed 50,000 ampere RMS and for protection of individual equipment units, the following fuse specifications may be used: 1. Fuses rated 1 ampere to 600 ampere; 250 or 600 volt AC shall be UL listed Class K-5 with 50,000 ampere interrupting rating. Fuse shall be Gould Shawmut One- Tiome, Cat. No. OT (250v) or OTS (600v) or approved. C. NOTE: For protection of circuit breakers and circuit breaker panelboards use Gould Shawmut Amp -Trap (A2K/A6K) or Amp -Trap II (A2D/A6D) or Class J (A4J/AJT). Refer to Specification 2.03 and 2.05 above. Fusible safety switches and panelboards with short-circuit withstand ratings of 200,000 ampere RMS require Class R or Class J rejection fuse holder feature. (Compliance with N.E.C. Article 110-9 and 240-60b). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in devices as required and indicated on drawings. 3.02 GUARANTEE r 16181 - 3 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT F0 A. Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, replace and repair any faulty material for one year from the date of acceptance. * * *END OF SECTION !"x 16181 - 4 FUSES AND SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING VRR PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Referenced Documents: Division 1 - General Requirements, Proposal Requirements, Conditions of the Contract and Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Provide and install a single, complete, integrated grounding system, including all conductors, raceways, and connections, as specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. C. The grounding system shall include the grounding of switchgear, panelboards, transformers, etc.; grounding grid systems with ground rods, structural system, and ?^ water pipe connections. D. The grounding system shall include the grounding conductors completely interconnecting the main water supply pipe, ground rods, distribution equipment, structural system, and other equipment requiring ground connections. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16110 Raceways B. Section 16120 Conductors 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. B. U.L. - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. C. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 1.04 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Install complete grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All grounding products shall be U.L. listed and labeled. 16450 - 1 GROUNDING 1 2.02 CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be of soft drawn stranded copper. Size and type shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. All grounding conductors shall run in building or embedded in concrete or run in conduit shall be insulated unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Insulation color shall be green. C. Insulation shall be 600 volt rated, continuously wrapped with green tape along the entire exposed surface. D. Exposed metallic raceways shall be electrically continuous to provide a ground fault path. E. All exposed non -current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways, and neutral conductors of the wiring system shall be grounded except where specifically indicated otherwise. F. Ground rods shall be copper -clad steel, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long. G. Building ground loop shall be No.. 4/0 bare copper conductor and shall be exothermically welded to a No. 4/0 bare copper conductor, minimum 20 foot long located in the bottom 1/3 of the foundation. Ground loop shall interconnect all driven ground rods. Ground loop shall be connected to the underground metallic domestic water piping system at point of entrance using No. 4/0 bare copper conductors. 2.03 CONNECTIONS A. Make all buried, concealed and accessible ground connections by exothermic welding. B. All connections to equipment or ground bus shall be only satisfactory bolted connectors. Bolt ground connectors shall be suitable for and match the grounding provisions furnished. C. Ground clamps for use on copper or brass pipes shall be of copper, brass or silicone bronze. D. Ground clamps for use on pipes shall be of galvanized or malleable iron, or of standard noncorrosive material. E. Ground clamps for use on pipes shall have rigid metal base providing good contact by proper seating on the pipe. Strap the clamps shall not be used. F. Where required in the specifications, grounding bushings shall be applies on both ends of the conduit run. G. Connections to a bus shall be: 16450 - 2 2 GROUNDING r.1 1. For No. 2 AWG and larger use a crimp type compression lug. 2. For smaller than No. 2 use set screw lug. H. Connect the grounding system to the structural steel framing system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS A. Install grounding conductors and connectors so they will not be exposed to physical damage. All connections shall be firm and tight and protected from physical damage. Arrange conductors and connectors so there will be no strain on the connections. B. Below grade grounding conductors shall be buried at 30 inches below finished grade. Loops or taps shall be brought up for connection to equipment or other items to be grounded. C. Building grounding loop shall be connected to service entrance equipment and grounding copper rods as shown on the drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS A. Install ground rods where indicated on the drawings. The top of the rod shall be 18 inches below the ground unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Measure the ground resistance of the rod and if it is not 25 ohms or less, additional rods shall be driven at that location to obtain resistance of 25 ohms or less. .., B. The final resistance of the interconnected ground system shall be ten ohms or less, measured not less than 24 hours after rainfall. If the final resistance of the system exceeds ten ohms, additional ground rods and ground conductors shall be provided until ►, the specified resistance of the interconnected ground system is obtained. 3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Ground each piece of electrical equipment by means of a grounding conductor installed in the raceway feeding that piece of equipment. Grounding conductors shall be insulated copper wire sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code. B. Connect transformer cases, transformer shielding, and neutrals to the grounding system. The neutral ground connection shall be at times the transformer terminal. Provide two separate, independent, diagonally opposite, connections so the removal of one connection will not impair the continuity of the other. Size and install the grounding system in strict accordance with the National Electrical Code, Article 250. D. Branch circuit ground conductors shall be terminated with a green ground screw or a 16450 - 3 GROUNDING 3 green ground clip. Terminating devices shall be approved for the purpose. E. Service entrance switchgear shall be grounded to the building ground loop. F. Install bonding jumpers to maintain electrical continuity where a firm mechanical bond is not possible, such as expansion joints, points of electrical discontinuity, etc., and where defined on the Drawings and Specifications. * * * END OF SECTION 16450 - 4 GROUNDING 4 SECTION 16500 - LIGHT FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install light fixtures, complete with ballast, lamps, mounting brackets, circuits and switches, etc., as shown on plans. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 General Electrical Provisions B. Section 16140 Wiring Devices 1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Lighting Fixtures: 1. U. L. listed and labeled. 2. Standards of illumination set by I.E.S. 3. National Electrical Code. B. Ballast: ETL - CBM Certified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete ,fixture brochure showing all fixtures with voltage, lenses, lamps, ballast, colors, etc. noted on brochure as specified on plans and light fixture schedule in accordance to Division 1 and Section 16010. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Fixtures shown on plans are for reference only, other equal fixtures will be considered if they are equal to fixture specified based on construction, material used, photometrics, brightness control, visual comfort and equivalent foot candle levels. B. Fixtures to be from manufacturer who has been in the lighting fixture business for a minimum of ten years. 16500 - 1 LIGHT FIXTURES 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Light Fixtures: 1. Plastic Lenses: Virgin acrylic (.125 acrylic lenses for all fluorescent fixtures). All exterior light lenses shall be glass lenses approved by owner. 2. Fluorescent Fixture Ballast: Electronic ballast for use with T-8 lamps, sound rating of "A", Class P and approved by E.T.L., 277V of 120V as shown on plans. 0° Ballast will be required for all outside applications. Preferred manufacture is Advance electronic ballast or approved equal. Magnatek not acceptable. No electrical ballasts shall be installed above ceiling. 3. Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium Ballast: Constant wattage auto - stabilized core and coil high power factor of voltage as specified on drawings able to operate down to 0° F. 4. Re-lamping of fixtures to be accomplished by opening of lens and not by any disassembling of fixture. 5. Minimum starting temperature of 0° F for all outside fixtures. 6. Dedicated wall mounted emergency lighting is required. ., 7. All outside pole and wall mounted lighting around and close to buildings is to remain on all night for security. Centralized photo cells and disconnects should be used for this purpose. ,., 8. Site lighting will require shields as necessary to keep aimed and reflected light on site. 9. Exterior Wallpaks and Canopy Lights shall be HID, 277v, with vandal resistant glass lenses. B. Lamps: 1. Incandescent Lamps: Keyless Porcelain Electric, A-19, A-21, A-23 series PAR 38 or R40 or equal. Low voltage lamps to be 50 watt, PAR 36. 2. Fluorescent Lamps: T-8 (energy saving) cool white or warm white 2850 Lumen •� output by Phillips. 3. Metal Halide and High Pressure Sodium: EMCO, SHFF-QV-400S series, or equal and the appropriate wattage of the fixture as shown on plans. C. Fixtures to be completely wired, ready for installation. D. Fixtures to be thermally protected per NEC and local codes. E. Fluorescent fixtures to have maximum of four lamps and to have tandem wiring with no one lamp ballast. Typical light fixtures for classrooms is 2x4 lay -in 4 lamp, T-8 tubes. Switching shall allow 50% of light fixtures to be turned on / off separately. No electric ballast shall be installed above ceiling. Three (3) foot length fluorescent lighting fixtures are not typically used in this design. F. All pole mounted fixtures to stand up to minimum 100 mph wind speed. 16500 - 2 LIGHT FIXTURES 2 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Light fixture installation to conform to the following: 1. Recessed Fixtures: Complete with accessories required to fit the fixture to the ceiling construction. Contractor to verify ceiling type. 2. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Complete with supports above the ceilings, stems and canopies, swivel aligners and/or other accessories necessary to suspend the fixtures at specified height. 3. Surface or Wall Mounted Fixtures: Furnish and install supports above the ceiling or behind the wall, toggle bolts and other accessories which are required to adequately support the fixture. 3.02 PROTECTION A. After erection, protect exposed portions of work from contact with lime, plaster, mortar, concrete, cement, acids, and other harmful substances as well as from damage by careless handling of tools, machinery and material. 3.03 CLEANING A. When the protective materials have served their purposes, clean them thoroughly. B. Touch-up paint to any fixture that has been scratched. C. Damaged fixtures to be replaced at no extra cost to Owner. D. Any ballast failing within the Contractor's guarantee period to be replaced at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.04 TESTING A. After all light fixtures are installed and are connected to their respective switches, test all fixtures to insure operation on their correct switch in the presence of the Owner. Fixtures that have broken lenses, lamps not burning, etc., to have items replaced at no extra cost to the Owner. * * *END OF SECTION * * * j: 16500 - 3 LIGHT FIXTURES 3 SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Reference Documents: Division I --General Requirements, Conditions of the Contract, Proposal Requirements and Section 16010 - General Electrical Provisions are hereby made a part of this Section. B. Furnish and install an empty conduit system, panelboards, junction boxes, terminal boxes, outlet boxes and all related items for complete installation of the telephone distribution system, data acquisition (computer) system, security system, and all others as shown on the plans. C. Coordinate all work with the telephone company and other governing agencies. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Telephone Company: Conform to all company requirements B. Local Mechanical and Building Codes. C. Requirements of Electric Utilities Departments having local jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rigid PVC conduit Krayloy, or equivalent B. Thin wall conduit (EMT), steel, hot -dipped galvanized, inside and outside; fittings to be of a watertight construction or a compression type. P C. Heavy wall, threaded, rigid steel, hot -dipped galvanized, inside and outside. PM PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide empty PVC or rigid steel conduit mains for the telephone entry into the building and interior telephone service as shown on the plans. Rigid steel conduit mains are to be factory wrapped for underground installation. 1. Provide pull wire in conduits to outlets and to the telephone board. 2. Provide electrical power source (dedicated circuit) close to the telephone board as ^* required by the local Telephone Company. 3. The Drawings show the location and the number of the outlets to be provided for �., 16740 - 1 TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT P" the telephone service. Comply with all of the requirements of the local company's Engineer having jurisdiction over this particular project. No extra's will be authorized for work required by the companies and not shown on the Drawings or as specified herein. 4. Refer to Section 16140 for outlet box type. 5. Provide grounding per company requirements at the telephone board. B. In the typical classroom, at the student work station group location, a total of two (2) telephone drops shall be provided above the ceiling. For data installation provide a one (1) inch conduit drop at each student work station group location. W C. In the tvnical classroom. the teacher's work station shall have a one (1) inch conduit provided for data installation. D. Provide pull wire in each conduit run for the full length of the run. E. Outlet cover plate colors are to be selected by the Architect. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the outlet installation with the telephone company and other companies to insure that the total installation of the system is acceptable to the Owner. * * * END OF SECTION * * * ra 16740 - 2 TELEPHONE SYSTEM / OTHER EMPTY CONDUIT INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS as- 10. SPECIFICATIONS f I� I" NOTICE TO BIDDERS s NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #00-228 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 12th day of October, 2000, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 26th day of October, 2000. at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th .., Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 28th day of September, 2000 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. `CITTY OF LUBBOCK V VICTOR KILiVINI PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be examined at no charge in the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-2167/Fax (806) 775-2164, and are available upon request from http://www.DemandStar.com GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. r-+ 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 775-2164 Email: RShuffield@mail,ci.lubbock.tx.us 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within TWO HUNDRED (200) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 6. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. ow 1 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the — Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all _. damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). _- Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default._ Thevarranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, - J - i 1 J I 1114 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK r: The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, of his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all "^ cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. ""` 3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. e r� In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his .,» classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid �., shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. 5 (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. (j) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder, 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. M I PON. BID SUBMITTAL low, r, w" �W, ses, BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: October 24, 2000 PROJECT NUMBER: #00-228 - LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Bid of Lubbock Buildinct Services, Inc. (hereinafter called Bidder) PM To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MATERIALS: Zi c /y- d - ��- � !� c"; 1, 5 Ct d (� �Ci , %� U ) SERVICES: rt ✓c Li .,,c c-�� . �� o., 7Zi�� a-CI ec.� ;� c c3(c (s SC ��C1' C% } TOTAL BID: (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 200 (TWO HUNDRED) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the v` bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all .necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for n/a Dollars ($ -0- ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 59/. of total amount bid Dollars (S 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be Date: etober 24, 2000 changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. Therefore, any corrections to the bid price must be made on the Bid Submittal form prior to bid opening. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTES7 i !-. Sebr6tary James 13ali nes Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. 1 Date 09/28/00 Addenda -No. 2 at,. l�n Smith, Presi or Typed Name) Lubbock Building Services, Inc. Company 14102 S. .Slide Road- Slil t•P R Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas 79424 State T___L Zip Code PON PM 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No 571 tf cl ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Jerry Smith, President Co c r (Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 14302 S. Slide Road, Suite B ems+ Lubbock, Texas 79424 f r � t� - 1 h THE AMERI:.AN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIA Document A310 Bid Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we Lubbock Building Services, Inc., 14302 Slide Rd.; Lubbock, TX 79424 �., as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation 4610 University Ave Madison, Wisconsin, 53705-0900 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) PO Box 2000, Lubbock, TX 79424 as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of *** FIVE PERCENT OF BID AMOUNT "` Dollars( 5% ) „a for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project) LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee, shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee. in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the .. Principal shall pay to the Obligee, the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee, may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 19th day of October, 2000 0— ' ( Itnoss) w+e (Witness) P" Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (Principal) Staci Gross AIA DOCUMENT A310 - BID BOND - AIA ® - FEBRUARY 1970 ED - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W.. WASHINGTON. D. C. 20006 (Seal) (Title) Attorney -in -Fact g Printed on Recycled Paper 9/93 ''�' INDEMNITY CORPORATION r� 4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON. Y: S:ONSIN 53705-0900 PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADIS _'. ',11 53705-0900 PHONE (608) 231-4450 • FAX (608) 231.2:2; POWER OF ATTORNEY No: Know all men by these Presents, That the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a corporation of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City of Madison, b'Iisconsin, does make, constitute and appoint -------------- STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY ------------------ its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act and deed, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of ------------------------------------------------- NOT TO EXCEED $4,000,000.00-------------------- ---------------------------- This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION A meetina rhtl%, nnlFc t -. 4 Ea , .._. 1 i I "RESOLVED, that the President, and Vice -President. the Secretary or Treasurer, acting individually or otherriis=, ts and they hereby are granted the pc:•:er and authorization to appoint by a Power of Attorney for the purpcses only of executing and attesting bonds and undeca.<,ngs, and other writings obligatory ir,. tr.e nature thereof, one or more resident vice-presidents, assistant secretaries and attorney(s)-in-fact, each appointee to rave the powers and duties usual to s=h offices to the business of this company; the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed to any s;:ch power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsim:'e seal shall be valid and binding upon, the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and t;rding upon the Company in the future :vit'; respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such a__olntment may be revoked, for cause. or without cause, by any of said officers, at any time.` IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has cause- these presents to be signed by r* its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secra:Err, this 1st day of June, 19— CAPITOL INDE-1101NITY CORPORATION Aest: ottt`Iltttu✓�Uiiiiii�� i Vircilline tit. Schulte, Secretary = CO,I -pp�,gTE = t SEAL =` Geer. Fait. President STATE OF WISCONSIN l COUNTY OF DANE J On the 1st day of June, A.D., 1999, before me personally came George A Fait, to n-e known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Dane, State of Wisconsin; that he is the President of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. STATE OF WISCONSIN.001, C 01 G x� COUNTY OF DANE JANE z = F. Jane F. Endres =r r` ENDRES Notary Public, Dane Co., WI //i �,4Av 1U3 ;�Q��\`` My Commission Expires March 23, 2003 CHECK BEST 'RATING .ICESE71N TEXAS � � BY DATE n „ PAYMENT BOND /AA 0 AAII OR AA Y Bond # 773398 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of EIGHT HUNDRED FORTY-EIGHT THOUSAND SIX DOLLAR $) $$4$,600.00 ) HUNDRED AND NO/100THS for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, Dated the 7th day of November 2000 to LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this 'YV 9th day of November 2000 By t By Lu Staci Gross Services, Inc. (Principal) Indemnity Corporation (Surety) Attorney -in -Fact P" INDEMNITY CORPORATION 4610 UNIVERSITY AVENUE, SUITE 1400, MADISON, WISCONSIN 53705-0900 PLEASE ADDRESS REPLY TO P.O. BOX 5900, MADISON. WI 53705-0900 PHONE (608) 231-4450 • FAX (608) 231-2029 POWER OF ATTORNEY i"rP i % , No: _,__ Know all men by these Presents, That the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, a corporation of the State of Wisconsin, having its principal offices in the City of Madison, Wisconsin, does make, constitute �• and appoint -------------- STACI J. GROSS, LAURA A. ESPINOZA, STEVE DEAL OR DONAL BOLEY ----------------- its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf, as surety, and as its act and deed, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of W -------------------------------- ----------- ---- NOT TO EXCEED $4,000,000.00 --------------------------------------------------- This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION at a meeting duly called and held on the 5th day of May 1960: "RESOLVED, that the President, and Vice -President, the Secretary or Treasurer, acting individually or otherwise, be and they hereby are granted the power and authorization to appoint by a Power of Attorney for the purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings, and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, one or more resident vice-presidents, assistant secretaries and attorneys) -in -fact, each appointee to have the powers and duties usual to such offices to the business of this company; the signature of such officers and seal of the Company may be affixed to any such power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so executed and certified by facsimile signatures and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond or undertaking or other writing obligatory in the nature thereof to which it is attached. Any such appointment may be revoked, for cause, or without cause, by any of said officers, at any time." _ IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION has caused these presents to be signed by its officer undersigned and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed duly attested by its Secretary, this 1st day of June, 1999. CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION Attest: 110 Virgiline M. Schulte, Secretary =a CORPORATE' c SEAL °z Georg Fait, President STATE OF WISCONSIN COUNTY OF DANE ) On the 1 st day of June, A.D., 1999, before me personally came George A Fait, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in the County of Dane, State of Wisconsin; that he is the President of CAPITOL INDEMNITY CORPORATION, the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order. STATE OF WISCONSIN `a�P�aFos%�� \J, COUNTY OF DANE } y JANE 2' * F. " S�*= Jane F. Endres ENDRES Notary Public, Dane Co My Commission Expires Marc TAgY PU CERTIFICATE he .office „stated :below, now the , incumbent in CAPITO thorned t6 ake'this certificate, DC+ HEREBY CERTIFY the ce and has not been revoked; and ftarthermore that the RE Drney is now in force. Dated the :9th day of mher,-2QQ4_ II' Ug1lI11Nlpp/i/ - WI 23, 2003 801E3D CRECK BEST RAJING + x LICENSE IN TES 6T !� . BY PERFORMANCE BOND Bond # 773398 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253 OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (PUBLIC WORKS) (Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That Lubbock Building Services, Inc. (hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and Capitol Indemnity Corporation (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of EIGHT HUNDRED FORTY-EIGHT THOUSAND SIX DOLLAR $) $848,600.00 HUNDRED AND NO/100THS for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ACOROTM, CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 11/09/2000 IRODUCER (806)798-7979 FAX (806)798-7888 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION Butler -Carson Insurance Agency ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 'I- 4505 82nd St, Suite 10 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Lubbock, TX 79424 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Lubbock Building Services, Inc. INSURER A: Highlands Underwriters Ins. Co and Jerry Smith INSURERB: Highlands Insurance Co P.O. Box 65600-194 INSURERC: Lubbock, TX 79464 INSURER D: INSURER E: OVERAGES J THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING kA ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. �NSR T. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE MM/OD/YY POLICY EXPIRATION DATE MMIODryY LIMITS I, GENERAL LIABILITY BPO201216 09/30/2000 10/30/2001 EACH OCCURRENCE S 11000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 100,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE � OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) S 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY S 1,000,000 LA GENERAL AGGREGATE S 11000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S 1,000,000 PROJECT LOC POLICY 7 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO BTA203551 09/30/2000 09/30/2001 - COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) S 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) S -A ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) S HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) S GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG S �. ANY AUTO S EXCESS LIABILITY BXS203070 09/30/2000 09/30/2001 EACH OCCURRENCE S 1,000,000 OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S B 1000000 S 1,000,000 $ DEDUCTIBLE S RETENTION S +40 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY BWC800685 09/30/2000 09/30/2001 TORY L M TS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT S 500,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S S00,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S S00,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS!LOCATIONS/VEHICLESfEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECIAL PROVISIONS aiver of Subrogation and Additional Insured Endorsement on the General Liabiliaty and the utomobile and Waiver of Subrogation on the Workers Compensation all in favor of the holder ATIMA in regards to the project at Lubbock Police Academy Small Arms Range Certificate acility CERTIFICATE HOLDER City of Lubbock P. 0. Box 2000 Lubbock, TX 79408 ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED, POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH. TICE SHALL I POSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMP NY, I TS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESS ATIV John Carson _----- --- CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: ""` 2 F.. r-a REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 3 H U H Z O U !_ i5... �.. x. i i -- - �. _ +b 3 � ..:.. � ��.... <.. �. ., ii ..i � ...._ � - .. �..... ... � . .... • �i _ _ ie ..... ti. .. .. �-�.... `ti _. , "{....<. Y f , c. ... P CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 7th day of November, 2000 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Lubbock Building Services Inc of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #00-228 - LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY - $848,600.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: CITY OF LUB K, T S (OWNER) By: Secretary ALEX "TYA COOKE, MAYOR PRO TEM AS TO CONTENT: CONTRACTOR: GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT A., GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit LUBBOCK BUILDING SERVICES. INC. who has agreed to perform the work ^^ embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as e . referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may -�. be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". A 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES .., Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated P'" . by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7, WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. e�+ I CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT - - C 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived, 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall _represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. A'- 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications"and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. """ 3 Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. r- 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be s:. required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged u by reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by ,".M 5 them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order, If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. �l 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations: The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, r-R expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject r"' matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an a,,, Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. m.. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. ^- All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, e" shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. Itshall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor.. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard .�. 7 Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $0 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of T' potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1,000,000.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to 8 -- W r^^ provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a r4 project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and ' payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: C 7 3 9 (a) a certificate of coverage,prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance �- Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor, which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 10 ram• (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall; (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your _ employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, `T to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all ` employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that _ the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period., a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 Y (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. !004 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES 30 Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the'product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. Ir" 13 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State.of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 14 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION r*+ It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as rpm shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. x.- 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS c�- No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. ''"' 15 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the -' Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative, 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding f� L 'Ij7 ♦ Y- rr 2 a_ !^� the work within the time provided in this contract. w, 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's r•, Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. r^ 45. CORRECTION OF WORK 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. 1s ,..6�" �.. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as ^^ provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, -to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in .- paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. P" _ 19 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the - work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS '" Item No. 39 RESOLUTION April 8, 1999 W WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann. Civ. Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates Nvere established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984. further updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987, further updated by Resolution No. 5721 enacted March 14, 1996, and amended by,Resolution No. 6138 enacted December 16, 1998; and WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Exhibit C: Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Legal Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. Passed by the City Council this 8th AT EST: A 11h KaytKid Darnell, City Secretary APPROVED AS�TO CONTENT: Mary An eves, Managing Director of Human Resources I� APPROVED AS TO FORM: Amy L s, As&istant City Attorney p ccdoc ubworks.res March 25. 1999 day of April- . .. t / WINDY S-fitTO14, - EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker 9.250 . r- Asbestos Supervisor 122.550 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 11.00 Carpenter 7.00 Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher .00 Drywall Hanger 00 11.75 Electrician 13. Electrician -Helper 0 r Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.0 9.550 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 9.50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boder 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 11.00 Iron Worker 6.00 Laborer -General Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 r' Sheet Metal Worker 17.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper .00 Welder -Certified 111.00 .h EXHIBIT B a"^ Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8'00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7'00 Electrician 12.00 6.00 Flagger 7.00 Form Setter 6.25 Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8'00 R Mechanic -Helper 7'00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 7.70 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8. 00 Light Equipment Operator 7.2255 Motor Grader Operator 50 6..75 Roller 7.25 Scraper 7.25Tractor Truck Driver -Light .50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7 _�JO A EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be.as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas 79457 9936.01 PROJECT MANUAL AUGUST 30, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK 1625 13T" STREET AVENUE Q LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 (806) 665-2200; FAX 775-3267 BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 3535 TRAVIS, SUITE 250, LB102 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 (214) 528-8704; FAX 528-8707 PARKHILL SMITH & COOPER 4010 AVENUE R LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 (806) 473-3526; FAX 473-3500 INTERVEST ENGINEERING 4123 N. CENTRAL EXPRESSWAY DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 (214) 528-3300; FAX 528-6649 OWNER ARCHITECTS STRUCTURAL/CIVIL ENGINEERS MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/ PLUMBING ENGINEERS OM PROJECT MANUAL JOB NO. 9936.01 August 30, 2000 CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY Lubbock, Texas 79457 City of Lubbock CITY OF LUBBOCK 1625 13T" STREET AVENUE Q LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 (806) 665-2200; FAX 775-3267 BROWN REYNOLDS WATFORD ARCHITECTS 3535 TRAVIS, SUITE 250, LB102 DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 (214) 528-8704; FAX 528-8707 PARKHILL SMITH & COOPER 4010 AVENUE R LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412 (806) 473-3526; FAX 473-3500 INTERVEST ENGINEERING 4123 N. CENTRAL EXPRESSWAY DALLAS, TEXAS 75204 (214) 528-3300; FAX 528-6649 OWNER ARCHITECTS STRUCTURAL/CIVIL ENGINEERS MECHAN [CAL/ELECTRICAL/ PLUMBING ENGINEERS SECTION 00010- TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010- Table of Contents 01-02 00015- List of Drawings 01 00300- Information Available to Bidders 01-02 Soil Investigation DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100- Summary 01-03 01250- Contract Modification Procedures 01-03 01270- Unit Prices 01-02 a 01290- Payment Procedures 01-05 01310- Project Management and Coordination 01-06 01320- Construction Progress Documentation 01-08 (Sample Form: Request for Interpretation) 01330- Submittal Procedures 01-10 (Sample Form: Submittal Transmittal) 01400- Quality Requirements 01-07 (Sample Form: Submittal Transmittal) 01420- References 01-15 01500- Temporary Facilities and Controls 01-11 01600- Product Requirements 01-08 (Sample Form: Substitution Request) 01700- Execution Requirements 01-08 01731- Cutting and Patching 01-05 01770- Closeout Procedures 01-09 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK 02230- Site Clearing 01-03 P„ 02300- Earthwork 01-04 02361- Termite Control 01-02 02670- New Water Well 01-06 02673- Submersible Well Pump 01-05 02750- Concrete Paving 01-05 02760- Paving Specialties 01-03 02820- Chain Link Fences and Gates 01-08 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE ram+ 03100- Concrete Formwork 03200- Concrete Reinforcement 03300- Cast -In -Place Concrete 01-06 DIVISION 4- MASONRY •+ 04220- Concrete Masonry Units 01-07 DIVISION 5- METALS 05120- Structural Steel 01-08 05210- Steel Joists n 05500- Metal Fabrications 01-04 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 00010-2 a+� AUGUST 30, 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS I DIVISION 6- WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100- Carpentry 06175- Wood Trusses 06400- Architectural Millwork & Casework DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07260- Vapor Barrier Membrane 07300- Shingle Roofing & Flashing 07900- Sealants DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110- Metal Doors & Frames 08410- Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08500- Metal Windows 08710- Finish Hardware 08800- Glazing DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09910- Painting 09931- Exterior Wood Stains 09960- High Performance Coatings 09963- Elastometric Special Coatings DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10170- Plastic Toilet Compartments 10520- Fire Protection Specialties 10810- Toilet Accessories DIVISION I I- EQUIPMENT DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14- CONVEYING SYSTEMS DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15060- Pipes and Pipe Fittings 15100- Valves and Miscellaneous Items 15200- Septic System DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 01-05 01-05 01-04 01-02 01-04 01-04 01-03 01-06 01-05 01-04 01-06 01-12 01-06 01-08 01-08 01-04 01-03 01-07 01-07 01-03 01-02 END OF SECTION 00010 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 00010-2 AUGUST 30, 2000 TABLE OF CONTENTS E,. SECTION 00015 - LIST OF DRAWINGS T1.1 TITLE SHEET ` CIVIL C1.1 SITE PLAN C1.2 ENLARGED SITE PLANS, SITE DETAILS C1.3 WATER AND SEWER UTILITY PLAN CIA STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C1.5 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS STRUCTURAL S2.1 HANDGUN RANGE STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS S2.2 RIFLE RANGE STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS S2.3 RESTROOM BUILDING STRUCTURAL PLANS & DETAILS ARCHITECTURAL A L I HANDGUN RANGE FLOOR PLAN A1.2 RIFLE RANGE FLOOR PLAN, RESTROOM BUILDING FLOOR PLAN, ENLARGED PLANS, PARTITION TYPES A 1.3 RIFLE RANGE FLOOR PLAN A2.1 HANDGUN RANGE ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS, RIFLE RANGE ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS A2.2 RESTROOM BUILDING ELEVATIONS & SECTIONS, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS A2.3 WALL SECTIONS & DETAILS k, A3.1 DOOR SCHEDULE, WINDOW, DOOR & FRAME TYPES A3.2 REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND DETAILS A3.3 FINISH PLANS MEP E MEP-1 RANGE ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES MEP-2 RESTROOM BUILDING PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SCHEDULES END OF SECTION 00015 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 00015 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 LIST OF DRAWINGS F SECTION 00300 — INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION A. Geotechnical Investigation (Sub -surface Soils Tests) for the project site has been performed and a report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the investigation report (Soils Report) is bound herein. B. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. Owner and/or Architect assume no responsibility for any conclusions of interpretations made by Contractor related to information included in the Report. Should contractor require additional information concerning subsurface conditions, he may without cost to Owner, make additional investigations. Should additional investigations produce 1 C. Contractor shall read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soil Report, including but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub -bases and fill and construction of building foundations and o'l PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 00300 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 00300 - 2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS .e. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION.......................................................................... 1 2.0 EXPLORATION, SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING ................ 2 3.0 LABORATORY TESTING............................................................ 3 4.0 GENERAL SOILS AND DESIGN CONDITIONS ......................... 4 4.1 Site Description................................................................... 4 4.2 Description of Soils............................................................. 4 4.2.1 Holes #1 through #4 for the buildings in the Hand GunRange............................................................ 4 4.2.2 Holes #5 through #8 for the buildings in the Shoot House.................................................................... 5 4.2.3 Holes #9 through # 12 for the buildings in the Rifle Range..................................................................... 5 4.3 Design Recommendations.................................................... 6 5.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS .......................................... 8 5.1 Description of Soil in the Pavement Area ............................ 8 5.2 Light Normal Traffic........................................................... 9 5.3 Marshall Procedures............................................................ 10 5.4 Heavy Traffic...................................................................... 11 6.0 SITE PREPARATION.................................................................... 13 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA....................................................... 14 7.1 Site Drainage...................................................................... 14 7.2 Quality Control.................................................................. 14 8.0 LIMITATIONS.............................................................................. 16 9.0 REPORT DISTRIBUTION............................................................. 18 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK MIDLAND SOIL INVESTIGATION Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range Reese Center, Lubbock, Texas I1.0 INTRODUCTION STR 1458 2 8/23/00 2.0 EXPLORATION, SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING At the request of the client, the sub -surface conditions were explored by fourteen (14) test holes, twelve (12) borings drilled to a depth of 20.0 feet, and two (2) to a depth of 5.0 feet at locations shown in the boring location plan (Figure 1). The drilling was performed using CME-75 Drilling Rig with hollow stem augers in order to secure reliable data on the natural moisture content of the soil and ground water, if any. Standard penetration tests were made at depths of 2.5, 5.0 feet and at 5.0 feet interval thereafter. The number of blows per foot of the split spoon sampler (in 6-inch increment) is shown in the boring logs and in Figure 2. The sampling was performed in accordance with the ASTM D-1586; however we limit the number of blows on the split spoon sampler to a maximum of 25 for the first 6 inches of penetration and if the penetration of the sampler for the first or the second 6 inches increment is less than 6 inches, we report the actual penetration obtained for the respective increment in the boring logs. The changes in soil strata as observed during drilling operations were carefully determined and are shown in the boring logs. All soil samples were kept in moisture - proof plastic bags to preserve the in -situ moisture content, identified by the hole number and the depth of the hole, and transported to the Iaboratory for additional tests and evaluation. The boring was monitored during and immediately after drilling for the presence and level of groundwater. However, the groundwater table was not observed during drilling. TERRA ENGINEERS. INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 8/23/00 3 3.0 LABORATORY TESTING All samples have been classified following the procedures outlined in ASTM D- 2487 based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Soils are described in the boring logs using the methods prescribed in ASTM D-2488, using a Munsell Soil Color Chart, published by Macbeth Division of Kollmorgen Corporation, Baltimore, Maryland, 1975 edition. Soil samples, which indicated maximum plasticity characteristics, were selected and Atterberg Limit tests were performed on these samples according to procedures outlined in ASTM D-4318. Percentage by weight of material passing sieve # 200 was determined by ASTM D-1140 for the same samples. Moisture content for all samples were determined by the nrocedures outliners ;n ARTM D-9916 P;Q1,t Isn !S-. r STR 1458 4 8/2 3/00 4.0 GENERAL SOILS AND DESIGN CONDITIONS 4.1 Site Description The site is physically located at the Reese Center, Lubbock, Texas. Site is on a cotton held. 4.2 Description of Soils Since the test holes were drilled at stations which are relatively located at some distance apart for specific buildings, the details of the soil layers in these respective areas are discussed separately. 4.2.1 Holes #1 through #4 for the buildings in the Hand Gun Range. The topsoil in hole #1 is brown sandy silty clay (CL-ML) for approximately two feet below the surface while in holes #2 and #3, it is clayey sand (SC). The topsoil in hole #4, it is sandy lean clay (CL). The values of the plasticity index of the topsoil vary between 6 and 8 and these values are considered as. of very low plasticity. Immediately below this topsoil, there are layers of sandy lean clay (CL) with a plasticity index varying between 14 and 22. Further below, there are layers of clayey sand (SC). The thickness of the sandy clay layers varies as indicated in the boring logs. The strength of the soil layers increases as indicated by the SPT tests in these holes. Some of the deep clayey sand layers contain traces of caliche_ soil and rock pieces and hence found to be very strong. All the clayey soils are classified as clays of low plasticity. However, when the value of plasticity index becomes larger than 15, the soil will have some expansive and shrinking characteristics. TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK I e.k STR 1458 5 8/23/00 4.2.2 Holes #5 through #8 for the buildings in the Shoot House. The topsoil in hole #5 is brown sandy clay (CL) for approximately two feet below the surface while in holes #6, it is a clayey sand with silt (SC). In holes #7 and #8, the topsoil is clayey sand (SC). The value of the plasticity index of the topsoil is about 7 and this value is considered as of very low plasticity. Immediately below this topsoil, there are layers of sandy lean clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC) with a plasticity index varying between 14 and 15. Further below, there are layers of clayey sand (SC). The thickness of the sandy clay layers varies as indicated in the boring logs. The strength of the soil layers increases as indicated by the SPT tests in these holes, except in hole #6. Some of the deep clayey sand layers contain traces of caliche soil and rock pieces and hence found to be very strong. All the clayey soils are classified as clays of low plasticity. However, when the value of plasticity index becomes larger than 15, the soil will have some expansive and shrinking characteristics. 4.2.3 Holes #9 through #12 for the buildings in the Rifle Range. The topsoil in holes #9 and #12 is brown clayey sand (SC) for approximately two feet below the surface, while in holes #10 and #11, it is a sandy clay (CL). The value of the plasticity index of the topsoil is between 7 and 9, this value is considered as of very low plasticity. Immediately below this topsoil, there are layers of sandy lean clay (CL) or clayey sand (SC) with a plasticity index varying between 14 and 22. Further below, there are layers of clayey sand (SC). The thickness of the sandy clay layers varies as indicated in the boring logs. The strength of the soil layers increases as indicated by the SPT tests in these holes, except in hole #12. In hole #12, there is a very loose spot at a depth of 5 feet below TERRA ENGINEERS. INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 6 8/23/00 the ground level. The reason' for the low strength is not known. Some of the deep clayey sand layers contain traces of caliche soil and hence found to be very strong. All the clayey soils are classified as clays of low plasticity. However, when the value of plasticity index becomes larger than 15, the soil will have some expansive and shrinking characteristics. 4.3 Design Recommendations The triaxial compression tests performed on all samples indicate that both values of the modulus of elasticity of the soil at 50% ultimate strength are 1333, 1000, 5000, 1666, 1428 and 1250 psi respectively. All samples were extracted from shallow depths in order to get properties of soil at shallow depths. The location and depths of the holes where samples are extracted are indicated in the respective stress — strain graphs. An average value of 1300 psi (excluding the high value) is used for computing deformations of the soil. It is reported that the proposed buildings are lightly loaded and single storied. It is therefore recommended that the spot and or continuous footings can be used as the foundation for the buildings. The allowable bearing value for the soil at a depth of 2.5 feet below the ground level is 1.500 psf with a minimum width of footing equal to 18 inches. All floor slabs they shall be placed only on compacted soil and the compaction has to be performed as recommended in the Section 6.0 Site Preparation. Also the soil that exist at the top is susceptible to loss of strength when inundated with water. It is recommended to avoid landscape very close to the foundation, since the soil can lose strength when subjected to excessive moisture. It is further recommended to provide good TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK r.. i STR 1458 7 8/23/00 drainage around the structure so as to maintain good bearing for the soil (see Section 7.1 for more specific information). The above given bearing vsbiec arP fnr the riantlhc ;"A;, -+-A ..-A l-- i, 1 I� STR 1458 8 8/2 3100 5.0 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS 5.1 Description of Soil in the Pavement Area Holes # 13 and 414 were drilled for the pavement area. The topsoil in hole 413 is a brown clayey sand (SC), while the topsoil in hole #14 is brown sandy clay (CL). The value of the plasticity index of the sandy clay is 8. This topsoil is considered as having low plasticity index. Immediately below the topsoil, there are layers of sandy clay (CL) all the way to 5 feet which is the bottom of these two holes. The values of the plasticity index of these clayey soils vary between 14 and 19. Since there are some clayey soils in the subsoil area, which can loose strength when their moisture contents increase, it is recommended to have good drainage for the pavement and in the vicinity of the pavement area. Typical sample of the topsoil was selected for moisture density relation and California Bearing Ratio (CBR) tests. The maximum dry density and the optimum moisture content of the soil were determined in accordance with ASTM D-698. A sub - sample of the top soil is taken and depending on the in -situ moisture, either water is added to the sub -sample or the sub -sample is dried in an oven to bring the moisture content as close to the optimum moisture as determined previously by ASTM D-698. The sub -sample is then compacted in a CBR mold to a density approximately equal to 95% of its maximum dry density. The results of the tests are given below (see Table 2 & 8). The following recommendations are made for light automobile traffic and heavy truck traffic based on the CBR values of the subgrade and the design practices used in general in the Lubbock area. TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 9 8/23100 5.2 Light Normal Traffic 1. All debris, vegetation, roots, or any foreign material must be removed from existing topsoil. Surface soils shall then be scarified to a depth of 9.0 inches and compacted to a dry density not less than 95% of the standard maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698. 2. Any soil fill to elevate the natural grade shall be compacted in 9.0-inch lifts according to the specifications stated earlier for soil fills. Subsequent layers shall be placed only after testing and approval of the previously compacted layer by the engineer -in -charge. The plasticity index of the soil shall not be greater than 12. 3. Above the compacted subgrade, it is recommended to use a crushed rock or good graded caliche base compacted to at least 9.0 inches. The crushed rock base will be superior to the caliche base, because sometimes good caliche with hard rock pieces is hard to find. Further, poor quality caliche material can get crushed during compaction and this is not desirable for the life of the pavement. The compaction of the base shall not be less than 95% of the modified maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698 for crushed rock or caliche base material. The liquid limit of the base material shall not be greater than 35 and the plasticity index not greater than 12 and the linear shrinkage not to exceed 8. The recommended gradation of the base material is as follows: Retained 13/4" 0 percent Retained on sieve #4 40-75 percent Retained on #40 sieve 60 - 85 percent TERRA ENGINEERS. INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 10 8/23/00 The above specification is similar to TxDOT Spec # 247.2 Type C, Grade 4, 1995 Edition. 4. A hot mix asphalt surface course shall be placed over the compacted base. The asphalt surface course shall be at least 1.5 inches in thickness. The compaction of the asphalt mix shall be between 94 and 97 percent of maximum theoretical specific gravity as determined by ASTM D-2041 (Rice Method). The proposed materials shall be tested for acceptance prior to construction. Material properties shall be at least those required for. Type C Item 340 Texas State Department of Highways, 1982, Tex-200f (Coarse Graded Surface Coarse). Testing, both laboratory and field shall be in accordance with the procedures outlined in ASTM D-1559. 5. Drainage of the top surface is of utmost importance, because any stagnant water on_ the�--srface of the asphalt pavement is very detrimental to the life of the Pw.. STR 1458 11 8/23/00 7. It is recommended that frequent inspection and testing be made during asphalt paving operations. It is recommended to follow mixing and placing practices recommended by the Asphalt Institute in their publication, MS-22, "Principles of Construction of Hot -Mix Asphalt Pavements," January, 1983 edition. 5.4 Heavy Traffic In areas where heavy traffic is anticipated, concrete pavement shall be provided. In particular where the garbage dumpsters are placed, it is recommended to use concrete pavement in the vicinity of the dumpster. The following recommendations shall be regarded as minimum standards: 1. Existing surface soils shall be prepared as in items 1 and 2 recommended for light normal traffic. 2. Over the prepared and compacted surface soils, a base (refer to "Light Normal Traffic" section 6.1.3 for type of base) shall be placed and compacted as follows: The base shall be at least 9.0 inches in depth. The material may be placed in one lift if full depth compaction can be achieved. Compaction shall be at least 95% of maximum dry density as determined in ASTM D-698. Compaction shall be accomplished at the optimum moisture. 3. Over the prepared and compacted base, a concrete pavement shall be placed. It is recommended that the pavement be reinforced concrete pavement of at least 6.0 inches in depth. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi when tested as per procedures outlined in ASTM C-31 and C-39. It is recommended to follow guidelines of the American Concrete Institute (ACI) in construction of this pavement. A laboratory prepared mix design shall be done TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 12 8/23/00 following procedures of ACI 211. It is recommended that construction, isolation, and control joints be placed strategically as recommended by ACI publications. Further, the location of joints shall be based on the shrinkage potential information developed in the mix design. It is recommended to provide continuous on site inspection and testing of concrete materials as the concrete is placed for pavements. ---- - TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK i STR1458 13 8/23/00 6.0 SITE PREPARATION It is recommended that the top 2.0 inches of soil shall be removed to clear the w debris, roots and vegetation, if any. In the building area it is recommended that at least 9.0 inches of soil be scarified and compacted in order to obtain a uniform surface. The & ' compaction shall be performed such that the compacted dry density shall be at least 95% of the computed laboratory dry density as determined by ASTM D-698. If the ground elevation has to be increased, the soil fill shall be placed on top of the compacted soil such that each compacted layer shall not exceed 9.0 inches in thickness and the compaction shall be performed as per the above specification. If the transported soil is different from the existing soil, then the soil shall be tested for Atterberg limits (ASTM Tl AXON r , r STR 1458 14 8/23/00 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA 7.1 Site Drainage Because of the presence of clayey soil, it is recommended to provide adequate drainage outside the building. Provision of flowerbeds or lawns close to the building can have very detrimental effects on the foundation because of the possibility of softening of the clayey sands with increase in moisture. Flower beds and lawns shall be placed sufficiently away from the building or placed in waterproof structures, so that they will not supply any moisture to the soil under the building. It is also recommended that the e be well developed. Surface water shall be directed away from the STR 1458 15 8/2 3/00 recommendations made in this report have been interpreted as intended, and to inspect the installation of all foundations. TERRA ENGINERRS, INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 16 8/23/00 8.0 LIMITATIONS Every effort has been made to accurately evaluate the subsurface conditions at the above referenced site in accordance with the standard engineering principles and practices. No other warranty or guarantee, expressed or implied, is made other than that the work was performed in a proper and workmanlike manner. However, it must be recognized that boulders or gravel of sizes larger than 1.5 inches cannot be retrieved by the SPT sampling tube. The foundation recommendation stated in this report is based on only fourteen (14) borings, twelve (12) to a depth of 20.0 feet and two (2) to a depth of 5.0 feet at locations shown in the boring location plan (Figure 1). The conclusions reached in this report are exclusively for engineering design and were based on the field tests and results of laboratory tests conducted on samples recovered from fourteen (14) test holes drilled to a depth specified by the client. Further, the recommendations presented herein are r�» STR 1458 17 8/23/00 pier drilling and installation and to perform the construction material testing during the construction phase. Due to changes in the current technology, changes to the project site conditions, changes in project specification etc., this report and the recommendations made in here shall be outdated with in a period of one (1) year from the date of the report. We strongly recommend that the client should contact Terra Engineers, Inc. to determine whether this report is valid after the expiration of the above mentioned time period. TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK STR 1458 8/23/00 1s 9 9.0 REPORT DISTRIBUTION This report was prepared by Terra Engineers, Inc. for the sole and exclusive use by its client, based on specific and limited objectives. All reports, boring logs, field data, laboratory test results and other documents prepared by Terra Engineers, Inc. as instruments of service shall remain the property of Terra Engineers, Inc., and reuse of these documents is not permitted without written approval from Terra Engineers, Inc. The client may release the information to third parties, who may use and rely upon the information at their discretion. However, any use of or reliance upon the information by a party other than specifically named above shall be solely at the risk of such third party and without legal recourse against Terra Engineers, Inc., its parent company, or its subsidiaries and affiliates, or their respective employees, officers or directors, regardless of whether the action in which recovery of damages is sought is based upon contract, tort (including the sole, concurrent or other negligence and strict liability of Terra Engineers, Inc.), statute, or otherwise. This information shall not be used or relied upon by a party that does not agree to be bound by the above statement. Terra Engineers, Inc. assumes no responsibility or obligation for the unauthorized use of this report by a third party. We appreciate the opportunity to be of assistance on this project. If you should have any questions, please feel free to call us. Very truly yours, ��t TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. C. V. G. VAt BNAN C. V. G. Vallabhan, Ph.D., P. E. 30199 /' 4Z 0�F� Geotechnical Engineer TEg�'��'�1 INEERS. LUBBOCK STR 1458 SOIL INVESTIGATION Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range Lubbock, Texas PREPARED FOR Mr. Gary Smith, AIA Office of Facility Engineering City of Lubbock 1625 13lb Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 August 23, 2000 1 'RRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK HO. 5208 34 th STREET . 'P.O. SOX 16605 • LU13SOCK 6 TEXi45 794904805 • (806) 793 4767 • FAX (806) 793 4768 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 • (806) 793-4767 _ FAX (806) 793-4768 August 23, 2000 Office of Facility Engineering City of Lubbock 1625 13" Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Re: Geotechnical Soil Investigation for the proposed Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Lubbock, Texas Dear Mr. Smith: Submitted herein is STR No. 1458 on the soil investigation for the above referenced project. Included in this report are our analysis and recommendations for foundation design. -b We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. If we may answer any questions or be of any additional assistance, please call us. Sincerely, TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. AJ/ld SOIL INVESTIGATION • MATERIAL TESTING • ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES - PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES • NDT "' STR 1458 8/23/00 Table I Moisture Density Relationship, (ASTM D-698) "Maximurn Dry Optimum Location Description Density, pcf Moisture Content Test hole # 14 Brown sandy lean 109.9 13.8% clay Table 2 CBR Value (ASTM D-1883) of the soil the 95% optimum dry density and at approximately 2.0% above optimum moisture (not soaked) Penetration Location Description of soil Moisture, % 0.111 0.211 Test hole # 14 Brown sandy lean 15.0 5.5 7.0 clay TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK 1783' .. Ej. ,+,.J.a,.', .:a:;.3.. :: Yi' �\:Yb `u 9s, � � h „ � ,rk�.' :tic •k•,t;�`*' Ao2;'•;;St'�„"d�i8;:>:Z,'.>4zJ•'�'x�"�:`,�' .:.1Y �:#�:�••��'.%a ,s: �� . �+..Y` `Jc;£#Yi ° S ?,`?i.'" h �YZ�?,.,(� v: �'?� d v,?'u's":3$�>: •;x'• \ 2a.>, < " J3:?3.'•y<:u„ � \ t .�;%��3��`''tt.'. E'�lz,:�'�.'`.'.'''.'�a'^��.�::,n>.:s�:;::�F'.`:•z.`.�?`:Ss:,'{,t.3::.E.c.:�.�`'�';':,',:.n.�i::; `'x�.�`.16`,,: ��j. UJ '••'�`''�;C Y�i:M1:: i}i�2$•i`'Cib.' Y. :YC' E:9 ��!iN `'k^:'a'i„%ki. G. � ,} `�; o:+P ✓�w�:_' .:.. tk:t..,` I .. •, } ?ern. q'2?� � ti;;y. / _ I m = m a9 �m'a•''v's' i fn Ci \ ,� 0 1VIFW�� UM � I W � _ m m �O I \0 C 3 w I ' (n O CQQ9 Mg 1746' ; on T ------------- 19TH STREET r" 0 0-1 5 10 a� 15 0 20 0 25 30 +ai-4V ••.'1- S -C ;:�� ;vM.Mk4.'..rw.A� k#9..b ,.: '^�:n.. No. of blows per foot (N) 10 20 30 40 50 MEIMMMMMEEEEEEEEEEE� Eiil� WSIMEEM IMIMM� . EEEMEEEEEMMIMM .E ..EE:EE..a.E HE . ' 4M .............■.. M..■■ .OMMIMM ......� iilMWWAMMM........ MMMIM..... IMIM0 .........■ ■......... ■. EEEEEEEEEE=E•••EEEEEEEMS i...... IMMIM! i MWIM....ii M * Emmmmmmmmmm i......................M ■............mmmm. ■■. mm EEEEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE •••• EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE�=; EEEE■�iNEEeiiE 35 --- -- - Note: An arrow indicates N is greater than 50 blows/R. Figure 2a Standard Penetration Test, ASTM D- 1586 Method of Sampling: ASTM D-1586, Split -Barrel Sampler Size of Samples: 2-in. Method of Drilling: Wet_ Dry X STR 1458 08/16/00 o BH #1' X BH #2 ' A BH #3 ❑ BH #4 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK 0 5 10 15 0 CL � 20 25 30 35 No. of blows per foot (N) 0 10 20 30 40 50 ■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■ ■MMMMMMMEMMMMM■ ■■MM■OMMMMMEMMME■MM JMMMME■MMMENMMMEM■S■■N ■ EM M ■■Mi MMMMMO■■■■■■■■■■ O■MMM■MMM■M■MMOM■■■■■ M O �MMMEMMMMEM ME WOMEN! A A■■M!!1■ON M MMIMMM EMM■MMMMMM.C■■MO Mi'�i1MEE■ MMMM ■ ME EEEEEEEEE■■■.NMMMMM. EEEEEEEE■E.■E■■■.. MMM ■MMlTMAMMM■■NEM M■M■M mmml ON ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ MEMMEMMME■MMMM MEEM■MEMO MMMMOMMMO■MEEM M■MM MM■ MMOMMOMMOOMMMM�MEMM N MMMMEE M■■MM M MM Note: An arrow indicates N is greater than 50 blows/ft. Figure 2b Standard Penetration Test, ASTM D- 1586 Method of Sampling: ASTM D-1586, Split -Barrel Sampler Size of Samples: 2-in. Method of Drilling: Wet _ Dry X STR 1458 08/16/00 0BH#5', !XBH#6i A BH #7 i o BH #8 CM TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. LUBBOCK r i t r No. of blows per foot (N) 0 10 20 30 40 50 MM©t•MMMMMMMMMMMMME MMMMM■MMM■■MMMMEMMH Sm j STIR 1458 08/16/00 0BH#13, XRH it141 x BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 1 r�+ Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range — Reese Center Hand Gun Range 08.07-00 Client: Depth ofGWT: Z City of Lubbock - - Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: STR No.: Unknown 7 7/8" 20, HSA 1458 Depth, ft Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit, % Plastic I Limit, /0 Plasticity Index 1 Passing 02 % SPT, No. of Blows per 6 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Sandy Silty Clay w/organics, Brown CL- 2.6 21 15 6 . 5.1.5 2-5 Sandy Lean Clay, Strong Brown CL 13.5 3 5. 7 5 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 10.0 26 12 14 61.6 3 4 7 i0 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 12.5 4 7 11 15 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Yellowish Red SC 14.6 35 16 19 39.8 8 14 15 20 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Pink SC 12.7 11 20 22 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. BORING LOG TEST HOLF, NO. 2 Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center Hand Gun Range 08-07-00 Client Depth of GWT: Cit of Lubbock ----- ' Surface Elevation: Diameter: 120' Depth: Boring Method: STR No.: Unkmown 7 7/8" HSA 1 1458 Depth,.ft Description USC Moisture Content, 0/o Liquid Limit,'/o Plastic I . Limit, % Plasticity Index Passing 0200, % SPT, No. of Blows per G' 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC 2.1 2.5 Sandy Lean Clay. Dark Brown CL 11.7 29 14 15 61.9 3 5 4 5 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 9.3 7 8 9 10 Sandy Lean Clay, Yellowish Red CL 16.2 40 18 22 50.6 8 16 24 15 Sandy Lean Clay, Yellowish Red CL 14.8 5 12 17 20 Clayey Sand, Reddish Yellow SC 10.8 32 15 17 29.0 10 16 18 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. TS- Top Soil TFST ROLE NO. 3 -t�" 'i"A BORING LOG Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police A Range - Reese Center cademy Firing Hand Gun Range 08-07-00 Client: Depth of GWT- V City of Lubbock SurfaceSurfaceElevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: —F STR TR No.: No.: Unlinown 17 7/8"- 20' HSA 1458 r��'Tft Description I USC Moisture �Content, % Liquid Limit, % Plastic Limit, % Plasticity Index Passingof N 2 Blows per 6" ad 3rd Remarks Ts -_ Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC 2.71 2-5 Sandy Lean Clay, Brown CL 10.5 30 -14 16 67.9 6 8 9 5 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 10.5 4 9 10 10 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 14.8 35 14 21 61.4 5 10 13 15 Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 14.6 42 19 23 48.1 7 12 17 20 Clayey Sand w/trace of caliche, SC 11.4 9 14 12 Yellowish Red 25 30 35 - - 40 45 - - so TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. BORING LOG 9 LEST HOLE NO. 4 Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range —Reese Center Hand Gun Range 08-07-00 Client: Depth of GwT: _ V City of Lubbock ---- Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: STR No.: Unknown . 7 7/8" 20' IHSA 1458 Depth, ft Description USC Moisture Content, Y° Li uid Limtt % I. Plastic limit, % Plastid Index# PassingSPT, 200,°/o No. of Blows 1st 2nd per Remarks TS Sandy Lean Clay w/organics, Brown CL 2.5 22 14 8. 57.3 2.5 Sandy Lean Clay, Dark Brown CL 13.5 4 3 4 5 Lean Clay w/sand, Pink CL 14.3 28 14 14 76.6 3 7 6 10 Clayey Sand w/trace of caliche, SC 13.2 10 16 19 Yellowish Red 15 Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 17.2 41 19 22 47.2 7 8 15 20 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Pink SC 9.9 23 21 25 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEEKS, 1Nc:. BORING LOG 4 TEST HOLE NO. 5 n k r-+ a TS- Top Soil Project: s Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center Location: Shoot House Date of Drilling: 08-09-00 Client: Cityof Lubbock Depth oLGwT:. V_ Surface Elevation: Unknown Diameter: 7 7/8" 120, Depth: Boring Method: HSA STR No.: 1458 Depth, R Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit,'/o Plastic Limit, % Plasticity Index Passing # 200, % SPT, No. of Blows per G' 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Sandy Lean Clay w/organics, Brown. CL 6.7 2.5 5 Sandy Lean Clay w/trace of caliche, Strong Brown CL 11.6 27 14 13 59.0 4 -4 4 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL 11.5 4 7 11 10 Lean Clay w/sand, Pink CL 11.2 31 15 16 73.8 6 11 13 15 Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 12.2. 33 16 17 35.8 7 14 21 20 Clayey Sand w/trace of caliche, Reddish Yellow SC 8.1 8 15 15 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TERRA ENGINEERS, IM. BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 6 Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center Shoot House 08-09-00 Client _ Depth of GWT: City of Lubbock ---- Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: IHSA Boring Method: STR No.: Unknown .. 77/8" 20' 1458 Depth, ff Description USC . Moisture Content /o Liquid Limit,,/o Plastic Limit, /o .Plasticity Indes Passing #200, % SPT,No. of Blows per 1st 2nd 3rd TS' Silty Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC- 6.1 22 I 15 7 49.0 1 i .s iy BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 7 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center - Location: Shoot House, Date of Drilling: 08-09-00 Client: City of Lubbock Depth of GWT: _Z — Surface Elevation: Unknown Diameter: 17 7/ ' Depth: 20' Boring Method: HSA STR No.: 1458 ' Depth, ft Description USC Moisture Content %Limit, Liquid % Plastic Limit % Plasticity Indes Passing #2(q, % SPT, No. or Blows per 6l' 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks 1l A,_1 r, s BORING LOG Project: Location: Date of I Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range — Reese Center I Shoot House 08-09-00 BORINGI LOG P- TEST HOLE NO. 9 rFlI.--ject: ---TLocation: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center 1ii Range,,08-10-00 Date of Drilling: Client: City of Lubbock De Surface —7- Elevation: jUnknown Diameter: 17 7/8" Depth: 1 20' Boring Method: 1 HSA ' STR No.: 1 1458 Depth, ft Description USC Moisture Content,% Liquid Limit, % Plastic UFnit, % Plasticity Index Passing N 200, % SPT, No. of Blows per 6" 1st 2nd 3rd Rematits TS Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC 4.6 2.5 Sandy Lean Clay, Dark Reddish Brown CL 12.0 32 15 17 59.1 4 5 7 5 Sandy Lean Clay w/caliche, Reddish Yellow CL 14.8 3 5 7 10 Sandy Lean Clay w/caliche, Pink CL 14.1 32 14 18 58.3 7 15 16 15 Sandy Lean Clay, Yellowish Red CL 15.7 9 12 12 20 --NClayey Sand w/caliche, Yellowish Red SC 15.4 31 17 14 35.9 5. 11 25 25 30 35 - 40 45 — 50 — — I TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, INc. BORING LOG J LEST HOLE NO. 10 Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center Rifle Range 08-10-00 Client: Depth of GWT: �L City of Lubbock --- - Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: STR No.: Unknown 7 7/8" 20' HSA 1458 Depth; ft Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit, % Plastic Limit % Plasticity Index Passing #200, 0/41st SPT, No. of Blows per G' 2nd 3rd Remarics TS Sandy an ay w/organics, Brown CL 5.3 25 16 9 59.8 2*5 Sandy Lean Clay, Strong Brown CL 12.1 5 5 5 5. Lean Clay w/sand, Reddish Yellow CL 10.7 27 13 14 72.0 3 3 5. I 10 Sandy Lean Clay w/trace of caliche, CL 11.0 4 9 21 Yellowish Red 15 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Pink SC 9.9 34 17 17 28.9 5 12 *25 *5.0" Penetration 20 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Yellowish Red SC 10.6 5 9 *25 *4.5" Penetration 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, iNc. TEST HOLE NO. 11 BORING LOG Project: ---- Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center s Location:—ocation: Rtfle.4angf� Date of Drilling: 08-10-00 Client: City of Lubbock Depth of GWT: V Surface Elevation: Unknown Diameter: 17 7/8" Depth: 120' Boring Method: STR No.: IHSA 1 1458 ft Depth, I Description USC Moisture Content,% Liquid Limit,% Plastic I Limit, %I Plasticity I Index 1 passing 0 200,% SPT, No.. of Blows per 6'R---a�kfl 1st 2nd 3rd TS Sandy Lean Clay w/organics, Brown CL 4.3 2.5 5 Sandy Lean Clay, Light Brown CL 14.9 32 14 18 64.5 3 4 5 10 Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow Sandy Lean Clay, Reddish Yellow CL CL 13.7 15.3 40 18 22 60.7 3 6 4 13 5 16 15 Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 14.3 37 17 20 42.2 7 10 14 20 --1 Clayey Sand w/caliche, Yellowish Red SC 13.9 12 6 8 25 30 35 — 40 45 TS- Top Soil 50 - - TERRA ENGINFEKbr Inc. BORING LOG f LEST HOLE NO. 12 Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range — Reese Center Rifle Range 08-IMO Client: Depth of GWT: —L Cityof Lubbock -- ---- _ Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: STR No.: Unknown 7 7/8" 20' IHSA 1458 Depth, ft. Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit, °/u Plastic Limit, % Plasticity Index Passing #200, % SPT, No. of Blows per 6" Ist 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC 3.8 2.5 Sandy Lean Clay, Strong Brown CL 17.6 4 5 6 5 Lean Clay w/sand, Strong Brown CL 14.8 29 13 16 72.1 2 1 1 10 Sandy Lean Clay, Yellowish Red CL 14.9 10 21 20 I 15 Clayey Sand, Yellowish Red SC 14.0 36 18 18 38.3 .6 9 13 20 Clayey Sand, Pink SC 12.6 35 15 20 44.2 7 14 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 — TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. TS- Top Soil P BORING LOG TFIRT NnT,F. NO- 13 y sit P" Project: Location: Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range— Reese Center. Parking Lot :, , , - 08-10-00 Client: Depth of GWT: —L City of Lubbock Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: Boring Method: IHSA STR No.: Unknown 7 '7/8" 5' 1458 :7= Depth, It Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit, 1/9 Plastic Limit, NO Plasticity Index Passing 0200, % SPT, No. of Blows per 6" Ist 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Clayey Sand w/organics, Brown SC 3.7 2.5 Lean Clay w/sand, Brown CL 11.9 33 14 19 70.4 4 4 6 5 an Clay w/sand, Light Brown CL 11.7 28 14 14 79.5 3 7 10 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 . TS- Top Soil TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. BORING LOG TEST HOLE NO. 14 Project: Location: I Date of Drilling: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range — Reese Center Parking Lot 08-10-00 Client: Depth of GWT: s_ City of Lubbock - --- Surface Elevation: Diameter: Depth: 1 Boring Method: IHSA STR No.: Unknown 7 718" 5' 1458 Depth, ft Description USC Moisture Content, % Liquid Limit, % Plastic Limit, % Plasticity Index Passing # 200, % SPT, No. of Blows per 6 1st 2nd 3rd Remarks TS Sandy Lean Clay w/organics, Brown CL 4.8 23 15 8 55.5 2.5 Sandy Lean Clay, Strong Brown CL 15.6 2 3 4 5 �;an Clay w/sand, Reddish Yellow CL 13.9 30 13 17 71.7 2 4 6 TERRA ENGINEERS, I'NC'.'* 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 1 - Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 • Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5062 Bore hole 9: 4 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 2.5-3.0 Date tested: 08-14-2000 Description of soil: Brown sandy lean clay 'Tested by: Abraham Benchamin TEST PARAMETERS sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.6 Applied confining pr., psi- 8 Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 77 100 90 80 70 60 U) CL 50 40 30 20 10 0 ---- ------ - 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Strain, in/in /Quality Review/]Date DATRIAXIALTilesN1458-5062.doc SOIL INVESTIGATION • MATERIAL TESTING • ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES '- "P"ROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES NDT s ::. TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208-34THSTREET P.O. BOX 16605 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX"(806)a793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 2 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5062A Bore hole #: 4 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 3.0 — 3.5 Date tested: 08-14-2000 Description of soil: Brown sandy lean clay Tested by: Abraham Benchamin TEST PARAMETERS Dia. of sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.6 Applied confining pr., psi: 15 Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 100 90 80 70 60 Q N 50 d L .F+ 40 30 20 10 0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Strain, in/in Quality Review/Date D:ITRIAXIAUFiles\14 58.5062A.doc SOIL INVESTIGATION • MATERIAL TESTING • ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES • PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES • NDT W .Y TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 3 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5064 Bore hole #: 11 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 1.5 — 2.0 Date tested: 08-14-2000 Description of soil: Light brown sandy lean clay Tested by: Abraham Benchamin TEST PARAMETERS Dia. of sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.64 Applied confining pr., psi: 8 Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 100 90 80 70 60 0 CL y 50 d L �4+ (n 40 30 TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 4 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Proj ect/STR No.: 1458 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5064A Bore hole #: 11 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 2.0-2.5 Date tested: 08-14-2000 Description of soil: Light brown sandy lean clay Tested by: Abraham Benchamin TEST PARAMETERS 15 Dia. of sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.62 Applied confining pr., psi: Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 100 90 80 70 60 50 (D 40 30 20 10 0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Strain, inlin AY IE- - /`% , ?- d v- D Quality Review/Date D AT RIAX IALTilesYl 4 58-5064A.doc SOIL INVESTIGATION - MATERIAL TESTING - ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES - PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES - NDT pox TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79496-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 5 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5065 Bore hole #: 12 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 1.5-2.0 Date tested: 08-14-2000 Description of soil: Strong brown sandy lean clay Tested by: Abraham Benchamin TEST PARAMETERS sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.64 Applied confining pr., psi: 8 Triaxtal Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 100 90 80 70 60 CL 50 Cn 40 30 20 10 0 0 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 Strain, in/in Quality Review/Date DATR1MAL\Fi1es\1458-5065Aoc SOIL INVESTIGATION - MATERIAL TESTING - ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES - PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES - NDT g TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 793-4768 ATTACHMENT - 6 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-16-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Reese Center, Lubbock Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5065A Bore hole #: 12 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 Sampling depth, ft.: 2.0 — 2.5 Date tested.: 08-14-2000 n.-crrintinn of mile Stronp, brown sandv lean clay Tested bv: Abraham Benchamin _ Dia. of sample, in.: 2.8 Ht. of sample, in.: 5.59 Applied confining pr., psi: 15 Triaxial Test (unconsolidated and undrained) 100 90 80 70 60 N 50 d L 40 30 20 10 0 i i 1 I i I . .......... 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 - Strain, in/in Quality Review/Date D:\TRIAXIAL\Files\1458-5065A.doc '•"'r T7�+Q�yr+.y� Qp,Axr;-QIAI TP;CTtNfC-- FARAPMIKAMOTAI ccovfrcc Donc-cc1nKIA1 Qr-0%A!'.FC NDT '-" TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 52oa-s4rHSTREET .r..,,- P.O. BOX 16605 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 • (806) 793-4767 . FAX(806) 793-4768 Client: City of Lubbock Date of Report: 08-15-2000 Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range Project No.: STR 1458 Description Brown sandy lean clay Invoice No.: 22703 of sample: Sample No.: 5059 Location of Bore Hole #14 Date of Sample: 08-10-2000 sample: Date tested: 08-14-2000 Method: AST-698 ® ASTM D-1557 ❑ Tested by: Abraham Benchamin Procedure: A LXJ B ❑ C ❑ SOIL MOISTURE DENSITY RELATIONS General test parameters Soil seive data Sample preparation: Moist ® Dry ❑ % Retained'/d-in 0.00 Type of rammer: Mechanical (Z Manual ❑ % Retained 3/8-in. 0.00 Specific gravity: Actual ❑ Estimated ® % Retained #4 0.00 Maximum Dry Density, pcf = 109.9 Optimum Moisture, % = 13.8 115 1 5 10 15 20 Moisture Content (%) Quality Review This report is for the sole use of the client addressed. The toe of our company name must receive prior mitten consent. It applies only to the sample tested. and does not necessarily represent identical or similar sample. D9PROC TOMFileslST Rl1458- 5059. fbc SOIL INVESTIGATION • MATERIAL TESTING ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES • PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING SERVICES NDT TERRA ENGINEERS, INC. 5208 - 34TH STREET P.O. BOX 16605 • LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79490-6605 - (806) 793-4767 FAX (806) 79.3-4768 ATTACHMENT-8 Client: Office of Facility Engineering, City of Lubbock Project: Lubbock Police Academy Firing Range, Lubbock Bore hole #: 14 1. Date of Report: 08-22-2000 Project/STR No.: 1458 Invoice No.: 22703 Sample No.: 5059 Date of Sample: 08-07-2000 ,a_ a CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: LUBBOCK POLICE ACADEMY SMALL ARMS RANGE FACILITY ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS .P, BID NUMBER: 00-228 PROJECT NUMBER: 9151.8304 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT SECTION 01100 — SUMMARY PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions. and other Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of all labor, supervision, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with all work to construct a handgun range and a rifle range with associated fencing, berms, target system and control booths, and a support building with toilet facilities. Sitework includes clearing, grubbing, grading, electrical service to the buildings, septic system, and concrete flatwork. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated August 30, 2000, were prepared for the Project by Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc., 3535 Travis Street, Suite 250, Dallas, Texas 75204. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES A. Furnish & Provide 1. Labor, materials and equipment. 2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery. 3. Water, heat and utilities required for construction. 4. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the work. B. Secure and pay for proper execution and completion of work as necessary, and as applicable at the time of receipt of bids: _1. Permits 2. Government fees 3. Licenses C. Give required notices. D. Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other legal require- ments of public authorities which bear on performance of work. E. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract Docu- ments from legal requirements. It is not Contractor's responsibility to make certain that drawings and specifications comply with codes and regulations. LU13BOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01100 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUMMARY F. Contractor shall verify all conditions at the site and dimensions in the field prior to starting work. Architect shall be notified in writing of any discrepancies found. G. The Drawing and Specifications represent the work to be completed not the method of construction. However, the Contractor shall perform all demolition and remedial work in a sequence to where any interruption of the operation of the facilities or utility service occurs at an absolute minimum. H. A work schedule shall be submitted to and approved by Owner and Architect prior to commencing work. This schedule shall be updated monthly and submitted in conjunction with the Application for Payment. I. Contractor shall use every precaution to prevent damage to roads, landscape, adja- cent property, building and utilities above and below ground that are adjacent to or included in the area under contract. The Contractor shall repair and replace, at his expense, any material or building affected, damaged or destroyed because of his op- erations or work. 1.04 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: Owner will award a separate contract for installation of a water well at Project site. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. 1.05 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSUCSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Con- sult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Con- tract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense re- quires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Docu- ments indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language may be used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Con- tractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01100 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUMMARY Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indi- rectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon () is used within a sentence or phrase. C. Description: 1. Extent of work required includes, but is not limited to, the scope indicated. 2. Provide all items, articles and materials listed, mentioned, or scheduled on the Drawings or in the Specifications and related Construction Documents, in- cluding all labor, materials, equipment, and incidents necessary and required for their completion, as reasonably implied. D. References: 1. Obtain and conform to manufacturer's directions for installation, connection and/or erection of all manufactured articles, materials and equipment. 2. Conform to applicable portion of listed reference standards as minimum re- quirements. 3. References to standard specifications shall mean to the latest edition of such specifications, including all revisions thereto. 4. The applicable issues of the publications listed, but referred to thereafter by ba- sic designation only, form a part of the specifications to the extent indicated by reference thereto. 5. Maintain copies of all references at job site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01100 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01100 - 3 SUMMARY 010 SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY - A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 2. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or re- vised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not con- sider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the pro- posed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If re- quested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01250 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity du- ration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifica- tions to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Con- tract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the ef- fect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float be- fore requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for prod- uct or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.05 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.06 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Direc- tive on AIA Document G714.. Construction. Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work re- quired by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01250 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES AEI PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. • END OF SECTION 01250 F k.. J 6 a LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01250 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES r• SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL A% 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple - wok mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Con- tract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.04 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insur- ance, overhead, and profit. Taxes are excluded from all pricing. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work -in -place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01270 - 1 UNIT PRICES PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01270 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01270 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 UNIT PRICES SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to pre- pare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construc- tion Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administra- tive forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Appli- cations for Payment. 3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01290 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAYMENT PROCEDURES B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to estab- lish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indi- cate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one -hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate con- tinued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordi- nate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on -site and items stored off -site. In- clude evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of mate- rials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work -in -place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Con- tractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01290 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substan- tial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional re- quirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work cov- ered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. r C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Con- struction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives is- sued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, and suppliers for con- struction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waiv- ers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the ,jWjQat1Qp WllV is lawfihlly entitled to a lien G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the fol- lowing: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. -- 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. -" 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially com- plete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion is- sued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. - 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01290 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAYMENT PROCEDURES ,0 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01290 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01290 - 5 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division l Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction op- erations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination Drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of re- sponsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that de- pend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with opera- tions, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installa- tion, connection, and operation. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01310 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best re- sults where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to en- sure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installa- tion. C. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required no- tices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. -� 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordina- tion of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required adminis- trative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contrac- tors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such adminis- trative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1, Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities. to ensure that operations are car- ried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1: Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. 1.04 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS A. Any discrepancy in the documents shall be interpreted to include the most restric- tive or costly solution. In case of discrepancy either in figures or Drawings or Specifications, the matter must be promptly submitted by the Contractor to the Ar- chitect, who will promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination by the Architect will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. The Architect will furnish, as necessary, additional detailed Drawings and information for clarification. B. If a document discrepancy is identified prior to bidding, the Architect is to be noti- fied so a written clarification may be issued. C. Any survey drawing documents included herein are for convenience of the Con- tractor and Owner. The Architect assumes no responsibility as to their complete- ness or accuracy. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01310 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Pow 0*4 D. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, is of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. E. On any of the Drawings in which a portion of the work is detailed or drawn out and the remainder is shown in outline, the parts detailed or drawn out will apply also to all other like portions of the work. F. When the word "similar" appears on Drawings, it has a general meaning and must not be interpreted as meaning identical. All details must be worked out in relation to their location and connection with other parts of the work. G. Refer to Architectural Drawings for verification of locations, sizes and dimensions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS } A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availabil- ity necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. w 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Co- ordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. t - B. Staff Names: Submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site with the bid proposal. Within 15 days of starting construction operations, identify individuals and their duties and re- sponsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individu- als assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. 7011 1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and su- pervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.07 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless g9peral nroeress meeting each month_ Ren»ire each entity then invnlved in nlan- ning, coordination or performance of work to be properly represented at each meeting. Review each entity's present and future needs, including interface re- quirements, time, sequences, deliveries, access, site utilization, temporary facilities and services, hours of work, hazards and risks, housekeeping, and documentation of information for payment requests. Discuss whether each element of current work is ahead of schedule, on time, or behind time in relation with updated progress sched- ule. Determine how behind -time work will be expedited, and secure commitments -� from entities involved in doing so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current work and subsequent work will be completed within Contract Time. Review everything of significance which could affect progress of the work. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Ar- chitect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited at- tendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another = convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consult- ants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All partici- pants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to con- clude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing. d. Designation of responsible personnel. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Submittal procedures. i. Preparation of Record Documents. j. Use of the premises. k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 1. Parking availability. m. Office, work, and storage areas. n. Equipment deliveries and priorities. o. First aid. p. Security. C. t_ Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site be- fore each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators in- volved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the fol- lowing: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related Change Orders. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Review of mockups. h. Possible conflicts. i. Compatibility problems. j. Time schedules. k. Weather limitations. 1. Manufacturer's written recommendations. in. Warranty requirements. n. ` Compatibility of materials. o. Acceptability of substrates. p. Temporary facilities and controls. q. Space and access limitations. S. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. U. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. 4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully con- cluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to per- formance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meet- ing. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's, Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off -site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders. 14) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have._been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01310 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01310 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUC TON PROORESS�DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY ,.. A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the fol- lowing: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. P 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. 8. Construction photographs. r B. Related Sections_ include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment' Procedures" for `submitting the Schedule of Val- ues. 2, Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and re- ports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic nega- tives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ,.., A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following in- formation in a tabular format: LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and, title. _ 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies; one a single sheet of reproducible media, and one a print. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one on reproducible media and one a print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. E. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view with Ap- plication for Payment. 1. Format: 4 x 6 smooth -surface glossy prints on single -weight commercial - grade stock, enclosed in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3- ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber- stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. �- f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 3. Negatives: Submit a complete set of photographic negatives in protective en- velopes as a Project Record Document. Identify date photographs were taken. F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. G. Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals. H. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing con- ditions. I. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM schedul- ing and reporting. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with re- quirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1.05 methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Con- tractor's Construction Schedule, in'cluditg, but not limited to, the following: l . Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner -furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and in- specting agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. COORDINATION_, A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. ' C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resub- mittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early be- cause of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. -- a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, un- less specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate ac- tivities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal — review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative pro- cedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work per- formed by Owner. 3. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 4. Owner -Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. In- clude delivery date indicated in Division 1 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. ° g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 6. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. C. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 7. Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to pro- vide for the following: a. Structural completion. R b. Permanent spaceenclosure. C. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicat- ing planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work per- formed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. G. Contract Modifications; For each proposed contract` modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. H. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01320 - 5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION W 2.03 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Prepara- tion: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first work- day of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the re- mainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activi- ties. 2.04 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt - chart -type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indi- cate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.05 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the fol- lowing information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 3. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 4. Accidents. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 7. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 8. Meter readings and similar recordings. 9. Emergency procedures. 10. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Change Orders received and implemented. 12. Construction Change Directives received. 13. Services connected and disconnected. 14. Equipment or system tests and startups. 15. Partial Completions and occupancies. 16. Substantial Completions authorized. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to acid stored at`'Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fab- ricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information on CSI Form 13.2A or form approved by Architect.. In- clude a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommenda- tions for changing the Contract Documents. 2.06 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature oc- curs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contrac- tor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 - EXECUTION M 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update sched- ule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revi- sions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, . but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each ac- tivity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Con- tractorwith a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Format: 35 mm, color print film, 4 x b prints. B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take twelve color pho- tographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions adjacent to property. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs monthly, coin- ciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photogra- pher shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect. 2. Provide two (2) sets of photographs to Architect with each Application for Payment. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Ar- chitect will direct photographer for desired vantage points. END OF SECTION 01320 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01320 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION I Advancement of Construction f- Technology REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION Project: R.F.I. Number: From: To: Date: AIE Project Number: Re: Contract For: Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Request: Signed by: Response: .r a.� ❑ Attachments Response From: To: Date Rec'd: Signed by: :r Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ Copyright 1994, Construction Specifications Institute, Page of 601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 Detail: Date: Date Ret'd: Date: ❑ ❑ File July 1994 CSI Form 13.2A SECTION 01330- SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ""' PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. _ 1.02 SUMMARY A. I This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction photographs. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated -Design Submittals and for erecting mockups. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's re- sponsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's ap- proval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES P" A. Contractor's responsibilities: 1. Contractor shall thoroughly check shop drawings, project data and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and list variances prior to submission. 2. Contractor represents by approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples that he has or will coordinate and verify dimensions, all materials, field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers and LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES similar data with requirements of work and of Contract Documents prior to submitting. 3. Submittals shall bear Contractor's stamp certifying that they have been checked. - 4. Contractor's responsibility for deviations or errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect/ Engineer review of submittals, unless Architect/ Engineer gives specific written acceptance of specific deviations. 5. Do not proceed with purchasing, fabrication or delivery of work which re- quires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Engineer stamp and initials or signature evidencing final review and approval of submittals. 6. Contractor is responsible for dimensions at job site, quantities, coordinating component parts and trades to effect unified construction and implement con- struction techniques, safety of incremental units, and satisfactory performance of work in accordance with Contract Documents. 7. Delays caused by failure of Contractor to check shop drawings and to stamp with this approval shall be Contractor's responsibility. 8. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of work to avoid delays. 9. No extension of time shall be allowed because of failure to properly coordi- nate and sequence submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with perform- onr.P of rnnstruction activities. , ,.-______ _4U__ NEW r� 1 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to r. transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identifi- cation. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Archi- tect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken; a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Revise first subparagraph below to suit Project and office practice. See Evaluations. �. i. Unique identifier, including revision number, using Architect's submittal logging system. j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. *s k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. ..., F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using CSI Form 12.1A or other transmittal form approved by Architect. Architect will return submittals, without review, re- ceived from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by r, Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as neces- sary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specifica- tion Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect all information required into a single submittal for each ele- ment of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are ap- plicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. 1. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. in. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES roll C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or stan- dard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. .- k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field - installed wiring. 3. 'Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I I inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and two blue- or black -line prints of each submittal. Architect will return the �^ reproducible print and one marked up print for Project Records. 5. Retain the one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. -- D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full -.size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for '^ use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Sam- ples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manu- factured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; com- plete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and in- spection. 4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to fa- cilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Sample source. 5. Additional Information: On an attached_ separate sheet, prepared on Contrac- tor's letterhead, provide the following: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. d. Delivery time. 6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as deliv- ered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit two full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one set of submittal with options selected. 8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrica- tion techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associ- ated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in indi- vidual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following informa- tion in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. F. Delegated -Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Sec- tion "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. H. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construc- tion Progress Documentation." I. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Pay- ment Procedures." J. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." K. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms pro- posed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 2.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specifica- tion Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise in- dicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Sec- tion "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other in- formation specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certi- fying that product complies with requirements. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specifi- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 7 ,,,g AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES cation (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certi- fying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certi- fying that material complies with requirements. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests per- formed before installation of product, for compliance with performance require- ments. K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibil- ity tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on com- prehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organi- zation acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for op- eration and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with require- ments in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and cal- culations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and ver- sion of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that docu- ments manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and r- telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory - authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service represen- tative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. ... 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. a 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. ,., S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insur- ance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Con- struction Progress Documentation." U. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no ac- tion taken. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 9 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submit- ting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and num- ber, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Con- tract Documents. 3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each sub- mittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. No exceptions taken. 2. Make corrections as noted. 3. Revise and resubmit. 4. Rejected. 5. Other. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01330 - 10 AUGUST 30, 2000 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Advancement of Construction Technology Project: P, TRANSMITTAL To (Contractor): SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Date: A/E Project Number: Date: Submittal No. .k SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.. _ Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- i � i C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materi- als. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demon- strate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Sam- ples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifica- tions by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Con- tract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific perform- ance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification re- quired, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: 1. Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the follow- ing: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01400 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service. D. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. "~ 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. b. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work com- plies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. E. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, no- tices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service perform- ance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized repre- sentative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and ex- tent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally quali- fied to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01400 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS r". providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are de- fined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those opera- tions. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be en- gaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade -union jurisdic- tional settlements and similar conventions. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Docu- ments. H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mock- ups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as di- rected by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. , . 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's. approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a stan- dard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.08 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these serv- ices. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and in- specting they are engaged to perform. -- 2. Payment for these services will be made from ,testing and inspecting allow- ances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessi- tated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01400 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS AR B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Con- - I HI v � ��i- _ _ { HLa 3 � II—! " PYi -- _ i 1-4 ! f Eta� i 3 it UP i it R-_t 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Docu- ments or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspec- tions, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assign- ment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and. facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field -curing of test samples. 5. Delete first subparagraph below if not required or common practice in Project vicinity. 6. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 7. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require con- trol by testing agency. 8. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality - assurance and quality -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid neces- sity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. I. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore, substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates_ evidence_ of patching. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01400 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2. Retain subparagraph above or below. Above is for simple projects that do not include a "Cutting and Patching" Section and relies on patching and repair materials being the same as for new construction. 3. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01400 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 01400 - 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Advancement ..+n of Construction Technology Project: Date: A/E Project Number: SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL TRANSMITTAL To (Contractor): Date: Submittal No. AFrom (Subcontractor): By. ❑ Resubmission Qty- Reference / Title / Description / Spec. Section Title and Paragraph / Number Manufacturer Drawing Detail Reference ❑ Submitted for review and approval ❑ Resubmitted for review and approval ❑ Complies with contract requirements ❑ Will be available to meet construction schedule ❑ A/E review time included in construction schedule Other remarks on above submission: TRANSMITTAL To (A/E): BFrom (Contractor): ❑ Approved ❑ Approved as noted Other remarks on above submission: ❑ Substitution involved - Substitution request attached ❑ If substitution involved, submission includes point -by -point comparative data or preliminary details ❑ Items included in submission will be ordered immediately upon receipt of approval ❑ One copy retained by sender Attn: Date Reed by Contractor: By: Date Tmsmfd by Contractor. ❑ Revise / Resubmit ❑ Rejected / Resubmit ❑ One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To (Contractor): Attn: Date Reed. by A/E: C From (A/E): ❑ Other By: Date Tmsmt'd by A/E: ❑ Approved ❑ Provide file copy with corrections identified ❑ Approved as noted ❑ Sepia copies only returned ❑ Not subject to review ❑ No action required ❑ Point -by -point comparative data required ❑ Revise / Resubmit to complete approval process ❑ Rejected / Resubmit ❑ Approved as noted / Resubmit ❑ Submission Incomplete / Resubmit Other remarks on above submission: ❑ One copy retained by sender TRANSMITTAL To (Subcontractor): Attn: Date Reed by Contractor: DFrom (Contractor): By: Date Tmsmfd by Contractor: °" Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ One copy retained by sender Copyright 1996, Construction Specifications Institute, Page of September 1996 106 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791 CS1 Form 12.1A W SECTION 01420 — RFRVRVNC FC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec-tion. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties r,C. "Directed": Terms. such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, ap- proved, "required, and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Ar- chitect, and similar phrases. D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the user locate the reference. struction operation, including installation,' erection, application, and similar opera- tions. J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully com- pleted a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with re- quirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction ac- tivities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corre- sponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that re- quirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The ex- tent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent ref- erenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer un- certainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these re- quirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropri- at e, for the context of requirements, Refer uncertainties to Architect for a de- cision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be fa- miliar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of ap- plicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. - 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction ac- tivity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." or the recognized name of the entities as found on the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org r" AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers_ (216) 241-7333 www.taol.com/aaadm AABC " Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AAN American Association of Nurserymen (See ANLA) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 (The) www,aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 429-5155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org ^� AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 �+ www.aga.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 www.ahardbd.org LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (606) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (202) 626-7300 www.aiaonline.org AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction r (303) 792-9559 ALA American Laminators Association (See LMA) ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association (202) 789-2900 (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (212) 642-4900 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (402) 476-3852 www.zianet.com/AOSA APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (941) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (856) 848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.aice.org (703) 295-6300 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES P" ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air -Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org _ _ (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 661-4261 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CCFSS Center for Cold -Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 www.umr.edu/—ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-720C CEA Canadian Electricity Association (The) (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca W LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.taol.com/cffa CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 412-0900 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819) 956-0425 www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2584 www.chainlinkinfo.com (under construction) CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 Division of Plastics Pipe Institute (419) 241-2221 www.cppa-info.org CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 -- www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (216) 524-4990 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) Division of Canadian Standards Association www.iasapprovals.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 462-8961 www.cedarbureau.org /nOl \ CO7 AAO'7 I r i I (, I www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com (770) 968-7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) r� FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) f GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana .. GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (610) 522-8440 www.drexel.edu/gri GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 (973)267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 Division of Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association www.gamanet.org _ HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers r-* (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 IAS International Approval Services (See CSA International) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (508) 394-4424 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute (703) 450-0116 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 4122 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (The) (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 938-7444 www.igcc.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com IRI HSB Industrial Risk Insurers (800) 520-7300 www.industrialrisk.com (860) 520-7300 ITS Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute (972) 625-4560 www.loseke.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 (Formerly: ALA - American Laminators Association) www.Ima.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (614) 228-6194 www.marble-institute.com LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES r-v ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry, Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 (The) www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 NAPM National Association of Photographic Manufacturers (See PIMA) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (414) 248-9094 www.nfpi.org NCTA National Cable Television Association (202) 775-3669 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.electricnet.com/neta NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 9 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-6372 www.nfrc.org _ NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (901) 377-1818 www.natlhardwood.org NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NPA National Particleboard Association (See CPA) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 r11?,ANOA ATofjo nl T?a r1,, A4ivPrl ("'.nncretP Accnrintinn (301) 597-1400 NSA National Stone Association (800) 342-1415 www.aggregates.org (202) 342-1100 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org _ NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (703) 779-1022 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute/Technology Program (217) 333-3929 University of Illinois -Urbana Champaign RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections c/o AISC www.boltcouncil.org „., RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (Contact by mail only) RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 Division of the California Redwood Association (415) 382-0662 www.calredwood.org RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (800) 220-7620 www.rma.org (202) 682-4800 SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org (724) 776-4960 (publica- tions) SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org rb+ SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (843) 689-6878 www.sefalabfum.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 938-7444 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 r� SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (202) 974-5200 www.plasticsindustry.org r— SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. e-� Spray Polyurethane Foam Division (See SPI) r-a SPRI SPRI (781) 444-0242 (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 11 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES re SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (312) 456-5590 (Formerly: ML/SFA - Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspe.org (412) 281-2331 — STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TPI Truss Plate Institute (608)'833-5900 TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council (336) 885-5065 www.ufac.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 //members.aol.com/unibell USG United States Gypsum Company (800) 874-4968 A Subsidiary of USG Corporation (312) 606-4000 www.usg.com USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.culturenet.ca/usitt (315) 463-6463 USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 822-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) 661-4261 (Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 12 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association , (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Asso- (847) 299-5200 ciation) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org F. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acro- nyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and n up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) (909) 595-8449 ^` www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.inticode.org G. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Federal Government Agencies: Where abbrevia- tions and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, tele- phone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers (601) 634-2355 CRD Standards CFR Code of Federal Regulations (202) 512-1800 www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 DOD Specifications and Standards //astimage.daps. dla.mil/online EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 13 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 Department of Transportation — www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 418-0190 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov - FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (Available from DOD, GSA, and NIBS) FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov (202) 619-8925 (Federal Specifications) _ HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 401-0388 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-5605 www.lbl.gov MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (See DOD) NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-2000 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (202) 219-5000 (See CFR 29) www.osha.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2933 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-8732 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.gov LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 14 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES H. Abbreviations and Acronyms for State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accu- rate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CAPUC State of California, Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (916) 574-2041 Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation www.dca.ca.gov/r—rlhomeftirn.htm " TFS Texas Forest Service (409) 639-8180 Forest Products Laboratory //txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 01420 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01420 - 15 AUGUST 30, 2000 REFERENCES .. SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Water service and distribution. ., 3. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water facili- ties. 4. Heating and cooling facilities. 5. Ventilation. 6. Electric power service. p 7. Lighting. 8. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Temporary roads and paving. 2. Dewatering facilities and drains. 3. Project identification and temporary signs. 4. Waste disposal facilities. 5. Field offices. 6. Storage and fabrication sheds. P" 7. Lifts and hoists. 8. Temporary elevator usage. 9. Temporary stairs. 10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. P" 4. Pest control. 5. Site enclosure fence. 6. Security enclosure and lockup. IWO LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 7. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 8. Covered walkways. 9. Temporary enclosures. 10. Temporary partitions. 11. Fire protection. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning require- ments. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity require- ments for products in those Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weather - tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial tempo- rary closures. 1.04 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the fol- lowing: 1. Owner's maintenance personnel. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and un- ion jurisdictions. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regula- tions for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and in- spect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's ac- ceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in service- able condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 0.148-inch- (3.76-mm-) thick, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with gal- vanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8- inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top rails. C. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain -link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD Omit corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. D. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Carpen- try.91 E. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular -type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS F. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively, G. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." H. Tarpaulins: Fire -resistive labeled with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. I. Water: Potable. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable win- dows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extin- guishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. D. Self -Contained Toilet Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recircula- tion, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced poly- ester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. E. Drinking -Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap -dispenser, bottled -water drinking - water units, including paper cup supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dis- pensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg C). F. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individ- ual space thermostatic control 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander - type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authori- ties having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. G. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent inser- tion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher -voltage outlets; equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. H. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as re- quired. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are re- placed by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION �-• A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company rec- ommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked -in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. 4. Water Service: Water is not available to serve the site or construction opera- tions. Contractor shall make arrangements to provide all water required for construction operations and sanitary facilities. R. _ Ssntary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets. wash facilities. and drinkine-water stalled construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on com- pleted installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently en- closed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by con- struction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. E. Electric Power Service: Contractor shall arrange. F. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio. 2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas. 4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection re- quirements without operating entire system. 2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. (45 sq. m), uniformly distributed, for general lighting, or equivalent illumination. 3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas. 4. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to illuminate each landing and flight. 5. Install exterior -yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. 6. Install lighting for Project identification sign. H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common -use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction ac- tivities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first -aid station. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and com- puter with Internet connection in the field office.. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide an answering machine, voice -mail service, or messaging service on superintendent's telephone. „�. 4. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device for use when away from field office. 5. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone calls when away from field office. 3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area .or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having juris- diction. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Divi- sion 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and con- struction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, pro- vide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construc- tion is completed. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. D. Project Identification and 'Temporary Signs:' Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior -type Grade B-B high -density concrete form over- lay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative -treated wood or steel. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior -grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazard- ous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section 'Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning require- ments. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on -site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. F. Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a daily basis for temporary of- fices, first -aid stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas. G. Common -Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 8 persons at Project site. Keep office clean and orderly. 1. Furnish and equip offices as follows: a. Desk and four chairs, four -drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. b. Water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine cabinet with mirror. C. Provide a room of not less than 200 sq. ft. (22.5 sq. m) for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 8 folding chairs, and 4- foot- (1.2-m-) square tack board. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 2. Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C). Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 deg F (23 deg Q. 3. Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot (4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room. H. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to ac- commodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on -site. 1. Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire -retardant -treated lumber and plywood. 2. Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior -grade acrylic -latex emulsion over exterior primer. I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that pro- duce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local ex- terminator or pest -control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest -control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended war- ranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code require- ments for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 9 AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. — 1. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8- inch- (16-mm-) thick exterior plywood. F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construc- t'-.,.. ,�. .�:.,..rr.nn nr`7 nrmnlol-od from fiYtlACl7rc f ..1 i.cotl.cr n41.cr nnne4rn1-inn1 L 3- 3.05 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Pro- tect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity con- trol, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent fa- cility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, re- move soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other pet- rochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used dur- ing construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Divi- sion 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01500 ..f LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01500 - 11 r*• AUGUST 30, 2000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of con- struction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Con- tractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include -- generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Sub- mittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for sched- uled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omis- sions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selec- tions and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, r� l' include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's, response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. .�, Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Speci- fication Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A or form approved by Ar- chitect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be pro- vided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by V Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate nrnnnced ciibgtitiitinn- ti - substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 working days of receipt of request, or 7 working days of receipt of additional information or documentation, which- ever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with prod- ucts previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's writ- ten instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. - 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterio- ration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Docu- ments and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or count- ing of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, hu- midity, ventilation, and weather -protection requirements for storage. 9. Protect stored products from damage. 1.07 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's dis- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01600 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ., claimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obliga- tions under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execu- tion. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific informa- tion and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and ,►�. particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Proce- dures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS fi A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been pro- duced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifi- cations establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term or equal", or approved equal'. or approved, or acceptable substitu- tion", comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain ap- proval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the fol- lowing: 1. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions maybe considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs ti- tled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, pro- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01600 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS vide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manu- facturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article. 8. Basis -of -Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis -of -Design Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a compa- rable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Speci- fications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Prod- ucts" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be fi- nal on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. .-10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified re- quirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will se- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01600 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Fda r lect color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items._ b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of col- ors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pat- tern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both stan- dard and premium items. 11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" pro- visions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for pro- cedures required for processing such selections. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Ar- chitect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, en- ergy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional respon- sibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may in- clude compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, in- creased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substi- tution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contrac- tors involved. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01600 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2.03 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and ad- dresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01600 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01600 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS f Advancement ofQors Technology SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (After the Bidding Phase) Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: A/E Project Number: Re: Contract For: a'^ Specification Title: Description: Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: P'+ Proposed Substitution: /+. Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone: History: ❑ New product ❑ 2-5 years old ❑ 5-10 yrs old ❑ More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: i M ❑ Point -by -point comparative data attached REQUIRED BY A/E r-e Reason for not providing specified item: SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REOUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL •* 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY R A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. �. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: �,. 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS r A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that lo- cation and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 — 1 .•a AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally quali- fied to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land -surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical sys- tems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 2. In the event of any inconsistency or conflict, between existing conditions and the bidding documents, immediate notice of such inconsistency or conflict shall be given to the Architect. Do not undertake any phase of the work af- fected by such inconsistency or conflict, pending the issuance of instructions by the Architect. B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of con- nection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and under- ground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for instal- lation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to per- formance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS rw 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing -in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and condi- tions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with '~ authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with con- struction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for informa- tion to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation" or form approved by Architect. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work pro- gresses. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 5, Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allow- able tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Elevations of existing grades, floors, tops of walls, parapets, beams and locations of existing columns, walls and the like are based on survey documents or on drawings of the existing building furnished by the Owner. The Architect assumes no respon- sibility for the accuracy of the information on existing drawings. It is the intent of the Contract Drawings to integrate new work with existing improvements and for the Contractor to verify actual conditions. E. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for struc- tures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more lo- cations. Follow Drawings as closely as possible for layout of the Work, however, Contractor under the direction of Architect, shall make any minor adjustments nec- essary to meet special conditions, at no additional cost to the Owner. Where a ma- jor digression from the drawings is suggested, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Architect indicating desirability for change. F. Subcontractors shall verify with the General Contractor the exact field location of all rough -in dimensions, taking into account location of walls, partitions and equipment. Any cost in relocation of items due to that subcontractor's error, will be borne by him at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Where equipment involving more than one subcontractor is installed at a common location and no specific location has been determined, it is the Contractor's respon- sibility to check with the Architect for the actual rough -in dimensions for such equipment. If for some reason the rough -in has not been checked and a subcon- tractor has installed his equipment, remaining subcontractors shall align their equipment as closely as possible to the installed equipment. Alignment shall mean centered vertically, equally space and centered horizontally. This alignment applies to bells, alarms, thermostats, switches, handles, access panels, etc. Any items not installed in alignment shall be relocated by the Contractor at his own expense with damaged surfaces properly repaired. H. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from re- quired lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of in- struments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS e. POO 3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING POW- A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and prop- erty corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect perma- nent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent bench- marks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of (two) permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Re- cord Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, pro- vide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct r-- alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) or as indicated on -^ drawings in spaces without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for install- ing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible .. results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial R _ Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occu- pancy. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount compo- nents at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections to- gether to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.06 OWNER -INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work per- formed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform_ Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to sched- ule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at prein- stallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's con- struction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coor- dinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness nec- essary for proper execution oftlieork. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vac- uum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure free- dom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are per- formed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on -site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and j adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as neces- sary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate oper- able components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.08 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equip- ment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is re- quired to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division l Section "Quality Requirements." 3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is with- out damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative hu- midity. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patch- ing." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equip- ment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01700 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01700 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS """ PART 1 - GENERAL '^ 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations ap- plicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installa- tions. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or per- formance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 7* 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01731 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 CUTTING AND PATCHING 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or af- fect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforce- ment to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal be- fore cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require re- moval and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased 'maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire -protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following, elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased main- tenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. _ Membranes and flashinas. 3. Exterior curtain -wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration -control elements and systems. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01731 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CUTTING AND PATCHING e� 1.06 WARRANTY ^' A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifica- tions. B FY/Ctircr MntPrink- iicP mnte.rink identical to existing materials. For exposed sur- i � V j 1, �,, tent possible. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to re- store surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed proce- dures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommenda- tions. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Tempo- rarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Divi- sion 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or parti- tions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation re- quirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend fin- ish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one fin- ished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appear- ance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materi- als, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01731 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CUTTING AND PATCHING a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermedi- ate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire un- broken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores en- closure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION 01731 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01731 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Sec- tion. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. ,., 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Fi- nal Completion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning re- quirements for products of those Sections. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Sub- stantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agree- ments, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic nega- tives, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location desig- nated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Ad- vise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to elimi- nate visual defects. 0 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of un- fulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or cor- rected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous in- spections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.05 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. Main- tain and submit one copy of all transmittal letters for all Project Record Documents. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a." Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that can- not be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 51 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distin- guish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same loca- tion. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. - 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alter- nate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. — C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including ad- denda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product instal- lation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installa- tions that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materi- als, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options se- lected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where ap- plicable. D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installa- tions that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable. E. Record Samples: Submit one sample or set of samples if applicable of each Product sample submittal. 1. Record on transmittal manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, color and supplier. F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in con- nection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES r 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specifica- tion Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and week- end operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Servicing and lubrication schedule, including list of lubricants required. f. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. g. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. h. Original manufacturer's parts list, price lists, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance, predicted life of parts subject to wear and items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. i. Control diagrams by controls manufacturer. j. Coordination drawings and color coded piping diagrams. k. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve. 1. Final balancing reports for mechanical systems. in. Circuit directories of panel boards: Electrical service; controls and communications. n. Color coded wiring diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and meth- ods. e. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product. f. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine mainte- nance and cleaning. g. Maintenance record forms. h. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. i. Copies of maintenance service agreements. j. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data according to sequence of project specifications in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify n LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Sub- stantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of com- pletion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of con- tents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by- 11 -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate war- ranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed de- scription of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. E. Table of Contents: Neatly type in orderly sequence. Furnish complete instruction for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 6. Furnish information for Owner's personnel: Proper procedure in case of fail- ure and instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufac- turer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING '* A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed -on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner through Architect with at least seven days' ad- vance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual train- ing modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by in- dividual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning ob- jective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instruc- tions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even - textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. _ f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision - obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other dam- aged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily re- paired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical _ and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including _. stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean ex- posed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full — �.1 f-i r t D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 01770 9 AUGUST 30, 2000 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 7 SECTION 02230 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY �^ A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Remove paving, curbs and gutters. 1.02 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP FICA A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. C. Conform to applicable Texas Department of Health code for disposal of debris. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: As specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off -site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on -site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. �-A 02230 - 1 SITE CLEARING B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.02 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. B. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted. Arrange to provide temporary utility services. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch (200-mm) loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.04 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3.05 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. -- 3.06 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 02230 - 2 SITE CLEARING 02230 - 3 SITE CLEARING two SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades. 2. Excavating and backfilling. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off --site for use as fill or backfill. D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. i it ly. 1 F 1 1 1 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not - available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: Free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter, with PI between 7 and 12. C. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. D. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve. E. Detectable Warning Tape: Polyethylene film warning tape encasing a metallic core, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. B. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. D. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. B. Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to indicated elevations and dimensions. Extend excavations for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. C. Excavate utility trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and invert elevations of uniform 02300 - 2 EARTHWORK widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit. 1. Excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation, 6 inches (150 mm) deeper in rock, 4 inches (100 mm) deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. D. Proof roll subgrades, before filling or placing aggregate courses, with heavy pneumatic -tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or • saturated subgrades. E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities. F. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. G. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials, without intermixing, in shaped, - graded, drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations and outside drip line of remaining trees. 3.03 BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Utility Trench Backfill: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support for pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. 1. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 2. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. B. Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations. C. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. D. Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. E. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 02300 - 3 EARTHWORK inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mrn) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent. F. Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Grade lawns, walks, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) and pavements and areas within building lines to plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. Provide 1 compaction test for every 4,000 square feet of area per lift. C. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved deg ree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.05 PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. nri- SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.02 SUBMITTALS -rt A. Product Data: For each product indicated, including EPA -Registered Label. B. Product certificates. C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located. 00 B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TERMITE CONTROL A. Soil Treatment: EPA -registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having " jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin. b. American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department. 02361 - 1 TERMITE CONTROL C. Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care. d. DowElanco. e. FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties. f. Zeneca Professional Products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork; and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. 3.02 SOIL TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Apply soil treatment at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA -Registered Label. - 1. Mix termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. 2. Apply to produce a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal. barrier or treated zone around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 3. Slabs -on -Grade: Under ground -supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 4. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground -supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA -Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 02361 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02670 - NEW WATER WELL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) (Latest Version) ASTM A 48 Grey Iron Castings ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM B 124 Copper and Copper -Alloy Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM C 150 Portland Cement AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA-01 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater AWWA A100 Water Wells AWWA B300 Hypochlorites AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water'Pipe 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A" A. New Water Well Compensation for the water well will be made at the contract unit price or lump sum price on AMR each item, and shall include materials, equipment, and labor required to drill and develop by bailing. 1. Drilling Well - The total depth of the hole will be measured from the ground surface r to the bottom of the hole. 2. Casing and Well Screen - The actual amount of casing and well screen placed in the well will be measured in accordance with the specifications. 3. Gravel - The actual number of tons of gravel placed, in the well will be determined by weighing the gravel delivered to the well and decting therefrom the weight of any material not actually placed in the well. 02670 - 1 °,," NEW WATER WELL 4. Bailing Rig - Records will be kept of the actual number of hours for cleaning and developing the well by bailing with the bailing rig (not bailing with drilling rig). 5. Concrete Sealing Block and Slab - Unit price per each. 6. Cement Grout - The actual number of vertical feet of cement grout placed in the well will be measured from the ground surface to the top of the gravel pack. This price shall be complete compensation for furnishing the cement grout and providing the equipment to pump the grout as specified. 7. Final Cleanup - The Contractor shall make a final cleanup of all parts of the work before final acceptance of the work by the Owner. This cleanup shall include, among other things, removing all construction materials, final grading of all trench surfaces and construction sites, and in general preparing the site of the work in an orderly manner. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The wells shall be located as shown on the location map. Based on the available data, the wells will have the following characteristics: Well Depth to Well Screen Design Yield Diameter of No. "Red Bed" Length (gpm) Drilled Hole (feet) (feet) (inches) 1 160 40 25 9" 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Reports a. Tests - Reports shall be made within 48 hours following the conclusion of each test. 2. Records a. Water Well Driller and/or Pump Installer licenses or other requirements necessary for execution of the work. b. Driller's Log - Geological log and material setting report. c. Cementing certificate. d. Drillers High Speed bailing estimated yield. e. Gravel Sieve Analysis. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent contaminated water from entering the water supply stratum through the well bore or by seepage from the ground surface. The premises, materials, tools and drilling equipment shall be maintained so as to minimize contamination of the underground water during drilling operation. 02670 - 2 NEW WATER WELL N 0 Water used in any drilling operation shall be of safe sanitary quality. Water used in the mixing of drilling fluids or mud shall contain a chlorine residual of at least 0.5 mg/l. The slush pit (by Owner) shall be constructed and maintained so as to minimize contamination of the drilling mud. No temporary toilet facilities shall be maintained within 150 feet of the well being constructed unless they are of a sealed, leakproof type. PART 2 _ PRODUCTS 2.01 CASING All casing, screen, and other well materials shall be of compatible materials to prevent galvanic reaction between components of the completed well. Well construction materials containing more than 8 % lead are prohibited. A. Steel Casing and Couplings Steel casing shall be new welded or seamless steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A 53, Grade B or API 5L or approved equal. Joints shall be either threaded and coupled, or field welded in accordance with AWWA t206. 1. Dimensions: O.D. 5 inches Wall Thickness 0.250 inches 2.02 WELL SCREENS A. Well Screens shall be directly connected to the bottom of the casing by an approved method. The screen shall be of sufficient length and shall provide an intake area capable of passing not less than the continuous yield of the well at an entrance velocity not exceeding 0.1 fps. The opening size shall be compatible with the material surrounding the screen and shall be submitted for approval as part of the drilling plan. The well screen shall be of sufficient size and design to hold back and support the gravel used in the gravel envelope. The screen and all accessories required for satisfactory operation shall be essentially standard products of reliable manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. Field constructed screen is not acceptable. Dimensions: O.D. 5 inches B. Metal Screen Metal screen shall be of an approved wire -wound type with wire not less than No. 7 AWG and the supporting bars not less than 1 /4 -inch thickness. Both wire and supporting bars shall be stainless steel, conforming to the applicable requirements of FS QQ-S-763, Class 304, Condition A. The wire configuration must produce inlet slots with sharp outer edges, widening inwardly so as to minimize clogging. For maximum collapse strength, each junction between the horizontal wire and the vertical bars will be fusion welded under water by the electrical 02670 - 3 NEW WATER WELL resistance method. End fittings will be welded to the screen body. The well screen will be manufactured by Johnston Division VOP, St. Paul, Minnesota, or approved equal. A wire -wound screen manufactured with supported bars or core of material different from the wire will not be acceptable. Joints shall be made of threaded couplings of the same material as the screens or by brazing or welding in accordance with AWWA C206. 2.03 GRAVEL PACK Gravel pack shall be a product of a commercial gravel manufacturer, shall be properly sized and graded for the surrounding soil and water encountered, and shall be composed of well-rounded, in, D. Construction of Gravel Pack After the screen and casing have been concentrically set in the hole, the approved gravel pack shall be constructed around the screen by filling the entire space between the screen and the wall of the hole in the water bearing stratum with filter gravel. Gravel conductor pipe having an inside nominal diameter of not less than 2-1/2 inches shall be lowered to the bottom of the well between the hole and screen. Gravel conductor pipe shall be arranged and connected at the surface of the ground to water pumping and graveling equipment so that water and gravel fed at uniform rates are discharged as the gravel fills the hole from the bottom up. The gravel and water conductor shall be raised at a rate that will keep the bottom of the pipe between 3 feet above the gravel level at all times. If the Contractor desires to use methods of placing gravel other than those specified, he shall submit for approval, details of the method and equipment proposed, before gravel placing -� is begun; however, dumping filter gravel from the surface of the ground and agitating the well in an effort to settle the filter will not be allowed. The gravel pack shall be installed continuously and without interruption until the gravel has been placed to the top of the shallowest formation. ., Additional gravel shall be chlorinated and added to the well during the bailing and test pumping operations. Gravel shall be added into the annular space between the drilled hole and casing while the bailing is in operation and the level of the gravel shall be kept to within 2 feet of the top of the shallowest formation at all times. After bailing operations, sand shall be placed into the space between the hole and the inner casing to provide a two foot sand pack above the gravel. E. Grouting As soon as the sand pack has been placed, the annular space between the outside of the casing and the well hole shall be filled with a cement grout. The cement grout shall be mixed in an approved manner and shall be of such consistency that it can be easily placed so as to entirely fill the annular space and effectively seal the upper portion of the well against surface seepage. The grout shall be placed in the annular space through a 2" grout pipe which shall extend to the bottom of the annular space to be grouted and the end of the grout pipe shall remain submerged in grout during the entire time the grout is being placed. The grout shall be pumped into the grout pipe. When sufficient grout has been placed to fill the bottom five feet, the grouting operation shall be suspended for a period of two hours to allow the bottom five feet to partially set. After this two hour period, the grouting operations shall continue until the grout is brought to the ground surface. Equipment grout pump with pressure gauge to monitor pumping pressure. Pump shut off head must be greater than 10 psi. 3.02 WELL DEVELOPMENT TESTING A. Immediately after the casing and initial gravel pack have been set, the well shall be thoroughly cleaned to the bottom of the hole by development pumping; the pumping shall continue until all slush and sand have been removed from the well and the water formations have been cleaned as much as possible by this method. The amount of pumping time shall be determined by the Engineer. The sand pack and cement grout shall be added after pumping bailing is complete. 3.03 CONCRETE SLAB WELLHEAD Concrete slab shall be constructed so as to prohibit the infiltration of surface water or precipitation into the well. The slab shall be as detailed by the drawings and constructed of reinforced concrete. Concrete shall be made from Portland cement described in Section 03300. The top of pump foundation shall be given a smooth, neat finish a slope to drain away from well at not less than 0.25 inches per foot. Sides of foundation shall be rubbed to give a neat and uniform appearance. The top of the casing shall extend to the top of the slab. 02670 - 5 "° NEW WATER WELL 3.04 CLEAN-UP Upon completion of the well construction and other incidentals, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed from the jobsite. END OF SECTION 02670 02670 - 6 NEW WATER WELL SECTION 02673 - SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP PART GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The '^ publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) (Latest Version) ASTM A 48 Grey Iron Castings ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless ASTM B 124 Copper and Copper -Alloy Forging Rod, Bar, and Shapes ASTM C 150 Portland Cement AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) AWWA-01 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater AWWA A100 Water Wells AWWA B300 Hypochlorites AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Submersible Well Pump Compensation for the submersible well pump will be made at the contract unit price or lump sum price on each item as stated in the Bid Form (Section 00300), and shall include materials, equipment, and labor required to complete the permanent submersible well pump. 1. Pumping Unit - Payment for furnishing and installing the Pumping Unit, complete in accordance with the specifications shall be made at the unit price bid plus or minus any adjustments made in accordance with the Proposal. This price shall include all costs for furnishing and installing the equipment in accordance with the specifications. 2. Electrical - Payment for electrical will be made at the unit price bid for this item. This price shall include all costs for furnishing and installing the equipment in accordance with specifications. 3. Wellhead Improvements - Payment for all work involved in constructing the discharge pipeline to a distance of 10' outside the concrete foundation will be made at the unit price bid for this item. Payment includes all valves, pressure gauge, flow meter, sample cock, meter boxes, well enclosures and other appurtences shown on the drawings. 02673 - 1 SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP 4. Final Cleanup - The Contractor shall make a final cleanup of all parts of the work before final acceptance of the work by the Owner. This cleanup shall include, among other things, removing all construction materials, final grading of all trench surfaces and construction sites, and in general preparing the site of the work in an orderly manner. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The submersible well pumps shall consist of a submersible vertical turbine type pump, complete with motor, combination starter and entrance switch and appurtenances all in accordance with these specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: 1. Reports a. Tests - Reports shall be made within 48 hours following the conclusion of each test. 2. Records a. Water Well Driller and/or Pump Installer licenses or other requirements necessary for execution of the work. b. Driller's Log - Material setting report. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent contaminated water from entering the water supply stratum through the well bore or by seepage from the ground surface. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMERSIBLE PUMP Submersible pump shall be an approved submersible vertical turbine type. A. Operating Conditions: Well No. Design Yield Design Head (feet Casing (gpm) total dynamic Diameter head) (inches) 1 25 200 5 Minimum pump efficiency of 74 percent. Maximum allowable speed of 3460 rpm. The design of the pump shall be such that, when operating at heads of approximately 20 feet above or 20 feet below the rated head, the capacity of the pump will not vary by more than ten percent (10%) of the rated capacity. 02673 - 2 SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP r w_ B. Pump Construction PAK 1. Bowl Assembly - The intermediate bowls, and discharge adapter shall be flanged type constructed from close grained cast iron, and shall conform to ASTM designation A48, class 30. They shall be free from sand holes, blow holes, or other faults and must be accurately machined and fitted to close tolerances. The intermediate bowls shall have vitra glass lined waterways for maximum efficiency and wear protection. All intermediate bowls shall be of identical design for interchangeability. No special top bowl will be allowed. a. The discharge adapter shall be provided with a non -soluble grease packed bronze bearing, extending through the top bowl into and through the discharge adapter and topped with a threaded cast iron cap or plug to protect the bearing from abrasives. The adapter should be such that the bearing can be easily removed through the top of the ,.� adapter housing. b. The inlet motor adapter shall be a minimum of class 40 cast iron and shall contain a long SAE660 bronze bearing. The inlet area shall have a net open area of at least four times the eye of the impeller and shall be protected with a 304 stainless steel screen. c. A thrust ring shall be above the top impeller to prevent excessive vertical upthrust. d. The impellers shall be constructed from ASTM BS84 silicone bronze and shall be the enclosed or semi -open type. They shall be free from defects and must be accurately cast, machined, balanced, and filed for optimum performance and minimum vibration. Impellers are to be standard product of the pump manufacturer and not contain special workmanship to temporarily increase efficiency. They shall be securely fastened to the bowl shaft with taper locks of 316 stainless steel. e. The bowl shaft shall be constructed from ASTM A582 type 416 stainless steel. It shall be precision turned, ground and polished and shall be supported by water lubricated SAE660 bronze bearing, or fluted rubber bearings. f. The motor coupling shall be of stainless steel and shall conform to NEMA specifications and be capable of transmitting the total torque and total thrust of the bowl assembly in either direction of rotation. g. The pump shall be equipped with a check valve immediately above the pumping unit. C. Column Pipe The column pipe shall conform to American Standard tapered pipe thread specifications. Inside diameter of the pipe shall be such that the head losses shall not be over 5_feet per 100 feet of pipe. Pipe shall be connected with threaded sleeve type steel couplings. D. Submersible Cable 1. Pump cable shall be sized to limit the voltage drop to no more than 5 %. Three separate ;^ conductors and a ground shall be included in a single continuous jacketed assembly. 2. The insulation shall be water and oil resistant, and suitable for continuous immersion. The cable should be the length of the column pipe plus 25 feet to extend from the well plate to r7 the pump electrical controller. The cable should be adequately secured to the column pipe by plastic ties, or other non metallic means, at 10 foot intervals. E. Submersible Surface Plate The surface plate shall be of fabricated steel. It shall support the total weight of the motor, bowl assembly, column pipe, cable and column of water. The cable outlet shall have a cable seal of adequate size to accommodate the cable size. Threaded vent and drawdown holes shall be provided. 02673 - 3 �"' SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP F. Submersible Electric Motor 1. The motor shall be a heavy duty wet wound of NEMA design for 4", 6" and 8" motors. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation under water at the specified conditions outlined herein. A suitable thrust bearing shall be incorporated in the lower end of the motor adequate to receive the entire hydraulic thrust load of the pump unit plus the weight of the rotating parts regardless of the direction of rotation,. The motor_ shall have a 1.15 service factor. The thrust bearing shall have sufficient capacity to permit the pump to operate for short periods with the discharge valve closed. a. Electrical Operation: 460 Volts 3 Phase 60 Cycle 3,460 RPM 2. The motor leads shall be protected against the pump end with a 416 stainless steel cable guard held in place with stainless steel banding. As the motor lead exit the top of the cable guard it shall be properly protected to prevent damaging or cutting the lead by the cable guard material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PUMPING UNIT A. The Contractor shall install the pump and motor. The pump and motor shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and under the supervision of a representative of the company furnishing the equipment. B. After the equipment has been installed, it shall be checked for proper operation. As soon thereafter as possible, the Contractor will test the equipment for compliance with the guaranteed head, capacity and efficiency. After the equipment has satisfactorily met the guarantee as to head, capacity and efficiency, final payment will be made. 3.02 WELL DEVELOPMENT AND TESTING A. The Contractor will develop and test pump the well prior to installation of the permanent pump. B. After the permanent pump has been set, the Contractor will perform the capacity/draw down test. 3.03 DISINFECTING After installation of permanent pump, the Contractor will disinfect the well. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF LIQUID DISINFECTION SYSTEMS A. Provide one Wallace & Tiernan Premia Electronic Metering Pump or approved equal. Pump shall be wall or tank mount type. B. Pump Schedule - 1 gph at 100 psi. 02673 - 4 SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP C. Pump(s) shall be driven by a short -stroke solenoid energized by a variable rate do voltage. Movement of armature shaft with each stroke shall cause displacement of the diaphragm causing the discharge stroke. Diaphragm assembly shall be spring loaded causing the suction stroke upon completion of each discharge stroke. D. Pumping heads shall be SANS or PVDF or PVC with ball ceramic or viton valves. Inlet/outlet valves shall thread directly into the pump head and shall be easily removable for cleaning. Diaphragm shall be TFE. E. Pump housing shall be flame retardant ABS. F. Pump discharge rate shall be variable over a 20:1 range via stroke rate control knobs. Stroke speed variable from zero to 100 pulses per minute. G. Control: Pump(s) will be started and stopped by energizing a 115VAC 3 prong utility outlet with well operation H. Pumps shall come complete with 12 ft. each suction and discharge tubing, injection fitting, foot valve/strainer, sinker, mounting screws, wall bracket, 5 way discharge valve and expanders and extra fuse. I. Pump shall operate from 115 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz. J. Provide one (1) each 50-gallon polyethylene chemical solution day tank for each chemical feed r system. Install 1" inch drain outlet at or near bottom of tank with Sch 80 Tru-union ball valve. Cover shall be provided with holes molded in to allow suction line and chemical addition. K. The Contractor shall install the disinfection system to keep a minimum required 0.2 mg/1 chlorine residual using sodium hypochlorite as specified in AWWA B300. The "chlorination" pump shall activate simultaneously (with a 5 second delay) when the pump is operating. The chlorine disinfection system will feed into the wellhead assemblies before the 62 gallon bladder tank, and will have adequate detention time to obtain the required chlorine residual. 3.05 PRESSURE SWITCHES The pressure switch shall simultaneously operate the pump and the chlorine injection system at a range of 40-60 psi. The switch shall be an adjustable differential open type, NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Model *. GNG-5 by Square D or approved equal. The switch shall have a 5 second delay for the chlorine injection system, so as not to over chlorinate the bladder tank system until water arrives from the well. 3.06 SEALING Wellhead and pump shall be sealed by a gasket or sealing compound and properly vented with a ke- mesh or finer corrosion resistant screen. 3.07 CLEAN-UP Upon completion of the well construction and other incidentals, all debris and surplus materials resulting from the work shall be removed from the jobsite. END OF SECTION 02673 02673 - 5 �" " SUBMERSIBLE WELL PUMP SECTION 02750 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide concrete paving including broom finished paving and walks, curbs and gutters. Restore paved areas opened or damaged in performance of the work required by the Contract Documents. B. Related Sections Include: 1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03200. 2. Cast -in -Place Concrete and Laboratory Testing - Section 03300. 3. Joint Sealants - Section 07900. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Concrete Design: Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for design of concrete mixes. An independent testing laboratory shall determine design mixes of each type concrete based on specified strengths and materials in accordance with ACI 318-89. Submit 4 copies of each design mix for approval. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Notify responsible trades of schedules of concrete pours so as to allow adequate time for installation of their work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150-78a, Type I or III. -p Fines PvatP• Natural canci ARTM C':-11-7R_ 3. Admixture: Add specified cement -dispersing agent, color admix (where specified) and air -entraining agent to concrete mixes. B. Mixing: Ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94-67. C. Slump: Shall not exceed 5" or less than 3" per ASTM C-143. D. Air Entrainment: Air content by volume as per ASTM C231 shall be 5% to 7% based on measurements made in concrete mixtures at point of discharge at job site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Inspect subgrade and report any discrepancies to Architect before proceeding. A. Build forms to lines and grades detailed, of sufficient strength and rigidity so they will not deflect under pressure of wet concrete. Exercise extreme care in layout, bracing, and aligning forms. Formwork shall be straight, with no bulges in completed work greater than 1/8" in 10 feet. 3.03 REINFORCING A. Place reinforcing steel as detailed and in accordance with ACI 318-89. Place wire mesh to provide one full mesh lap at sides, minimum 8" at ends. Lap bars 36 bar Diameters. Metal chairs shall be used to hold reinforcing steel in the proper plane. Place dowels and sleeves at expansion joints at 24" O.C. maximum. Refer to drawings. 3.04 PLACING A. Concrete: Convey and place concrete so there is no separation of ingredients in accordance with applicable requirements of Chapter 10 ACI Standard Specifications for Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases (ACI 617-Current Edition). Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. No calcium chloride shall be added to the concrete. Do not place concrete which exceeds 95 degrees F., and add a retarder, if required, to all concrete which is between 90 and 95 degrees F. Ice shall be used to control the maximum temperature. B. Construction Joints: Stoppage of concrete placing shall occur at expansion joint or other detailed contraction joints. Construct bulkheads to permit continuation of reinforcing steel. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02750 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE PAVING C. Expansion Joints: Place 1/2" wide expansion joint fillers where paving abuts — existing paving, structure, walls or fixed objects. Place at every 30 feet each way in paving, every 30 LF in curbs and walks and at other locations detailed. Provide 1/2" wide expansion joint filler between curbs and concrete paving. Provide removable tacked -on strips to provide a recess for joint sealing compound. 3/4" Dowels, 24" long shall be placed at 24" O.C. through expansion joints, sleeved one side, at all expansion joints except where joint abuts building, unless noted otherwise. D. Saw -Cut Contraction Joints: Saw -cut joints when concrete is hard enough not to be torn, raveled, or damaged by saw cutting equipment and no later than 10 hours after concrete placement. Trial cuts shall be made prior to execution. Use a power drive concrete saw. Saw blades shall make a clean, smooth cut, producing a groove 1/8" to 1/4" wide to depth required (1/4 slab depth). Locate contraction joints nominally at 12'-0" O.C., unless specified otherwise on Drawings. All joints shall receive sealant. 3.05 FINISHING A. Materials exposed to view free of surface defects such as poor joints, ridges, cracks, honeycombing, excessive laitance, stone pockets or other defects. Materials that are defective and cannot be satisfactorily repaired, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. B. Concrete cured by use of curing compound applied after surfaces take initial set after finishing. C. General Paving and standard Sidewalks: Finish surface to gritty texture with stiff bristle push broom using straight continuous strokes. Finish all edges smooth with 1/8" to 1/4" radius. D. Vibrate, screed and float concrete to level and test the surface, which shall not vary over 1/4" in 10' when tested with a ten foot straight edge. E. Finish all vertical surfaces in a manner that leaves the exposed surfaces free of honeycombing and form marks. Any damaged surfaces shall be repaired and stone rubbed to match adjacent finished surfaces. 3.06 CURING A. Apply a white -pigmented type curing compound at a uniform rate of approximately 200 SF/Gallon, or as recommended by curing compound manufacturer as soon as the finishing operation has been completed and the concrete has lost its water sheen. The curing procedure must protect the concrete, including all exposed surfaces against loss of moisture and rapid temperature change for a period of not less than four days from the beginning of the curing operations and without damage to, or LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02750 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE PAVING i marking of the finished concrete surface. Traffic shall not be allowed on finished concrete of a minimum period of seven days. 3.07 CLEANING A. Concrete approaches, sidewalks, and related work shall be hosed down with water, scrubbed with fiber brushes, allowed to dry and be left broom clean and in condition acceptable to the Owner. END OF SECTION 02750 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02750 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02760 - PAVING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for pavement marking work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Condition of pavement: Clean, dry and cured minimum amount of time as recommended by striping paint manufacturer. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. w- B. Submit manufacturer's literature to the Architect for approval. Literature shall show compatibility of product proposed for use with paving surface to which product is to be applied. 1.05 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Contractor and subcontractor for work of this section shall be jointly responsible for ,.., the coordination of the work specified herein, including but not limited to: 1. Fire Lanes: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Fire lane marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract. 2. Handicapped Parking Spaces: Coordinate with all governing authorities to determine exact requirements (whether or not shown on the drawings). Special marking, if required, is part of the work of the base contract. 3. Colors: Coordinate color requirements with all governing authorities, use only acceptable colors. Colors specified herein shall be used, if acceptable. 4. Notification: Notify the Owner of any required variation from the drawings resulting from coordination. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02760 - 1 """ AUGUST 30, 2000 PAVING SPECIALTIES 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect newly painted surfaces from damage by vehicles during the time required for paint to harden sufficiently to withstand traffic. Any damage to newly painted markings due to the paint subcontractor's failure to provide adequate protection shall be repaired by him at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Any work found to be defective because of either poor workmanship or defective materials which may be evident within a period of 60 days from acceptance for use will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Indications of defective work for the purpose of this guarantee include poor adhesion to the pavement surfaces, checking, cracking, peeling and discoloration. This shall not be construed to include wear, damage or discoloration caused by traffic, erosion or from normal exposure to the elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. Parking Barriers: Precast concrete, semicircular or beveled square in cross-section 6" high x 8" wide x 6-0" long with holes for minimum anchoring dowels. B. Striping & Directional Marking Paint: Acrylic parking lot and/or street marking paint, recommended by manufacturer for type of surface. 1. Paint type: Acrylic, water -borne pavement marking paint conforming to Texas Dept. of Highways Special Specification Traffic paint. 2. Color: a. General Use Striping, Directional Marking, & H.C. Marking: Manufacturer's standard flat white. b. Fire Lane Striping: Manufacturer's standard red or as per city code. Fire lane striping shall have lettering stenciled in white at 40' intervals, 'NO PARKING, FIRE LANE', or as required by fire codes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. New concrete surfaces will be allowed to cure for a period of not less than 11 days before application of marking materials. Dust, clay, silt and excess sand will be removed (by sweeping) from the pavement to be marked before application of paint. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02760 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAVING SPECIALTIES -- 0 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Equipment: Spray mechanism capable of applying paint at the rate specified at an even and uniform thickness, with clear cut edges. Mechanism shall be operated by means of quick opening and closing valves conveniently located. B. Striping & Marking: 1. Where pavement is trowel or wood float finish concrete, lightly sandblast immediate area to receive striping prior to application of paint. a. Rough broom finish areas will not require sand -blasting. 2. Apply paint in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. Apply at a rate of one gallon spread evenly over an area of 105 SF± five square feet and a wet film thickness of 0.015 inch (15 mils.). 3. Paint 4" wide lines in patterns and spacing as shown on drawings. Width of the lines shall be within a tolerance of one-half inch. The centerline of marking shall not deviate more than one-half inch laterally from a straight line at any point. 4. Parking Striping: a. Painted lines: 4" wide, generally 20' long, and spaced approximately 9' O.C. except where noted or local authorities require otherwise. b. If the overall space divides equally into slightly larger spacing than 9', individual spaces should be increased equally, but should not in any case be less than 9' O.C., unless noted otherwise on drawings. C. Parking Barrier: brill hole through pavement surface for steel rods to secure barrier in place. Barrier shall be centered between paint stripes. Minimum 2 #5 rods per barrier extended below paving surface and countersink 1/2" below top surface of barrier. At asphalt paving, extend 24" below paving. 3.03 CLEANING A. Any spilled paints shall be cleaned from the paved areas to the satisfaction of the Owner. Keep the premises clean at all times. B. Paint, empty containers, and other materials or equipment shall not be stored or allowed to accumulate on, or near the paved areas. C. Upon completion of work of this section remove related debris from premises. END OF SECTION 02760 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 02760 - 3 PAVING SPECIALTIES a-, SECTION 02821 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Chain link fence framework, fabric, and'accessories. 2. Excavation for post bases, concrete footings for posts, and center drop for gates. 3. Chain link manual gates and related hardware. '* B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents as defined in Section 01110 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work'of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Post footings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 90 - Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 2. ASTM A 116 - Specification for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. 3. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot- Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A 392 - Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. 5. ASTM F 567 - Specification for Installation of Chain Link Fence. 6. ASTM A 570 - Specification for Hot -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality. 7. ASTM A 572 - Specification for High -Strength Low -Alloy Columbium - Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. 8. ASTM A 824 - Specification for Metallic -Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire Use with Chain Link Fence. 9. ASTM F 1043 - Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. 10. ASTM F 900 - Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 11. ASTM F 1083 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, For Fence Structures. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 - 1 n AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES B. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): 1. UL325, Standards for Safety for Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators. C. Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute (CLFMI): 1. CMFMI PM - Product Manual 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: Submit product data for fabric, posts, accessories, fittings, and hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: Include plan layout, grid, spacing of components, accessories, fittings, hardware, anchorage's, and schedule of components. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate certifying that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with CLFMI PM. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site, store, and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. American Fence Corporation, Phoenix, AZ (602) 272-6606. 2. B&B Electromatic, Incorporated, Norwood, LA (800) 367-0387. 3. Cyclone Fence, USX Corporation, Chicago, IL (972) 641-8999. 4. Master-Halco, Incorporated, La Habra, CA (888) 643-3623. 5. Merchant's Metals, Houston, TX (800) 254-0080. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 6. Security Fence Manufacturing & Supply Company, Incorporated, Bladensburg, MD (810) 220 2110 7. The Tymetal Coporation; Cri&h*k rli;"NY (800) 328-4283. B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Conform to CLFMI Product Manual. B. Steel Framing: 1. Type I: ASTM F 1083 Schedule 40, standard weight galvanized steel pipe, welded construction, minimum yield strength of 25 ksi; coating conforming to ASTM F 1043 Type A on pipe exterior and interior. 2. Type II: ASTM F 1043, cold -formed and welded galvanized steel pipe with minimum yield strength of 50 ksi ; coating conforming to ASTM F 1043 Type B on pipe exterior and interior. 3. Type III (Roll -formed "C" sections): ASTM F 1043, cold -formed galvanized steel post cold -formed and welded galvanized steel pipe with minimum yield strength of 45 ksi coating conforming to ASTM F 1043 Type A on post exterior and interior. C. Fabric: ASTM A 392; Type II: 2 ounce zinc 9 gage (0.148 inch diameter) galvanized steel wire, 2 inch diamond mesh interwoven wire, top and bottom ,. selvages knuckled or knuckled and twist. D. Footing Concrete: Specified in Section 03300. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows: 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe, 3.65 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe, 3.12 pounds per lineal foot. 2. Over 6 Foot to 13 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 pounds per lineal foot. ra ,, B. Line (Intermediate) Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows: 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY - 02821 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES a. Type I Posts: Round; 1.90 inch outside diameter pipe, 2.72 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 1.90 inch outside diameter pipe, 2.28 pounds per lineal foot. C. Type III Posts: 1.875 inch x 1.625 inch, 2.28 pounds per linear foot. 2. Over 6 Foot to 8 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: Round; 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe, 3.65 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe, 3.12 pounds per lineal foot. C. Type III Posts: 1.875 inch x 1.625 inch, 2.28 pounds per linear foot. C. Swinging Gate Posts: For leaf widths, as follows: 1. Up to 4 Feet Width: a. Type I Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 5.79 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe, 4.64 pounds per lineal foot. 2. Between 4 Feet and 10 Feet Width: a. Type I Posts: Round; 4.00 inch outside diameter pipe, 9.10 pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II Posts: 4.00 inch outside diameter pipe, 6.56 pounds per lineal foot. D. Bottom Rail and Intermediate Rails: Manufacturer's longest lengths. 1. Typical: a. Type I: Round; 1.66 inch outside diameter pipe, 2.27pounds per lineal foot. b. Type II: 1.66 inch outside diameter pipe 1.83 pounds per lineal foot. C. Type III Posts: 1.625 inch x 1.25 inch, 1.37 pounds per linear foot. 2. Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6 inches long. 3. Attaching Devices: Means of attaching bottom rail securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. E. Swinging Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size; offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 foot 0 inch nominal height. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with padlock eye. 3. Double Gate Hardware: In addition to. the above, provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type flush plate with anchors set in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Configure for use of one padlock to lock both gate leaves. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 4. Sliding Gate Hardware: F ` Provide manufacturer's standard heavy duty track, ball -bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories required. 2.04 ACCESSORIES PIP A. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe with inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of fence posts. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeves of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. 2. Over 6 Foot Fabric Height: Provide sleeve not less than 24 inches long. 3. Fabric Installed Tight to Roof Deck (Posts Braced to Roof Structure): Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. B. Tension Wire: 7 gage steel, metallic -coated coil spring wire, in accordance with ASTM A 824, located at the top of fence fabric. C. Wire Ties: 11 gage galvanized steel. D. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid -height of fabric. Use same materials as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375 inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. E. Post Tops: Galvanized steel, weather tight closure cap for tubular posts, one cap for each post. Furnish cap with openings to permit passage of top rail. F. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, one piece lengths equal to full height of fabric; with minimum cross section of 3/16 inch x 3/4 inch. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, one for each bottom rail, and two for each corner and pull post. G. Stretcher Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. H. Gate Cross -Bracing: 3/8 inch diameter galvanized steel, adjustable length truss rods. 2.05 MIXES A. Concrete: Specified in Section 03300. B. Grout: Specified in Section 03300, premixed, factory -packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive grout. Provide type formulated for exterior application. LU13BOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90 inch outside diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum 8 feet apart. B. Assemble gate frames rigidly by welding or with special fittings and rivets. Use same fabric as for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to frame at not more than 15 inches on center. Install diagonal cross -bracing on gates as required to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 2.07 FINISHES A. Galvanize as follows: 1. Fabric: Not less than 1.2 oz zinc per square foot. 2. Framing: Not less than 1.8 oz zinc per square foot. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. C. Report in writing to Contracting Officer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the United States Postal Service. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 and manufacturer's published instructions. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES I 69 B. Install gates in accordance with ASTM F 900 and manufacturer's published instructions. C. Space line posts 10 feet 0 inches on center maximum, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Grade -set Posts: 1. Drill or hand excavate. 2. Excavate each post hole to 12 inch diameter, or not less than four times diameter of post. 3. Excavate approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom; set post bottom not less than 36 inches below finish grade. 4. Hold post in position while placing, consolidating, and finishing concrete. E. Sleeve -set Posts: Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with grout, mixed and placed to manufacturer's recommendations. F. Rails: Run rail between post, bending smoothly for curved runs located at the bottom of the fence fabric. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. G. Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using offset fittings where necessary. H. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb with rod in tension. I. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gage galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gage galvanized steel hog rings spaces 24 inches on center. J. Fabric: The fence fabric must be installed within 1-1/2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. K. Stretcher Bars: To secure end, corner, pull, and gate posts, thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches on center and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. L. Tie Wires: 1. Use U-shaped wire conforming with diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted two full turns. Bend wire ends to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 02821 -'7 AUGUST 30, 2000 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches on center. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24 inches on center. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. M. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. C. Shop Drawings: Include details of steel reinforcement placement including material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports. D. Material certificates, test reports. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," including the following, unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. General requirements, including submittals, quality assurance, acceptance of structure, and protection of in -place concrete. 2. Formwork and form accessories. 3. Steel reinforcement and supports. 4. Concrete mixtures. 5. Handling, placing, and constructing concrete. r.* C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Formwork: Furnish formwork and form accessories according to ACI 301. B. Steel Reinforcement: 03300 - 1 _ CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 2. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. 3. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. _ 2. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, not exceeding 1-1/2-inch (38-min) nominal size. T 3. Water: Complying with ASTM C 94. 4. Synthetic Fiber: Fibrillated or monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm) long. D. Admixtures: -' 1. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 2. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 3. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. 4. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 5. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. E. Vapor Retarder: Multi -ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than 7.8 mils (0.18 m.m) thick; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 min) thick. 1. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.1.5-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates. F. Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. G. Curing Materials: 1. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 2. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. 3. Water: Potable. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES 03300 - 2 _ CAST-W-PLACE CONCRETE A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, for normal -weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). a. Slump Limit for Concrete Containing High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: Not more than 8 inches (200 min) after adding admixture to plant- or site -verified, 2- to 3-inch (50- to 75-mm) slump. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 6.0 percent within a tolerance of plus 1.0 or minus 1.5 percent. 1. Air content of trowel -finished interior concrete floors shall not exceed 3.0 percent. D. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. in) 2.03 CONCRETE MIXING 2 zz 2 a z AL. z I cm 2 Z 2 -aw is 2 0 2 1 --------- L= Egli r-F-1 M 1 __rE a-! 9_1 141 1 1 a- I L PI-T Ll i C. Steel Reinforcement: Comply with CRSI's placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. placing concrete. "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before D. Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. -- 1. Construction Joints: Locate and install so as not to impair strength or appearance of 2. Isolation Joints: Install joint -filler strips at junctions with slabs -on -grade and vertical ^. surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. a. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3.02 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. 3.03 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system. E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin -set methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. F. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. 3.04 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection, and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions occur before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days as follows: 1. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 nun), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Tests will be performed according to ACI 301. - 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: At least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. 03300 - 5 - �'" CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE END OF SECTION 03300 03300 - 6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE -` SECTION 04220 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provide glass masonry units and mortar joint grouting work as shown on drawings and herein specified. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide concrete masonry unit construction as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified: B. Related sections include: 1. Testing: Section 01450 2. Deformed bar reinforcement: Section 03200 3. Steel lintels, loose: Section 05500 4. Sealants: Section 07900 5. Painting: Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): ASTM Standards and test methods as referenced herein and/or noted on the drawings. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply unless noted otherwise. A 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store mortar materials on dunnage in a dry place. Masonry unit stores above ground on level platforms. Cover and protect units and accessories as necessary from elements. r 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. ,.� B. Perform masonry prism test for each type of mortar specified. C. Submit shop drawings of bar reinforcement placement for review by the Engineer. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS D. Submit samples of glass masonry units. - - 1.06 JOB MOCK-UP A. Contractor shall lay up at site, one 6'x6' long sample block wall incorporating each type of block and glass block. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Masonry work shall not be placed when there is any possibility of the water freezing before it has attained its initial set. In weather below freezing, all masonry units and mortar shall be heated. Walls which have frozen after making their initial set shall not be built upon until they have had sufficient time to make a proper set at temperatures above freezing. ._ B. All newly placed masonry shall be protected against damage from action of the elements and under no condition shall rain be allowed to fall on, drive against or flow down masonry surfaces until mortar has set a minimum of 12 hours. Tops of all walls shall be covered with a waterproof material at the end of each day. C. During warm, dry weather, masonry shall be protected from drying too rapidly. Masonry surfaces shall be kept moist with water gently spraying the surface, covering work with burlap which is kept wet, or by other approved means. Such protection shall be continued until mortar has set for 3 days or until lowering temperatures or increased humidity in the air make such protection unnecessary. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Block: Hollow load bearing block, nominal size detailed height x 16" x detailed thickness, conforming to ASTM C90, Type N-I, normal light weight, Grades standard aggregate and U.B.C. Standard 24-3, with a minimum compressive strength of _ 1900 psi. Units of same manufacturer throughout. Furnish sizes, shapes, and miscellaneous items shown or required to complete work. B. Thru-wall, door and opening sill head flashings: 3 oz. "Cop-R-Tex Duplex" by York, or approved equal with compatible mastic as recommended by manufacturer. r;_ Interior Masonry ReinforcQW2nl: Mill galvanized wire reinforcement. ladder -type with width as required to suit cavity wall conditions. Side rods (longitudinal) 3/16", cross rods 3/16" wire conforming to ASTM A82. Single wythe wall reinforcing. D. Masonry Wall Reinforcement at 8" CMU: Hot -dipped, galvanized, adjustable ladder - type with 9 gauge side and cross rods. Materials shall be Durowall # D/A 320 "Ladur" LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS or equivalent products made by Block-Lok, Wire Bond Series 200, or Ty -Wall Products. Deformed bar reinforcement shall conform to requirements of section 03200. E. Anchors and Bolts: ASTM _A307 fasteners in sizes and configurations indicated, galvanized. F. Expansion Joint Backer Rod: Closed cell foam similar to Rodofoam by Electrovert, or Denver Foam. G. Granular Insulating Fill: Equal to Zonolite by W. R. Grace. H. Control Joints: Regular "Rapid Control Joint" pre -formed rubber gasket by Dur-O-Wal or equal. I. Glass Masonry Unit: Pattern shall be "Decora" by Pittsburg Corning in size 8" x 8" x 3- 7/8". J. Asphalt Emulsion: Water based asphalt emulsion. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Sand: ASTM C 144, graduation as required by mortar additive manufacturer. C. Lime: Quick lime to comply with ASTM C5 or hydrated lime to comply with ASTM C207 for Type "S". D. Water: Clean and free of deleterious materials. E. Water Repellent Admixture: Rheomix 235 by Master Builders or approved equal. F. Workability Additive: "A" Marble Dust by Armco Steel Corp., 90/200 Mineral Filler by Limestone Products. 2.03 MORTAR MIX A. Mortar mix for masonry units: ASTM C270, Type S with minimum compressive strength of 1800 psi at 28 days. Incorporate water repellent admixture in mortar for exterior walls as per manufacturer's instructions. Masonry cement is not acceptable. B. Mortar shall have a flow after suction_ (water retention) of at least 75% of that immediately after mixing. Add water to hydrated lime at least 24 hours before mixing with other ingredients. Mortar and grout used within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing with no mortar used once it has begun to set. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 2.04 GROUT MIX A. Grout Mix for reinforced masonry: ASTM C476 with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Provide coarse aggregate conforming to ASTM C404 (max. size 3/8") for coarse grout mix. Grout shall have slump of 10-1/2 to 11 inches at the time of placement. 2.05 FORMWORK AND SCAFFOLDING A. Design and engineering of formwork and scaffolding as well as its construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Adequately shore all block soffits, beams, girders and similar members to safely support all loads and lateral pressures liable to come on the construction. Provide clean -out openings at each vertical bar at bottom course or in foundation wall when wall is erected in more than 5 foot lifts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Inspect foundations to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grades and elevations, free of dirt or uneven surfaces. Defective surfaces properly repaired prior to installation. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate. 3.02 REINFORCED MASONRY A. Furnish and install steel reinforcement, maintaining minimum required clear distances. B. Where detailed, install grout fully around steel reinforcement. Grouting done in lifts of 24" (for spaces less than 2" wide) and 48" (more than 2" wide). Agitate and puddle grout during and after placement. Exercise care to prevent grout from staining face of masonry. Immediately remove grout spillage on face and top of masonry. C. Minimum compressive prism strength of the masonry (fm) shall be 1500 psi when tested at 28 days. 3.03 CONCRETE BLOCK AND MORTAR WORK A. Concrete masonry units shall be set plumb and true in lines with regular bond and properly jointed to other work with fully bedded joints and cross joints. Vertical joints on exposed masonry units shall be concave tooled, mortar joints 3/8" thick unless otherwise noted. Units set in running bond pattern, vertical joints staggered on center of block below. Where indicated, align vertical cells to be filled with grout to provide a continuous unobstructed opening of dimensions. Provide mortar pointing of all scored concrete masonry to match adjacent joints. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS *+ B. When a block must be reduced in size or is shown on the drawings to be of a smaller size, use an approved masonry saw to cut the block and properly dress the roughened edges. Chipped, cracked, broken or otherwise defective blocks will not be acceptable. C. All interior non -bearing partitions shall be carried to within 1/4 inch of the deck leaving a gap to be caulked, unless shown otherwise on drawings. D. Reinforced concrete lintels provided for all openings in block walls where steel lintels are not shown. A 3.04 INSULATION A. Insulation shall be installed in the cells of all concrete masonry walls. B. All holes and openings in the wall through which insulation can escape shall be permanently sealed. C. Insulation shall be poured directly into the block cells at maximum 3'-4" intervals. Wall sections below openings shall be filled before sills are placed. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. All CMU veneer/CMU backup walls shall be reinforced horizontally with reinforcing spaced 16" o.c. vertically, maximum. Lay reinforcing on wall and cover with mortar, then bed unit as herein specified. At corners, reinforcing is to be provided in every horizontal course, with inside rod cut and bent to form corner. Provide reinforcing one course above and below all openings. Reinforcement placed as to assure a 5/8" mortar cover measured from the outside face of the joint. Side rods shall be lapped at least 14" at splices. B. Intersecting and butting walls and partitions shall be bonded together by metal anchors + spaced 2' - 0" o.c. vertically. Interlocking of units not permitted. 3.06 CONTROL JOINTS A. Make adequate provisions throughout the masonry work for expansion and contraction. Install control joint filler as required, extending from top of bearing surface to top of wall, reinforcing shall not run through. Control joints shall be watertight at exterior joints. 3.07 PREPARATION OF GLASS MASONRY A. Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing. B. Clean glass units of foreign substances. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 04220 - 5 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 3.08 INSTALLATION OF GLASS MASONRY A. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Arrange coursing pattern to provide consistent joint work throughout. C. Coat sill under units with asphalt emulsion as a bond breaker. Provide full mortar joints. Furrowing not permitted. D. Isolate panel from adjacent construction on sides and top with concealed expansion strips. Caulk perimeter joint and at hidden vertical steel plate. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. E. Shore placed units until setting bed will maintain panel in position without movement. F. Fill joints with pointing mortar. Pack and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to a concave joint. 3.09 CLEANING & PROTECTION A. Remove excess mortar upon completing work. B. Clean surfaces using solution, which will not harm joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. D. Provide protection without damaging completed work. 3.10 SEALANT JOINTS A. Outside joints at the perimeter of exterior doors shall not be less than 1/4" nor more than 3/8" wide and shall be cleaned out to a uniform depth of at least 3/4" for sealant, provided under Section 07900. 3.11 BUILT-IN WORK A. Contractor shall carefully examine architectural and mechanical drawings providing all slots, chases, and recesses in masonry work as required. No pipes shall be enclosed unless tested. Build -in all wood grounds, inserts, anchor bolts, iron frames, brackets or other items furnished by others and cooperate with other contractors in placing of such items. Consult other trades and make provisions for introduction of their work. B. Where bolts are required for attaching steel plates, fill cores of units solid with grout. Set bolts and inserts vertically in top of walls, pilasters, beams or columns 3" minimum from any face in masonry 7 inches or more in thickness, and at center line of thinner LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS masonry sections. Hold all metal accessories to masonry by firmly embedding anchorage into grout 3" minimum. 3.12 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from plumb: 1. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and rises: 1/4 in 10 feet; 3/8" in 20 feet; 1/2" in 40 feet. 2. External corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in 20 feet; 3/8" in 40 feet. 3. Wall thickness: Multiple wythes 1/4". B. Maximum variation from level: 1. Exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in 20 feet; 3/4" in 40 feet. 3.13 POINTING AND CLEANING A. Finish work shall be carefully examined and any holes or defective mortar joints shall be repointed. Dry brush surfaces after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing. All exposed finished surfaces of masonry work shall be cleaned down with a non -staining or discoloring chemical cleaner and stiff fiber brushes. END OF SECTION 04220 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 04220 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS _ A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel. B. This Section includes structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high -strength bolted slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer rgsnonsible for their nreuaration. specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1._ ATSC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2. AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LFRD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 3. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 4. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying 05120 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL if k_ c- 2. Identify high -strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. 6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded. C. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame -cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 2.05 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Shop install and tighten high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned shearibearing connections. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of back -side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet 05120 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL e-+ rM welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds. 2.06 SHOP PRIMING AND TOP COATING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: . 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high -strength bolted with slip -critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 2 "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 3-4 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Top Coat: Apply 2 coats of Sherwin Williams Industrial Enamel B54 (2-4 mil DFT per coat). 1. Owner will select color from standard color chart. r-• PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in 05120 - 5 ""' STRUCTURAL STEEL iptengitV to dec;¢n loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, H. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance. POO I. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Install and tighten high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip -critical, direct -tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with RISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface r, bleeding of back -side welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds. R-' 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.06 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 05120 - 7 STRUCTURAL STEEL abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. END OF SECTION 05120 05120 - 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL E 0 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and �' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and services necessary for the fabrication, delivery and installation of all miscellaneous metal items. All work shall be as,, shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section. B. Section includes: 1. Embedded angles and plates 2. Miscellaneous metal work and related items. C. Related sections include: 1. Quality Control: Section 01450. 2. Concrete Construction: Section 03300. 3. Finish Painting: Section 09900. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society's Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact, except where tack welding is specifically shown or specified. Grind all exposed welds. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop drawings based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to ordering of materials. C. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings, test reports, etc. required above shall release the Architect and the Engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 05500 - 1 n0M AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Approval will cover size and arrangement of members, character of construction, but not dimensions. E. Contractor shall verify actual dimensions at the construction site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent: 1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36; 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold -formed: ASTM A283; grade C; 3. Steel tubing (hot -formed, welded, or seamless): ASTM A500; grade B; 4. Steel bars and bar -size shapes: ASTM A306; grade 65, or ASTM A36; 5. Cold -finished steel bars: ASTM A1081 6. Cold -rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336; 7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525; 8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304, 24 ga. with number 4 finish; 9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10; 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47; 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40, black finish unless otherwise noted; 12. Concrete inserts: a. Threaded or wedge -type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron complying with ASTM A27. b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 13. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon -head regular type complying with ASTM A307, grade A. 14. Lag bolts: Provide square -head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561; 15. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed Spec FF-S-111. B. Castings shall be made from the best grade of soft pig iron cast in stove place molding sand to a uniform thickness. Castings shall be free of defects impairing strength or appearance. C. Accessories: Provide all anchors bolts, anchor straps, hangers and other related fittings, fastener and accessories required for proper and secure installation of all miscellaneous metal. Fasteners for exterior use shall be zinc coated. Generally, the sizes, shapes and spacing of items are shown or specified; where not shown or specified, accessories shall be adequate for the required services, subject to approval. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 05500 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL FABRICATIONS 0" 2.02 SHOP PAINTING A. All Iron and Steel Work: Unless otherwise specified, power tool clean all surfaces to remove mill scale. Work shall receive a shop coat of paint before leaving the a : factory or being exposed to the weather. Aluminum work contacting dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating preventing galvanic action. B. Shop Paint: Shop paint shall be Fabricator's standard, fast curing, lead free, "universal" primer, compatible with finish paint system indicated and for capability to provide sound foundation for field applied topcoats. C. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer. 2.03 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED A. Pipe Bollard: 6" Diameter steel pipe with concrete fill. B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, angles, plates, tubing, connections and bolts provided where shown and detailed on drawings. Exterior imbed plates shall be hot -dip, galvanized. Support angles at roof access ships ladder shall be hot dip galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Contractor shall secure and be responsible for all field measurements required for the proper and accurate fabrication and installation of the items included under this section; field alterations will not be permitted except upon specific authorization of the Architect. B. All work shall be assembled in the most substantial manner and reinforced where necessary with structural shapes, using concealed screws, bolts or similar fastenings. Make welds of adequate strength and durability, jointing tight, clean and smooth, flush and in true plane with base metals. C. All screws or rivets shall be countersunk, unless otherwise noted. Provide lock washers for all bolts. D. All steel to which wood blocking is connected shall be properly punched for anchoring blocking. E. Exposed steel shapes with marred surfaces shall be ground or draw -filled to a fine grain finish, as approved before applying shop coat of paint. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 05500 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL FABRICATIONS F. Assembled work shall be completely constructed in the shop, accurately finished and the pieces match -marked for erection. Form exterior joints to exclude water, grind connections in exposed pieces smooth and polish. G. The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting, tapping and fitting of work to accommodate other work coming in contact with it, and shall furnish all taps, bolts and other fittings in connection therewith. _ H. Except where otherwise noted, fastening to concrete, solid masonry or hollow masonry shall be with expansion bolts or anchors. Fastening to wood plugs will not be permitted. Toggle may be used only when approved by the Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All work included in this Contract shall be installed by the Contractor at the proper time and as rapidly as the progress of the adjacent and connecting work will permit. B. All work shall be installed plumb. level. sauare and true to line in all cases. C. Grind exposed welds smooth and touch-up shop prime coats. D. Do not cut, weld or abrade surfaces which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Loose lintel angles shall bear 8" on each side of opening. F. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming. END OF SECTION 05500 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 05500 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL FABRICATIONS W SECTION 06100 - CARPENTRY . PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide rough carpentry and framing, rough hardware, finish carpentry, and other items normally provided by carpentry trade and install such items listed herein furnished by other trades. 1. Wood nailers, blocking, plates, etc. 2. Rough hardware, including bolts, nuts, washers, powder actuated fasteners, nails, screws, spikes, etc. 3. Preservative or non-combustible treatment for all plywood and solid wood members. B. Related sections include: 1. Wood Forms: Sections 02750 and 03300. 2. Concrete Formwork: Section03100. 3. Miscellaneous Metals: Section 05500. 4. Hollow Metal Frames: Section 10810. 5. Finish Hardware: SectionO8710. 6. Painting and Finishing: Section 09900. 7. Toilet Accessories: Section 10810. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Grading: Grading rules and species in accordance with Voluntary Product Standards PS 20-70. B. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade marks, except where grade mark will interfere with natural finish. C. All lumber must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 06100-1 CARPENTRY 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. A written certification shall be submitted for all pressure preservative treated wood evidencing such treatment in conformance with specified standards. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery of materials to job site, place materials in an area protected from weather, materials a minimum of 6" above ground on blocking. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades by providing for proper installation of built-in items, building in supports, nailers, headers, and frames as required by other trades. 1.07 REFERENCES A. Lumber grading shall be as defined in the latest edition of the "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 16", published by the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau or in the latest edition of the"Grading Rules", published by the Western Wood Products Association. B. Plywood grading shall be as defined by the Douglas Fir Plywood Association or other related entities as applicable. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 3. Grade: No. 2 MG KD Grade Southern Yellow Pine or equivalent grade West Coast Douglas Fir (f-- 1350 psi). Refer to local codes for minimum variance. B. Plywood: 1. Exposed Plywood : Where plywood will be exposed in finished work, provide A-C/EXT-APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade C concealed for exterior use; and provide A-D/INT-APA plywood with Grade A face exposed and Grade D concealed, for interior use. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06100 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 CARPENTRY 2. Concealed Interior Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide C-D Plugged/INT-APA. 3. Exterior Textured Plywood Siding: Select grade, rough sawn, plain 3/8" plywood shiplap siding without grooves. C. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommending nails. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A153). Fastenings concrete and masonry approved "Wej-It" expansion shields set in properly drilled holes or "Redhead" self -drilling anchors and machine bolts. 2. Building Paper: 15 lb. (unless noted otherwise on drawings) asphalt saturated felt, non -perforated, ASTM D226. 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is specified herein or shown on drawings to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark requirements. 1. Pressure -treat above -ground items with waterborne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry to a maximum moisture content of 15%. 2. Treat wood nailers, curbs, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. Also treat wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry, concrete or plaster. B. Fire -retardant treatment: 1. Treat all other wood and plywood members not specified or shown to receive preservative treatment. 2. Identify lumber and plywood by official grade marks. Each piece shall bear the UL label or imprint certifying an FR-S rating, an interior Type A product and kiln dried after treatment (KDAT). Each piece shall carry a National Evaluation Services report number. 3. All fire retardant wood must have an FR-S rating (i.e., flame spread and smoke developed less than 25) when tested in an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 4. All lumber must be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06100 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 CARPENTRY 5. All fire retardant wood must meet Interior Type A Requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood. 6. The fire retardant chemicals used to treat the lumber shall be "Dricon" or approved equal complying with ASTME-84, NFPA255 and UL723 and must be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. 7. Where treated items are exposed on exterior or to high humidity or are to have a transparent finish in form of stain or sealer, provide materials which show no - change in fire -hazard classification when subjected to standard rain test (UL 790 or ASTM B2898). 8. Use fire -retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect type of finish indicated and which does not require brush treatment of field made end cuts to maintain fire -hazard classification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive new wood members shall be free of all dirt, debris and loose materials. Remove any projections as necessary. B. Surfaces shall have no rain, dew, frost, etc. present. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Warped wood members shall not be used, unless they can be fastened adequately to permanently hold them in required alignment. B. Lumber or Plywood to Lumber: 1. Nail spacing shall be maximum of 12" on center and staggered across face of piece. Fastener shall be located within 3" of each end of piece. Maximum spacing of 6" on center, 8' each way from corners for roof edge blocking. 2. Wood framing and furring materials spaced 16" on center, attached at 8' on center at each support, unless noted otherwise. 3. Plywood to metal studs shall be fastened with 1-1/4" screw shank nails at 12" on center at each stud. 4. Nail heads shall be flush with wood surface and nail shall penetrate adjoining piece minimum of 1.25 inches. 5. The installed withdrawal resistance shall be a minimum of 100 pounds per nail. 3.03 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Provide cutting, fitting, fabricating, blocking, nailing, and miscellaneous items of ftiurine. erounds. blockine. screeds and nailers reauired to accommodate roofing. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06100 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 CARPENTRY r, equipment, lavatory counter tops, accessories and other items, including NIC items requiring wood framing, blocking or furring. Materials erected plumb, level and uniformly true to plan providing all shims as required. B. Fastenings for Wall Supported Items: Provide and install 2 x 8 (minimum) x 1 stud space wood blocking, unless specified otherwise at all stud wall areas receiving grab bars, toilet partitions, wall bumpers and other wall mounted accessories. 3.04 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Provide bolts, screws, anchors, inserts and fastenings required for proper attachment of carpentry and millwork items. Fastenings to concrete or masonry with expansion bolts or anchors. Toggle bolts may be used for hollow masonry. Fastening to wood plugs not permitted. Fastenings spaced 16" o.c. unless otherwise noted. 3.05 FINISH CARPENTRY A. Hollow Metal Frame Installation: Exercise care in setting of frames with head level and jambs plumb and square. Secure anchorages to adjacent construction, labeled frames secured per U.L. requirements. Leave spreader bars in place until frames are finally secured square and plumb. B. Specialty Items: Receive specialty items such as toilet accessories and miscellaneous specialty items and install in accordance with approved shop and setting drawings, using proper fasteners. Install items plumbs, level and true, securely fastened with proper bolts or screws. Adhesive not acceptable. C. Miscellaneous Metal Items Installation: Receive miscellaneous metal items and install plumb, level and secure in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Cleanup all debris caused by the work of this section, keeping the premises clean and neat at all times. END OF SECTION 06100 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06100 - 5 .� AUGUST 30, 2000 CARPENTRY SECTION 06175 - WOOD TRUSSES PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing. 2. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 3. Wood treatment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Carpentry: Plywood roof decking and attachment to wood framed structure. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSO): „- 1. ALSC - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 446 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality. 2. ASTM A 591 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc - Coated. C. Truss Plate Institute (TPI): �~^ 1. TPI BWT-76 - Bracing Wood Trusses. 2. TPI HET-80- Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses. 3. TPI PCT-85 - Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. 4. TPI QSP-88 - Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. D. United States Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS): 1. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06175 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 WOOD TRUSSES 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Delegated Engineer: A Professional Engineer Registered in the State where the Project is located who undertakes final design of the roof truss system. 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design Roof Live and Dead Load: Meet requirements of Uniform Building Code with deflection limited to 1/240 of span including ceiling load. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. -- 1. Product Data: Metal plate connectors and metal framing connectors. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of trusses and associated components, web and cord sizes, plate sizes, fastener descriptions and spacings, loads and truss cambers, lifting points, and framed openings. Include truss elevation showing chords, connection plates, bracing requirements and support conditions. a. Drawings signed and sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in State where Project is located. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Design Data: Design calculations. 1) Calculations signed and sealed by Professional Engineer licensed in State where Project is located b. Inspection Report: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from Delegated Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01450 Quality Control. 1) Preparatory. 2) Initial. C. Certificate: Fabricator certificate indicating that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. d. Qualification Documentation: Truss fabricator documentation of _ experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Experience: Company specializing in manufacture of prefabricated open web wood trusses with three years minimum experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable local code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria, and fire retardant requirements. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06175 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 WOOD TRUSSES w C. Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute r ' - BWT-76, HET-80, and TPI-85 including Supplement QSP-88. D. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. E. Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State where Project is located. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and erect trusses in accordance with TPI HET-80. Pik B. Transport and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends. Mtect tn14zSP4 frnm mn;a+—e �_t �' �_�• 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified. B. Brace wood trusses for support in accordance with TPI BWT-76. C. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood -to -wood bearing in assembled units. D. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration, thickness, and anchorage details required for types of joint design indicated. E. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. Provide camber in accordance with TPI standards. F. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to wood members by approved fasteners. 2.03 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. Non -corrosive to connector plates. 1. Pressure treat items in contact with roofing, flashing, or masonry. B. Fire Retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Interior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread. 1. Fire Retardant: Treat where indicated and where required by local code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A _Ygrification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and r- 3.02 ERECTION A. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and TPI BWT-76, at spacing indicated on Drawings. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position before inducing loads. E. Do not field cut trusses. F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. G. Frame openings between trusses with lumber. H. Coordinate placement of roof decking with work of this Section. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Site Tolerances: 1. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: 1. Delegated Engineer: Perform two inspections at Project Site. a. Inspect building structure ready to receive roof truss erection just prior to start of roof truss erection. b. Inspect at time roof trusses are being erected. B. Inspect roof truss installation, alignment, blocking and bridging, and connection to structure. END OF SECTION 06175 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 06175 - 5 WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 06400- ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK & CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS PIN A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all architectural casework items including countertops, cabinetry and other miscellaneous architectural millwork as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related sections include: 1. Rough and finish carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Back -priming and finishing: Section 09900. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Division 15. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material and Fabrication: Premium Grade for transparent (stain) finish and Custom Grade for painted finish, per AWI standards. Casework and Cabinetry shall be of _._ reveal overlav design. unless as otherwise specified_ or indicated on drawings. B. Fabricator shall have had at least 5 years experience in projects of similar scope. C. Casework construction shall minimally meet AWI Section 400A standards for transparent finished custom grade casework. D. All dimensions, substrates, etc. shall be verified in the field by the Contractor. E. Use maximum length material for all trim, base, etc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS s-. A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for hardware, materials and finishes used in fabrication of casework as required to show compliance with specifications. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06400 - 1 ,,, AUGUST 30, 2000 - ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK & CASEWORK C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location and size of each type of unit, unit assemblies, accessories, wood species, materials, finishes, hardware types and location fillers, etc. Include fully dimensioned plans and elevations and indicate details of anchorage to countertops and to walls. Details and sections shown at not less than 1-1/2" scale. D. Samples: Submit fully finished samples of the following items required for casework: 1. Solid Wood With Finish: Two finished samples 3/4" x 6" x 12" for each species and paint/stain color. 2. Plastic Laminate: Three samples 12" square for each type of finish. 3. Countertop: Three finished samples 6" x 18" of typical edge condition with laminate and backing sheet applied. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Casework shall be delivered dry and protected at all times from injury or dampness. It shall not be stored or installed in any part of the building until after concrete and finishing work in such parts is complete and that part of the building is thoroughly dry. Relative humidity in storage areas not to exceed 60%. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Contractor responsible for all details and dimensions with actual held dimensions indicated on shop drawings. Coordinate to establish, verify and maintain field dimensions and job conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All lumber shall be kiln dried to a moisture content of 4-1/2 percent. Kiln dried lumber shall be tempered for not less than four weeks before using. B. Plywood: Exposed surfaces shall be plain sliced hardwood free of imperfections. 1/4" and 3/8" 3 ply and 3/4 7 ply hardwood veneering in accordance with AWI custom grade standards for stain finish. 2.02 ITEMS A. Countertops and Splash: 1. Units fabricated and designed to with -stand a 200 lb. per sq. ft. loading condition without the use of vertical supports. Fabricator shall indicate on LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06400 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK & CASEWORK 0 shop drawings any special locations for stud supports as required for attachment of countertops. 2. Countertops and splash constructed of phenolic 45 lb. high -density particle board cores conforming to ANSI A208.1 - 1989, 2M-1 (countertops with sinks shall have Type 2-M-2) 3. Surfacing of countertops and sinks: .050" thick, high-pressure vertical grade general purpose Nevamar, Wilson Art or approved equal. Countertop supplied with a .020 Melamine balancing sheet applied to underside. 4. Junction between countertops and splash caulked with clear silicone sealant providing a tight sanitary joint. Junction between splash, countertop or any casework and wall shall be caulked with silicone sealant of color to match wall. 5. Splash of same construction to dimensions indicated on drawings. B. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure horizontal grade .050" general purpose plastic laminate shall be Nevamar, Wilson Art, Formica as scheduled in colors or patterns and finishes as selected by Architect and as specified herein. Provide chemical resistant laminate where scheduled on drawings. C. Finish carpentry and millwork items shown on the drawings and indicated with product numbers are as manufactured and/or distributed by Lone Star Plywood and Door Corporation, all items unfinished. D. Provide and install all items, as shown or indicated on drawings, complete in all respects to function as intended. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to dimensions and profiles and details indicated. Verify dimensions in field prior to fabrication. B. Countertops and splashes constructed from one continuous sheet of laminated plastic without intermediate joints. Provide cut-outs for sinks and other accessories, cut-out radiuses at least for 1/8 inch with edges filed smooth and free of crazes. Provide splash at edge of countertops abutting vertical surfaces. C. End grain shall be concealed as much as possible. Exposed edges of plywood shall present a finish the same as the finished sides. D. Work shall be scribed and fit to other finished surfaces in a careful manner. E. All wood surfaces to be set against masonry and/or concealed after erection shall be given a heavy coat of sealer. All woodwork to have paint finish shall be primed at the shop with one coat of approved primer paint. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06400 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK & CASEWORK 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. 3.03 CLEANING & PROTECTION A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion of installation. B. Clean exposed and semi -exposed surfaces, touch-up as required and remove and refinish damaged or soiled areas. C. Protection: Installer shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 06400 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 06400 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK & CASEWORK F SECTION 07260 - VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE - PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide vapor barrier film beneath all slabs on grade. B. Related sections include: 1. Earthwork: Section 02200. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with scheduled concrete pours to avoid delays. Make provision for installation of work by other trades. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. ,., B. Provide product data of material. C. Provide 12" x 12" samples of vapor barrier material and samples of tape for joints. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products a ' which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Chemprobe Technologies Incorporated, Garland, TX (214) 271-5551. 2. ProSoCo, Incorporated, Kansas City, MO (800) 255-4255. 3. The Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH (216) 531-9222. 4. Poly America Inc., Grand Prarie TX B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. m. Substitutions: Permitted. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07260 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE 2.02 MATERIALS A. Membrane Film: 10 mil carbonized polyethylene sheet, maximum widths conforming to LP378, equal to material manufactured by Poly America Inc., Grand Prairie, Texas. Tape for joints and penetrations as recommended by manufacturer of film. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed until fill is level and without voids, and plumbing and electrical rough -ins are complete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier Film: Apply continuously directly over fill. Install with width of sheet parallel with direction of pour, joints lapped 6". Continuously tape all laps and seal penetrations. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect completed membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair as required. END OF SECTION 07260 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07260 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE SECTION 07300 - SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide complete installation of fiber glass shingle roofing on all buildings as described in this section of the specifications and/or shown on the drawings. B. Related sections include: 1. Roof Sheathing: Section 06100 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable manufacturers: Minimum of three years in manufacture of Fiber glass shingles. B. Underwriters' Laboratories Label: 1. Fiber Glass Shingles: Class A fire resistance rating. C. Install shingles to meet requirements of manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS r• A. Manufacturer's Literature: Material description and recommended installation procedures. B. Samples: 1. Shingles: Two of each style selected indicating full range of colors. 2. Accessories: Two of each item of finish specified. ,., 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Deliver materials in sealed packages with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., labels. C. Store materials on raised platforms and protect with coverings at outdoor locations. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07300 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING D. Do not stack bundles of shingles more than 4 ft. high. E. Store rolled goods on end. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. B. Do not apply shingles when air temperature is below 40. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Shingle Roof: Provide manufacturer's Limited Material Warranty for a minimum period of 25 years on shingle roof. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SHINGLES A. Provide fiber glass shingles U.L. Class "A" conforming to ASTM D3018, Type I and D3462. Shingles shall be Owens Corning Oakridge 40 deep shadow color: Estate Grey, or acceptable substitution. 2.02 ASPHALT -SATURATED ROOFING FELT A. ASTM D226-68. Approx. weight: 15 lbs./square, organic, unperforated, 36" wide. 2.03 NAILS A. Hot galvanized aluminum 11 or 12 ga. barbed shank, 3/8" head, sharp pointed conventional, of sufficient length to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Staples shall not be used. A 2.04 BITUMINOUS PLASTIC CEMENT A. FS SS-C-153B, Type 1. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07300 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING 77 2.05 ALUMINUM ACCESSORIES A. Provide .020" thick aluminum flashing and drip edge; pre -finish where exposed with baked on acrylic color coating, color selected by the Architect. „ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLE ROOF A. Felt Underlayment: 1. Lay one layer of felt horizontally over entire roof, lapping each course over lower course 2" minimum at horizontal joints, and 4" side lap at end joints. 2. Secure underlayment to deck with sufficient fasteners to hold in place until shingles are applied. B. Flashings, Vents and Metal Drip Edge: 1. Eaves and Rake Flashing: Nail metal drip edge along the bottom edge (eaves) before felt is laid and to the sides (rakes) after the felt is laid. 2. Vent Pipes: a. Apply shingles up to vent pipe and cut hole in next shingle to go over pipe. Set the shingle in black plastic cement. b. A flashing flange of mineral surfaced roofing or metal is cut and placed over shingle and vent pipe, set in black plastic cement. C. Rest of shingles are then cut around pipe and all are set in black plastic cement. 3. Ridge Vents: Secure to roof sheathing at ridge continuously and overlay with shingles as per manufacturer's installation instructions. Vent to match size and profile of existing. 4. Soffit Vents: Secure vents into soffits at locations as shown on drawings. C. Shingles: 1. Use shingles with tabs cut off as starter strip. 2. Starter strip and shingles shall always overhang the eaves and rake by 1/2". Nail starter strip using same spacing as for shingles, and locate nails about 1" up from the bottom edge. Avoid nailing where cut-outs will occur on the first course of shingles. 3. Snap chalk lines to guide application. For standard 12" x 36" three tab shingles, horizontal chalk lines should be snapped every other row 10" apart to maintain level lines parallel with eaves and ridge. �. 4. First and succeeding courses: Snap chalk lines parallel to edge (rake) of roof 5-1/2", 11-1/2", 17-1/2", 23-1/2", 29-1/2" and 35-1/2" in from the edge. Use these as the guides to keep the shingle cut-outs in alignment during ,... application. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07300 - 3 r► AUGUST 30, 2000 SHINGLE ROOFING & FLASHING 1I f r 5 6. 7. a. Start the first "course" (or "row") with a full shingle. Align it to the 35- 1/2" chalk line and with the butt edge flush with the starter course edge. This will give the required 1/2" overhang on both rake and eaves. b. Cut 6" off outside edge of next (second) course and align it to the 29- 1/2" chalk line. C. Cut 12" off the outside edge of the next (third) course and align it to the 23-1/2" chalk line. d. A cut-out must never come over a cut-out in the row immediately below. Repeat this pattern up the roof cutting 6" off each succeeding row. When the last piece is installed, which is 6" wide, return to eaves and apply full shingles in each row up the roof. Start the 7th row with a full e. For best distribution of color blend, each row shall be run at mieast shingles across the roof before proceeding to the next row. f. For 2-tab and no cut-out shingles, use a 9" off -set instead of a 6" offset. g. For laminated overlay, use random offset or repeat sequence of full shingle, 4-1/2" offset shingle, 7-1/2" offset shingle. Nailing shall be as recommended on bundle wraps and manufacturer's recommendations. Staples shall not be used. Replace damaged shingles. Remove excess shingles not part of extra stock and debris from project site. END OF SECTION 07300 SECTION 07900 - SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01-- RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide sealant required to close joints that would allow moisture or air to enter structure between fixed materials as shown on the drawings and as herein specified including but not limited to: 1. Sealing of interior perimeter joints of window framing, door frames, and other openings in walls. 2. Setting of thresholds in sealant. 3. Sealing of joints between countertops and wall surfaces for a sanitary joint. 4. Sealing of joints of every nature and description that would allow moisture or air penetration. 5. Sealing of joints indicated to be caulked or sealed whether specifically mentioned herein or not. 6. Sealing around all pipe, duct and vent penetrations. B. Related sections include: 1. Concrete Paving: Section 02750. 2. Concrete Masonry: Section 04220. 3. Storefront: Section 08410 4. Sealing of Joints Around Drywall Partitions: Section 09250. 5. Painting: Section 09900 6. Mechanical: Division 15 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Sealant work not permitted when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, color range, handling/installation/curing instructions, and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product or joint backing material. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07900 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 SEALANTS B. Submit samples of joint backing material. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, a warrant that all sealant work executed under this Section shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of the Project, and he shall remedy any defects in the sealant work during the warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Primers: Non -staining type as recommended by sealant manufacturer for each working surface. Material shall not leave residue or stain on adjacent surfaces. Each joint must be primed prior to sealing. B. Sealant for Interior and Exterior Masonry Control Joints: 2 part polyurethane sealant equivalent to "NP-2" by Sonneborn, "Dymeric Plus" by Tremco, or "Dynatrol II" by Pecora. Color to match adjacent surfaces. C. Sealant for Re -glazing: Medium modulus silicone sealant shall be Sonneborn's "Omniseal", Tremco's "Spectrum 2", or approved equal. Color as selected by Architect. D. Sealant for Exterior Concrete Paving and Sidewalk Joints: Two part urethane (self leveling) sealant equal to "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant" by Sonneborn. "Urexpan NR-200" by Pecora, or "THC-900" Tremco. E. Caulking for Interior Joints: One part acrylic latex sealant equivalent to "AC-20" by Pecora, "Acrylic Latex Caulk" by Tremco, "Acrylic Latex" caulk by DAP, or "Sonolac" by Sonnebom. F. Caulking for Countertop Joints: One -part clear silicone sealant, 862 by Pecora, or equal. G. Joint Backing: Non -staining closed cell polyethylene foam rod oversized 30% to 50%, equal to Sonofoam by Sonneborn. H. Solvents and Cleaning Agents: Of a type specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITX 07900 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 SEALANTS r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION r A. Applicator shall examine surfaces receiving sealant or caulking for any defects or joint sizes which would not structurally perform or for any unusual conditions which would interfere with proper installation of sealant or caulking. `"~' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean all joints removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, dirt or other loose particles. Provide and apply non -staining primer as required by conditions and sealant manufacturer. B. Whe primer is dry, compress backup and insert into joint leaving 1/4" to surface open or joint sealing or leaving open 1/2 of joint width, but not less that 1/4". 7 C. Completely cut smooth and remove projection of existing gasket and/or sealant material at door and window framing to remain to achieve sound substrate for application. 3.03 APPLICATION A. It is the intent and purpose and interpretation of this specification that in all areas, joints sealed shall be rendered structurally sound and impervious to the passage of water, moisture and dust. B. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface application, priming and application procedure. C. Sealant shall be applied under pressure with a hand or power activated gun having a nozzle of proper size to entirely fill joint void and shall be forced into joints with sufficient pressure to expel air and fill the joints solidly. All joint surfaces shall be neatly tooled to a smooth surface, free of wrinkles and result in a flush joint when dry. D. Apply sealants when the ambient temperature is between 40' and 100' F. E. All junctures between countertops, back splashes and walls shall be caulked with silicone sealant providing a sanitary tight joint. F. All junctures between piping and substrate of partitions, floors and ceiling shall be caulked. G. Precompressed expanding foam sealant shall be installed per manufacturer's requirements at all vertical expansion joints as noted on Drawings. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07900 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 SEALANTS H. Apply sealant bead at least 1/2 inch thick under each edge of threshold. Remove excess and neatly point. I. Apply sealant between brick veneer and coping on outside face of exterior wall. _ J. Caulk perimeter of window frame, door frame or other items penetrating, intersecting or abutting walls, ceilings, floors, etc. K. Prime surface as required and apply sealant at all glazing, at metal to metal and glass to metal joints within the system. L. Apply bead of sealant at base of wall board. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant or soiling resulting from this work as work progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 07900 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 07900 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 SEALANTS SECTION 08110 - METAL DOORS & FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Provide hollow metal doors, frames and storefronts as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. B. Related sections include: 1. Concrete Masonry: Section 04220 2. Installation of Frames and Doors: Section 06100 3. Flashing, Sheet Metal: Section 07600 4. Finish Hardware: Section 08710 5. Glass & Glazing: Section 08800 6. Gypsum Board: Section 09250 7. Finish Painting: Section 09900 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Doors and frames noted to have a specific hourly label, shall be Underwriter's Laboratories, Inca labeled construction shall bear the required UL label. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Manufacturer shall furnish a certificate to the Owner evidencing that materials delivered meet the labeled and/or fire resistive construction requirements. C. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to fabrication of materials. Shop drawings shall indicate all hardware mounting heights, reinforcement, opening sizes, etc.. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08110 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL DOORS & FRAMES 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING _. A. Delivery of Material: Individually packaged in cartons, completely protecting frames. B. Frames shall be stored under cover on wood sills that will prevent rust and damage. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordination 1. The Contractor shall provide door and frame manufacturer with an approved hardware schedule, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door and frame manufacturer of any changes after information has been forwarded. 2. Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination of information between hardware, door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly coordinated shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior and Interior Door Frames & Sidelights: In depth and profiles indicated furnished with 2" faces (4" head at masonry) and 5/8" stops. Strike jambs provided with 3 factory installed rubber bumpers. Frames fabricated of 16 gauge quality _ annealed steel. Provide UL rating as required. B. Door Frame Anchorage Devices: Provide with minimum of 6 wall anchors and 2 adjustable base anchors, manufacturer's standard design. Provide UL anchors as required. C. Flush Doors: 1-3/4" Flush type door with no visible edge seams, constructed of 18 _ gauge steel faces over polyurethane core or laminated of impregnated honeycomb cores. Reinforcements provided for all hardware. Exterior doors shall have minimum R factor of 4 and flush closing channel at top rail. Doors mortised for hardware. Provide louver and fire rating as required. D. Door Mullion: Provide complete heavy duty removable mullion at each pair of hollow metal doors. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Frames shall have all joints mitered, continuous full welded and ground smooth. No putty or filler permitted at joints. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08110 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL DOORS & FRAMES B. All door frames mortised for hinges specified. Frames of 48" width shall have 2 pair butts. (Re: Door Schedule and Hardware Schedule for Number and Location.) Frames mortised and reinforced for hinges, (7 ga. 1-1/4" x 10" min.), strikes, (12 gauge steel), and surface applied hardware, (12 ga. steel), as required. C. All door frames shall be prepared for installation of silencers. 2.03 FINISH A. All material shall be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized prior to application of baked -on rust resistant prime coat of paint. B. Doors and Frames for exterior openings shall be galvanized before primer is applied using a hot -dip coating of zinc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor ceiling struts to construction above with fasteners to suit conditions. Brace frames as necessary until built into permanent construction. B. Extreme care exercised when installing door frames. All door frames which are installed out of plumb, distorted and not level or in a manner which does not permit proper installation of doors, must be removed and replaced with new frames in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. C. Clearances: 1. Allow maximum of 1/16" clearance at head and jamb. 2. Allow maximum of 1/2" clearance at floors. 3. Allow maximum of 1/4" clearance at thresholds. D. All exterior door frames to be grouted solid. END OF SECTION 08110 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08110 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL DOORS & FRAMES sue+ SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. n 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum entrance doors. 2. Aluminum storefronts 3. Door hardware for entrance doors. 4. Perimeter sealant. B. Related Sections: ^^ 1. Section 08500 - Metal Windows. 2. Section 08710 -Door Hardware: Hardware for same, and coordination. 3. Section 08800 - Glazing: Requirements for glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. AA-M 12 C22 A41. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 605.2. 2. AAMA 701.2. 3. AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10 C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B209. 2. ASTM B221. 3. ASTM A36/A36M. 4. ASTM A386. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory finished, glass and infill, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. LU13BOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details. C. Samples: 1. Aluminum Extrusions: Submit one sample 12 inches (300 mm) long in size illustrating finished aluminum surface. 2. Glazing: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating finished aluminum glass units, and glazing materials. D. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products. B. Handle Products of this section in accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10. C. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Jobsite Requirements: 1. Install sealants and glazing only when temperature is 40 degrees F. or greater. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Energy Efficiency: s„ 1. Exterior framing system: Provide frame with thermal break for exterior framing systems; provide weather-stripping for doors in exterior frame. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. The manufacturer/installer shall warrant the product and installation to be free from defective material and workmanship for a period of two (2) years after date of substantial completion, and shall replace or repair any defective component or system, in whole or part, as necessary to restore the product to its original intended state and integrity. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Kawneer Company, Inc., (317)738-2600. 2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Amarlite Architectural Products, Atlanta, GA (800)691-5750. b. EFCO Corporation; Monett, MO. (800)221-4169. C. Southwest Aluminum Systems, Inc., Chandler, AZ. (602)961-2000. d. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc., Reed City, MI. (616)832-2211. e. U.S. Aluminum Corporation, Waxahachie, TX. (800)627-6440. f. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell, TX. (800)869-4567. 3. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209. C. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Framing System: 51T, by Kawneer Company, Inc. 2 x 4-1/2 inch (50mm x 113mm) nominal dimension, minimum wall thickness of 0.080 inches, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing system with thermal break. 2.04 ENTRANCE DOORS A. Doors: Series 350 swing door, medium stile, by Kawneer Company, Inc. Door sizes indicated on Drawings. 1. Vertical Stile: 3-1/2 inch (88mm), single piece. 2. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inch (88mm), single piece. 3. Bottom Rail: 10 inch (250mm), single piece. 4. Glazing: 1/4 inch (6mm) thick units per Section 08800, with standard bevel glass stops. 2.05 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800. 2.06 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant and Backing Materials: 1. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900. 2. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Type as specified in Section 07900. 2.07 HARDWARE A. Closers: Specified in Section 08710. B. Butts: Specified in Section 08710. C. Locking Devices (where noted in Section 08710): Adams Rite MS+1891 latch/lock with double cylinder operation. Finish: 628. 1. Cylinders: See Section 08710. D. Push/Pulls: Type CP-2 push and type CO-9 pull, by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized where noted in Section 08710. E. Weatherstripping, for Exterior Doors only: 1. Head and Jamb: Replaceable wool, polypropylene, or nylon wool pile with aluminum strip backing, recessed in frame; AAMA 701.2. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 2. Sill: Semi -rigid polymeric material on aluminum anodized to match door; EPDM sweep strip; 38-560 by Kawneer or similar by other named manufacturers. F. Threshold: See Section 08710. 2.08 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Architectural Class I anodic coating, AA-M12 C22 A41, #14 Clear, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain same color range on doors, frames and other components. Do not mix light and dark shades. C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq. ft. D. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. B. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. LU13BOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08710 for installation requirements. K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800. L. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07900. M. Install automatic door operators and actuators in accordance with Section 08640. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre -finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08410 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08410 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS F SECTION 08500- METAL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Encompasses the furnishing of all materials and equipment and performing of all labor required to complete the window work and replacement window work as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 1. Concrete Masonry: Section 04220 2. Wood Blocking: Section 06100 3. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250 4. Aluminum Storefront: Section 08410 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver windows to project site in undamaged condition. B. Store windows out of contact with ground. C. Keep windows under weathertight covering and protect against damage. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Handle to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Completely detailed showing, placing and erection plans; all member sizes, location, anchorage, connections and method of assembly. Contractor shall carefully check these drawings, then submit to Architect for their approval, then carefully recheck all prior to fabrication. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08500- 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 METAL WINDOWS B. Samples: Submit one complete unit of finish specified, 1'-4" x 2'-8" fixed for use in sample panel. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for glass and sealant products. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification and test reports that materials and systems meet specification requirements and design criteria. 1.06 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas that are to receive windows. Report unsatisfactory conditions. B. Do not start installation of windows until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide Owner a written warranty, signed by an officer of manufacturing company providing windows, that shall warrant completed system to be free of leaks and defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years after acceptance. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Aluminum windows of thermal break construction of the types and sizes shown in the plans or as called for in this specification shall conform with all requirements of the ANSUAAMA, 101-85 and specification DH-HC50. B. Air Infiltration Test: The window shall be subjected to an air infiltration test in accordance with ASTM E283. At a test pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot (psf) there shall be less than .10 cfin/ft. infiltration. C. Water Resistant Test: The window shall be subject to a water resistance test in accordance with ASTM E331-86. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static pressure of 6.0 pounds per square foot (psf). D. Uniform Load Structural Test: The unit shall be subjected to a minimum load pressure of 97.5 pounds per square foot (both interior and exterior loads) for a period of 10 seconds, in accordance with ASTM E 330-70. 08500- 2 METAL WINDOWS PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Alenco 2000 FF and 2650 SH or approved equivalent models of Peerless, EFCO, or other approved equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Window Frames and Sash Members shall be of commercial quality 6063-T5 extruded aluminum in accordance with AAMA specifications, with commercial tolerances and shall have a minimum nominal wall thickness of .062" except frame sill which shall be .094" nominal thickness and fixed meeting rail shall be minimum .078". The perimeter of sash shall be completely weather-stripped. Balances shall allow full removal of sash from interior for cleaning and sash replacement. Balances shall be replaceable. Integral lift rail shall be the length of sash sill. Sizes of openings and existing conditions will vary. Provide extension system for complete installation. The Contractor shall field verify all conditions and sizes prior to fabrication. B. Glazing Material: Adequate provision shall be made for use of glazing compound. The glazing material shall be suited for use with the applicable material. Windows shall be factory glazed. Window units shall provide for reglazing from the interior with special tool with -out removal or dismantling of any portion of the window frame or sash. C. Insulating Glass Units: 1" insulated glass as specified in Section 08800. D. Panning System: Extruded aluminum casing of thickness not less than .078" to full cover sills. Panning system shall be of same finish as windows fabricated by window manufacturer. Provide complete thermally broken surround and subsill. E. Back Bedding Materials: Bonding -type back bedding compounds shall meet ANSI- A-134.1 and ANSI-A-134.2. Back bedding compounds or glazing tapes meeting these specifications may be used singularly or in combination. F. Glazing Beads: Glazing beads or retainers of any compatible material may be used. Beads shall be of sufficient strength and fixation to retain the glass. G. Sash Locks: Manufacturer's sweep locks compatible with applicable material and of similar finish. .. H. Weather-stripping: The operating sash shall be equipped with weather-stripping to insure a water tight condition when closed. Weather-stripping shall comply with AAMA 701.2. 08500- 3 �..+ METAL WINDOWS I. Sealant: Two part polyurethane equivalent to Dynatrol II by Pecora or Dymeric by Tremco. J. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with full 18 x 16 aluminum wire mesh and removable vinyl splines at all operable windows in food preparing or serving areas. Finish to match window frame. 2.03 FINISH A. Finish shall be as specified for storefront re:Section 08410 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ASSEMBLY A. All window units shall be furnished completely assembled with glazed panels, weather-stripping and hardware in place. B. All joints of frame and sash members shall be neatly fitted, mechanically joined, and secured. Frame parts and joints shall be made watertight with a trade -accepted non -hardening compound. C. All members shall be assembled in workman -like manner to utilize the strength of the sections and perform according to AAMA and ANSI specifications to assure neat weather -tight construction. Sash corners shall be keyed and mechanically screw jointed for squareness and rigidity. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection shall be by skilled mechanics. Units shall be installed plumb, level, true to plane and shall be secured in accordance with detailed shop drawings or printed instruction. Material and labor for caulking, sealing and cleaning after erection shall be by this contractor. B. All windows shall be erected in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop or erection drawings. Set windows at the proper elevation and location, plumb, level and in alignment; properly brace frames to prevent distortion and misalignment; protect ventilators and operating parts against accumulation of other building materials. C. Apply protective material where aluminum windows contact dissimilar metals, concrete or mortar. 08500- 4 METAL WINDOWS D. Caulking: Windows shall be caulked and sealed by installer to accomplish weather tight installation around perimeter of window frame and wall opening. Color shall match window frame color. 3.03 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT A. All glass and metal shall be thoroughly washed. Remove all paint, mortar, labels, etc. and replace with new any scratched, broken or otherwise defective glass or metal. END OF SECTION 08500 08500- 5 METAL WINDOWS SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all finish hardware including door locks, lock cylinders, construction cores and final cores as required to complete all door work and other work described herein or on the drawings. B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere: 1. Finish Hardware Installation: Section 06100 2. Aluminum Entrances: Section 08410 3. Hollow Metal Doors: Section 08110 1.02 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Material delivered in manufacturer's unbroken containers, bearing on the outside, name, model number and mark identifying each container's installation location. Materials stored in dry storage space with no moisture or condensation present. r•s _ . 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Contractor responsible for coordination of information between hardware door and frame manufacturer. Contractor shall advise each party of any changes during course of construction. Materials not properly coordinated replaced by Contractor at his expense. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete hardware schedule (identifying each item as to manufacturer and number), shop drawings and product data to Architect for review prior to ordering of materials. Include manufacturers cut -sheets on each item scheduled. Submit data on closers indicating compliance with barrier -free codes. B. Furnish all necessary templates and schedules of hardware specified to door and frame manufacturers to installer. Submit actual samples of hardware if required for proper setting of cutouts or reinforcing. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08710 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 FINISH HARDWARE 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All hardware items shall comply with ANSI Specifications, State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers and the Americans with Disabilities Act. B. All exterior locksets, latchsets and deadbolts shall be I mortise style conforming to ANSI 156.13, Series 1000, Grade 2. C. All interior locksets and latchsets and deadbolts shall be mortise style conforming to ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1. D. All doors required to be rated sahll be installed with UL rated hardware UL label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lever Locksets: Best Lock corp., 30 H Series, heavy duty mortise lever lockset having minimum 3/4" throw. Lever No. 3 and escucheon "J", Russwin L2LUS RAD, or Schlage "L" Series, 03 Design. Locking function as noted in schedule. B. Push/pull Latch: UL rated push/pull latch shall be Trimco #1563P. C. Storefront Dead Lock: adams Rite Swinging Door Hardware, MS 1850A with cylinder guard No. MS4043 and armored strike box No. 4001 or approved equal. D. Dead Lock: Classroom deadlock Best Lock Corp. heavy duty 38H Series mortise lock or equal by Russwin or Schlage. E. Cylinders: 7-Pin standard rim cylinders provided with rings, spindle, clamp plate and grandmaster keyed cylinder system shall be by Best Lock Corp. 1-E series or equal by Schlage or Russwin. Cylinders shall be compatible with cores used for Owner's Grandmaster system. F. Door Closers: Closer shall be provided with precise control of closing and latching speeds, fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with cast iron cylinder. Closers shall be fastened by through -bolting with sex bolts. Door closers and brackets sized according to manufacturer's recommendation regarding size and weight of door and draft conditions. Closers installed (unless otherwise noted) so that door is allowed to swing to its maximum open position. If after installation, a closer does not perform satisfactorily due to inadequate size, it shall be replaced by the Contractor with a proper size at no additional cost to the Owner. Closer at 3 hour fire rated doors shall have a fusible link. All closers shall comply with barrier -free codes. Closers shall be LCN "Smoothie" series or approved equal. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08710 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 FINISH HARDWARE G. Wall Stops: 2-1/2" diameter, with hemispherical rubber bumper and toggle or anchor bolts. Equal to Ives #407. Where wall stop cannot be used, provide hinge stop. H. Exterior Door Stop: 3-1/8" projection with 2-1/4" base equal to Trimco #1201 ES. All doors not scheduled to receive wallstop shall be provided with door stop. I. Push and Pull Plates Listed: 4" x 16" 18 gauge plates, beveled on all four edges, secured to door with flathead countersunk screws. No exposed fastening of pull handles permitted. Thru-bolts of pulls countersunk on doors so that plates may be flush applied over bolt heads. Door pulls, Ives No. 8302-6 or approved equal. J. Butts: 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" full mortise typical, , five knuckle ball bearing at all 3 ft. wide doors and smaller. K. Thresholds: Equal to Pemko extruded aluminum, 171A, unless noted otherwise. L. Push bars and pull handles: Kawneer No. CP Push Bar (US 32D) and No. CO-9 Offset Pull (US 32D) or approved equal. M. Door Weatherstripping: Extruded anodized aluminum 3/4" x 1/4" with closed cell sponge neoprene gasket fastened with #6 x 5/8" cadmium plated sheet metal screws equal to Pemko No. 332CR. N. Door Sweep: Extruded aluminum and Neoprene bottom equal to Pemko's #315D. O. Strike: Provide strike and wrought strike box with each locking/latching device with curved lip extended to protect frame. P. Rain Drip: Equal to Pemko 346-C. Q. Fastenings: Furnish all necessary screws, bolts and other fastenings of a suitable size and type to securely fasten the hardware in position. Fastenings shall match the hardware material and finish. Where necessary, furnish expansion shields, set bolts or other approved anchors according to the material to which applied, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish hardware. R. Silencers: GJ63, GJ65 for metal frames, except fire rates and aluminum doors. Three at each door. 2.02 KEYING A. Smaller rooms with new doors, with locks opening into larger rooms shall be keyed alike with locks of the larger room. B. All deadlocks, cylinders, etc. shall be compatible with and keyed to the Owner's Grand Master keying system. Provide three keys per cylinder. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08710 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 FINISH HARDWARE C. All locks shall be keyed differently. D. Key side of lock shall be on public side. E. Keys made of nickel silver only. F. Construction keying system shall be utilized. 2.03 FINISHES _ A. Finish of all finish hardware material to match dull chrome as close as possible unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Before hardware installation is begun, hardware supplier shall brief installers on --+-ll.,+-- — nre —+n11-A in ornnrrlanra urit1i SECTION 08800 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Safety insulated glass units, low E. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08410 - Entrances and Storefronts: Glazed doors and storefronts. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C 103 6 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. 3. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat -Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4. ASTM D2000 - .Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 5. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing and Systems. C. Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing. CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201. D. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA): 1. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 08800 - 1 GLAZING 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: a. Glass: Structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Glazing compound: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. 2. Samples: a. Glazing: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm) in size of each type of glazing, illustrating tinting, and finish of glazing materials. Label each sample indicating kind, quality and manufacturer. 3. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass and burglar resistant glazing shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. B. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. 2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Include coverage for cracking, breakage, and replacement of same. a. Warranty Period: 1 year. 2. Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. a. Warranty Period: 10 years. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 68800 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 GLAZING 3. Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. a. Warranty Period: 10 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Falconer Glass Industries. 2. Libbey-Owens-Ford Company, Toledo, OH (800) 526-6557. 3. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA (412) 434-2858. 4. Viracon, Owatonna, MN (800) 533-2080. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Glass Type 1 - Safety Insulated Glass Units, Low E: Double pane units with inner pane of clear glass and outer pane of tinted laminated glass. Coating on inner side of outer panel. 1. Glass Thickness, Inner: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Glass Thickness, Outer: 5/16 inch. 3. Tint Color: Gray. 4. Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) thick units. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, clear inner panes. 5/16 inch thick, tinted outer panes. 7/16 inch air space between. 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component, chemical curing, non -sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. 1. Color: Clear. C. Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing; non -hardening, non- staining, and non -bleeding. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; compatible with glazing sealant. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08800 — 3 wa AUGUST 30, 2000 GLAZING B. Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self adhesive on _ one side; compatible with glazing sealant. C. Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene, butyl, neoprene, polyurethane, or vinyl; compatible with glazing sealant. D. Joint Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. E. Gaskets: ASTM D2000, SBC 415 to 3BC 620; extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM, black. F. Mastic: Non -solvent type adhesive as recommended by mirrored glass manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 2. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. B. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.03 GLAZING A. Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill; set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08800 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 GLAZING �. B. Install spacers inside and out except where preshimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used. C. Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw, bow, or other visually perceptible characteristics. D. Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for particular glazing application. Coordinate with other Sections for material compatibility. E. Gaskets: 1. Provide adequate anchorage, particularly for driven -in wedge gaskets. 2. Miter and weld ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets. 3. Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners. F. Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids. -- Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint. Trim and clean promptly. i I@ I G. Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing. H. Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations: 1. Head and jamb channels. 2. Colored glass over 75 united inches in size. 3. Clear glass over 125 united inches in size. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BUTT GLAZED METHOD A. Temporarily brace tempered glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members. B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non -adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. C. Apply silicone sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the joint without displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile. D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool smooth to concave profile. E. Remove masking tape. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 08800 - 5 GLAZING 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 08800 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 08800 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 GLAZING I P SECTION 09910 - PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A; Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent mate- rials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and sur- faces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory - applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operat- ing parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: a .Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. C. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Unit kitchens. f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. g. Elevator equipment. h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inac- cessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. POW C. Ceilin9 plenums. d. Utility tunnels. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910-1 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING rl� e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the follow- ing: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code -required labels or equip- f, ment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for traffic -marking paint. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 5. Division 9 Section "Exterior Wood Stain." 6. Division 9 Section "High -Performance Coatings" for industrial paints and maintenance and for special coatings. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classifi- cation. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING zf" B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. La- bel each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit 2 Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Stained or Natural Wood: 6-by-10-inch Samples of natural- or stained - wood finish on representative surfaces. b. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch square Samples of flat metal for each color and cv finish. D. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service per- formance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manu- facturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a POW minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and sur- rounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manu- facturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under condi- tions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufac- turer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufac- turer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to des- ignate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are re- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING quired to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufactur- ers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Dulux Paint; 41'60-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 4. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Dulux Paint; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils (0.056 mm). 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 4. Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thick- ness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2.04 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive al- kyd -based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Dulux Paint; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 4. Sherwin-Williams; Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING r* 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory - formulated full -gloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1.=_fie iamin Moore: Moore's IMC Acrvlic Gloss Enamel M28: Annlied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Dulux Paint; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Ap- plied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 4. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils (0.061 mm). 2.06 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated full -gloss acrylic -latex in- terior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.051 mm). 2. Dulux Paint; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Ap- plied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-374 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Perform- ance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film - thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm). 4. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W201: Ap- plied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.07 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open -Grain Wood Filler: Factory -formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No.. 238. 2. Dulux Paint; none required. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. 4. Sherwin-Williams; Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler. B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory -formulated alkyd -based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Dulux Paint; 1700-XXX WoodPride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing -" Stain. .i.... _. _._T.=-.t__ _ ice_! 1 r/A T i_ i ' C9 ' m 11•1 !l t� r•, C Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory -formulated fast -drying alkyd -based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick -Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. 2. Dulux Paint; 1902-0000 WoodPride Interior Satin Polyurethane Varnish. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick -Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish. 4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43. Interior Waterborne Clear Satin Varnish: Factory -formulated clear satin acrylic - based polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufac- turer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin. 2. Dulux Paint; 1802-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterborne Aquacrylic Satin Varnish. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. 4. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Satin, A68 Se- ries. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to en- sure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish in- formation on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials speci- fied over substrates primed by others. F" 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items re- moved using workers skilled in the trades involved. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 7 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various_ coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manu- facturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as speci- fied. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabi- nets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. �.. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign sub- stances. Use solvent or mechanical_ cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been dam- aged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufac- turer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreat- ment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's -- written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If nec- essary, remove surface film and strain material before using. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING 1� n ,�.., 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recom- mended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to ., distinguish each separate coat. 11 s' _ --. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use appli- cators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint sched- ules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or con- ditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4.The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in xtlll"0C_ oTillP.R F — __I_ _ ___ 1. , . exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat sur- faces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not de- form or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as rec- ommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recom- mended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory -applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all -service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 10 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING PIK I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other sur- face imperfections will not be acceptable. J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Re- move, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Dry Film Thickness. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material be- ing used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall re- move noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint sur- faces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted sur- faces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. ""` 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adja- cent finished surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as ap- proved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 11 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING r 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or de- faced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. B. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc -coated metal surfaces: 1. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full -gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Full -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full -gloss acrylic enamel. 3.09 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL -FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: 1. Waterborne Stain Satin -Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish. END OF SECTION 09910 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09910 - 12 AUGUST 30, 2000 PAINTING 74 SECTION 09931 - EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1_ Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood stains to ex- terior wood surfaces. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Sections "Painting (Consumer Line Products)" and "Painting (Pro- fessional Line Products)" for other exterior coatings and for stained and natu- ral -finished interior woodwork. C. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section affected by alternates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of stain indicated. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required stain materials. Indicate each ma- terial and cross-reference the specific stain system and application. Identify each exterior wood stain material by manufacturer's catalog number and gen- eral classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each exte- rior wood stain. '~ B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. - 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be stained. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and stain material to be applied, with tex- ture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of actual substrates. 1. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required color and texture are achieved. 2. Provide list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. :. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS a. Stained Wood: Provide 8- by 10-inch (200- by 250-mm) Samples of each stained wood finish to be used on representative surfaces. D. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying exterior wood stains similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Proj- ect, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. 9. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature Limitations: Apply stains only when temperatures of surfaces to be stained and the surrounding air are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for oil -based stain, or between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) for latex -based stain. B. Weather Limitations: Do not apply stain in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing with coating operation. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products named in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. ICI Paint Stores, Inc. (Dulux Paint). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.02 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stain -Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality stain material of the various stain types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Stain -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to des- ignate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are re- quired to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufactur- ers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN PRODUCTS r-K _ A. Semitransparent Acrylic Stain: Factory -formulated acrylic -resin -based semitrans- parent wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore: Moorwood Acrylic Semi -Transparent Stain 0093. 2. Dulux Paint: 2610-XXXX Woodpride Exterior Waterborne Semi -Transparent Stain. 3. Pittsburgh Paints: 77-460 Rez Exterior Semi -Transparent Latex Stain. 4. Sherwin-Williams: WoodScapes House Stain Exterior Polyurethane Semi - Transparent Stain A15 Series. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for stain application. Surfaces to be stained must be thoroughly dry before stains are applied. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with stain application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of application will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be stained. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide sur- face -applied protection before surface preparation and staining. 1. After completing staining operations, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in trades involved. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be stained according to manu- facturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as speci- fied. Allow unseasoned or shiny new wood to weather three months before stain- ing. 1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pen- cil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing. 2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer. 3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust leach stains. 4. Previously Stained Work: Renail loose or warped shingles or siding using galvanized or aluminum nails. C. Mixing: Mix and prepare stains according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stir stain thoroughly before applying and frequently during application to maintain color consistency. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If nec- essary, remove surface film and then strain material before using. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Minimum Spreading Rate: Apply stain at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to ensure proper penetration. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of stain material being applied. 1. Do not apply stain on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Ensure that each coat is dry and hard before applying succeeding coat. B. Apply stain evenly with brush, roller, or spray. Thoroughly stain edges and ends of boards. Brush out excess stain that collects in butts of shingles or boards. Avoid staining in direct sunlight. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brushes of appropriate size for surface being stained. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as rec- ommended by stain manufacturer. 3. Spraying: Use airless or conventional air -atomizing high-pressure spraying equipment with orifice size as recommended by stain manufacturer. Ensure that an adequate amount of stain is applied to surface. Use a 40- to 60-degree fan angle. Back -brush immediately after each section is coated. 4. Horizontal Siding: Start at one edge and continue through to a logical break, such as a door, window, or corner; maintain a wet edge for a uniform finish and to avoid lap marks. 5. Drying Time: Allow three to five days between coats. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. After completing staining, clean window glass and other surfaces. Remove spattered stain by proper methods without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being stained or not, against damage from staining. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and restaining as ap- proved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly stained finishes. After completing staining operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or de- faced stained surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.06 EXTERIOR WOOD STAIN SCHEDULE A. Exterior Wood Siding: Provide the following stain systems on exterior wood sid- ing, shingles, shakes, and wood trim including fasciae and soffits: 1.. Semitransparent Acrylic Finish: Two coats. a. Stain Coats: Semitransparent acrylic stain. END OF SECTION 09931 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09931 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 EXTERIOR WOOD STAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of high-performance ••-. coating systems to interior concrete unit masonry. B. Related Sections include the following: �., 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Formed -Metal Fabrications" for shop -primed ferrous - metal. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. B. Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following: 1. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter: 2. High gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. C. Environments: The following terms are used in Part 2 of this Section to distinguish between different corrosive exposures: 1. "Mild environments" are industrial atmospheres with normal exposure to moderate humidity and condensation, occasional mold and mildew develop- ment, and infrequent cleaning with strong chemicals. Environments with low levels of mild chemical fumes and occasional splashing and spilling of chemi- cal products are mild environments. Normal outdoor weathering is also con- sidered a mild environment. r 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each { material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and applica- LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 1 „*, AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS tion. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each mate- rial specified. B. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with requirements in- dicated that limit the amount of VOCs in coating products. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. List of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture: a. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 8-inch- (200-mm-) square samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed high-performance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating sys- tem from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label with the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 4 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from han- dling, mixing, and applying coatings. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg Q. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing coating operation. 2. Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be coated are enclosed and temperature within the area can be maintained within limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in- dicated in the coating system descriptions. B. Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the coating system descriptions by shortened versions of their names shown in parenthesis: 1. Carboline Company (Carboline). 2. DuPont Company, High Performance Coatings (DuPont). 3. ICI Dulux Paints; Devoe Coatings (ICI). 4. Sherwin Williams; Industrial and Marine Coatings (S-W). 5. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2.02 COATINGS MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under, conditions of serv- ice and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field ex- perience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various high- performance coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to des- ignate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are re- quired to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufactur- ers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including prim- ers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 450 g/L or less. 2.03 COLORS A. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. B. Colors: Match Architect's samples. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.04 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS A. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior con- crete masonry block: 1. Mild Environment (High -Gloss Finish): One finish coat over an intermediate coat and a block filler. a. Block Filler: Acrylic or epoxy block filler applied at spreading rate rec- ommended by manufacturer as sufficient to fill pores. 1) DuPont: 300P Acrylic Emulsion Block Filler. 2) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. W a-+ 2) ICI: Devflex 4208 Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel. 3) S-W: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating B66W100 Series. 4) Tnemec: Series 28 Tuf-Cryl Water Based Acrylic Emulsion. C. Topcoat: High -gloss acrylic enamel applied at spreading rate recom- mended by manufacturer to achieve a dry film thickness of 1.0 to 4.0 mils (0.025 to 0.102 mm). 1) DuPont: Corlar 76P 2-Component Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Enamel. 2) ICI: Devflex 4208 Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel. 3) S-W: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating B66W100 Series. 4) Tnemec: Series 28 Tuf-Cryl Water Based Acrylic Emulsion. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which high- performance coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application re- quirements. 1. Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within that particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On re- quest, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers. 1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding: a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions. b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials speci- fied. 2. Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using the coatings speci- fied over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS B. Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of sub- _ stances that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manu- facturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and re - prime substrate. 2. Cementitious Substrates: Prepare concrete, brick, concrete masonry block, and cement plaster surfaces to be coated. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical meth- ods to prepare surfaces. a. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing ap- propriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish M, iii 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, covers for finned -tube radiation, and simi- lar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. b. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and simi- lar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of ap- plication method. a. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. ,., b. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recom- mended by manufacturer. C. Where manufacturer's written instructions require sanding, sand between �. applications to produce a smooth, even surface. d. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and applica- tion of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 2. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional �- coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges, corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of appro- priate size for the surface or item being coated. a. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written in- structions permit using roller or mechanical applicators. b. Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. C. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as rec- ommended by manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by manufacturer's written instructions and governing regulations. a. Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 7 r AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS b. Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush -applied coats. C. Do not double back with spray equipment building -up film thickness of two coats in one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. F. Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Re- move, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spat- tered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by oth- ers to protect their work. 2. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. END OF SECTION 09960 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09960- 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS SECTION 09963 - ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section _ 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric Coating on exterior concrete masonry. s., 1.03 DEFINITIONS �- A. V.O.C.: Volatile organic compounds. 1.04 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Application Requirements: Apply elastomeric coatings to exposed surfaces scheduled or indicated B. Interface with Adjacent Systems: 1. Upon request from other trades, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use to ensure compatibility. 2. Test compatibility of existing coatings, including previously applied coatings, by applying specified special coating to small, inconspicuous area. 3. If coating lifts or blisters existing coating, apply barrier or tie coat as recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. If no compatible barrier or tie coat exists, remove existing coating completely - and apply special coating system as specified for new work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data, including label analysis for each product proposed for use. 2. Include data to indicate coating solids content, volatile organic compound (VOC) content g/L (lbs/gal), and polymer formulation. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 1 r� AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS 3. Include information for finishes, sealants, primers, accessories, and other required components. 4. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors available for selection. 5. Include manufacturer's recommendations for mixing, thinning, application and curing. C. Coating System Samples: 1. Prepare one three (3) samples of each coating system scheduled on actual substrate materials proposed for use. 2. Apply in each top coat color selected. 3. Step back each coat at least one inch to show bare substrate and each coat in system build-up. 4. Minimum sample size of 100 by 200 min (4 x 8 inches). 5. Label each sample to indicate materials, color, sheen, DFT of each coat applied, and total system DFT. D. Submit following Informational Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Indicate compliance with specified performance requirements. 2. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 3. Qualification Data: Manufacturer's and applicator's qualification data. 4. Manufacturer's instructions. 5. Manufacturer's field reports. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. 2. Warranty: Submit specified warranty. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Furnish coating system from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer with documented experience on at least 5 projects of similar nature in past 5 years. D. Certifications: 1. Submit manufacturer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Submit certification from manufacturer that materials furnished for use on this Project meet or exceed specified requirements and comply with applicable federal, state, and local requirements regarding lead content. 3. Submit certification from manufacturer that materials furnished for use on this Project complies with applicable local regulations limiting volatile organic compound (VOC) content of coatings to be applied. Conduct and report LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS measurement of volatile organic compounds in coatings in accordance with EPA TM-24 or ASTM D3960. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01600. B. Deliver materials in factory sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. C. Store materials in protected area at temperature between 7°C (40°F) and 32°C (90°F). 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coating under following conditions: 1. Air and surface temperatures not to exceed minimum or maximum requirements for product to be applied. 2. Relative humidity is not above 85 percent and surface temperature is at least 3°C (5°F) above dew point. 3. Wind velocity is under 32 km/h (20 mph). B. Do not apply coatings under any of following conditions: 1. When surfaces are damp or wet. 2. During snow, rain, fog, or mist. 3. When dust may be generated before coatings have dried. C. Existing Conditions: Field verify existing conditions prior to executing work of this Section. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Comply with provisions of Section 01700. B. Submit 5 year written warranty stating labor and materials are in conformance with Specification requirements and to make good any defects and work affected in connection with defects which develop within warranty period immediately after written notice is received. C. Defects shall include but are not limited to pinholes, crazing or cracking, loss or adhesion, deficient thickness, improper materials or workmanship. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section 01700. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS B. Furnish extra coating in quantity equal to 2 percent of total material furnished but not less than 2 gallons of each type, color and size. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Proko Industries, Mesquite, TX. 2. The Flood Company, VIP Division, Hudson, OH. 3. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL. 4. The Glidden Company, Cleveland, OH. 5. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex Inc., Minneapolis, MN. 2.02 100 PERCENT ACRYLIC ELASTOMERIC SMOOTH COATING A. General: 1. Description: High build, flexible, acrylic, waterproof coating for exterior surfaces. 2. Texture: Fine finish. 3. Thickness: 0.26 mm (0.010 inch) DFT, minimum, per coat. 4. Color: Color to match sample supplied by Architect. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Resistance to wind driven rain: No penetration, TT-C-555B. 2. Elongation: 260 percent minimum, ASTM D412. 3. Tensile strength: 965 kPa (140 psi) minimum, ASTM D412. 4. Impact resistance: Meets requirements, TT-C-555B. 5. Water vapor transmission: perms minimum, ASTM E96. 6. Funizus resistance: Meets reauirements. TT-C-555B. Mo. C. Patching Compound: As recommended by manufacturer. D. Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer. E. Muriatic acid, mildewcide, TSP (tri-sodium phosphate), acidic -detergent, zinc sulfate, sodium metasilicate, and solvent: Commercially available, non -damaging to surface being cleaned; as specified in PDCA Specification Manual; acceptable to coating manufacturer. r-R 2.04 MIXES A. Use factory prepared colors matching approved samples. Site tinting will not be permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Section 01400. B. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scrape or grind protrusions flush with surface. B. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter and other dry materials by scraping or brushing. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming and blowing with high pressure air. C. Remove oil, form oil, wax and grease by scraping off heavy deposits and cleaning with mineral spirits or hot trisodium phosphate solution followed by water rinse. Remove other contaminants as recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Remove mildew and neutralize surfaces according to manufacturer's recommendations. E. Remove smooth concrete surfaces and verify use of concrete hardeners and sealers. Brush-off blast or power wash with 5 percent acid etch and rinse clean to remove residue. F. Determine pH and moisture content of surface to be coated by performing appropriate tests. Do not apply coatings to surfaces where moisture content exceeds manufacturer's recommendation. Follow manufacturer's instructions for coating compatibility with surface pH. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS G. Crack Repair: 1. Fill cracks according to manufacturer's recommendations prior to coating surfaces. Apply primer to surfaces if required by manufacturer. 2. Cracks up to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch): a. Clean surface around crack. b. Apply primer penetrating crack as deeply as possible, overflowing crack 51 mm [(2 inches)] on each side. C. When primer is dry, apply manufacturer's recommended sealant, forced well into the crack using a brush, putty knife, or trowel. d. Smooth edges around the crack over the primed area. e. Allow for sealant shrinkage when applying. 3. Cracks up to 10 mm (3/8 inch): a. Open cracks to 6 to 10 mm (1/4 to 3/8 inch) wide and 3 mm (1/8 inch) deep. b. Clean crack and surrounding area removing dust, dirt, and other impurities. C. Apply primer recommended by manufacturer to crack with brush to obtain uniform coverage and spread approximately 10 mm (2 inches) on each side of crack. d. Fill crack with manufacturer's recommended crack filler applied with putty knife or trowel, and allow for shrinkage. e. If excessive shrinkage occurs, reapply crack filler. 4. Cracks over 10 mm (3/8 inch): Notify Architect immediately. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Coat surfaces specified, scheduled, illustrated, and otherwise identified unless specifically noted otherwise. — 2. Apply coatings of type, color, and sheen as selected. 3. Apply products in accordance with Section 01600._ Use application materials, equipment, and techniques as recommended by coating manufacturer and best -- suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 4. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are improperly prepared. 5. Number of coats specified are minimum number acceptable. 6. Apply coating systems to total dry film thickness scheduled. Apply material at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Do not exceed maximum single coat thickness recommended by coating manufacturer. Do_ not double -back with spray equipment building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. 7. Ensure that edges, corners, and crevices receive dry film thickness equivalent of flat surfaces. 8. Finish edges of coatings adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. B. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's printed instructions. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS C. Do not use mixed material beyond manufacturer's recommended pot life. D. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before recoating. E. Prime Coats: Apply initial coat to surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. F. Intermediate and Top Coats: 1. Allow previously applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. ., 2. Apply each coat to achieve uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage free of brush and roller marks, runs, misses, visible laps or shadows, hazing, bubbles, pin holes, or other defects. 3. If stains, undercoats, or other conditions show through final topcoat, correct defects and apply additional topcoats until coating film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 4. Apply materials at minimum specified film thickness by method recommended by manufacturer. Apply in two coats; smooth first coat with approximate spread rate of 80 square feet per gallon. Provide textured second coat applied at rate of approximately 65 - 80 square feet per gallon). 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: —Comply with reouirements of Section 01400_ B. Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods which may damage finish or surrounding construction. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work in accordance with Section 01500. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage or overspray resulting form work of this Section. If necessary, mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces by suitable means. Repair damaged areas to satisfaction of Architect without additional cost to Owner. C. Post appropriate "WARNING" signs while work is in progress and during the curing period. D. Protect installed work against damage. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. Coating System No. 1: Surface: Concrete masonry. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color line. Application Method: Spray, brush or roller. Surface Preparation: As specified above. Filler Coat: Manufacturer's recommended masonry filler. Prime Coat: Manufacturer's recommended primer. First Coat: Acrylic elastomeric coating. Second Coat: Acrylic elastomeric coating. System DFT: 0.05mm (0.020 inch) minimum. END OF SECTION 09963 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 09963 - 8 AUGUST 30, 2000 ELASTOMERIC SPECIAL COATINGS SECTION 10170 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments, floor mounted, head rail braced. 2. Solid plastic urinal screens, wall mounted with floor mounted pilaster brace. 3. Attachment hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and plates within walls for partition attachment. 2. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: Coordinate compartment installation with subsequent accessory installation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Al 17.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: Panel construction, hardware, and accessories. 2. Shop Drawings: Partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, door swings, details of wall and floor supports and connections. 3. Samples: Two 2 inch x 3 inch samples of partition indicating finish and color. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 10170 - 1 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSI A117.1 code for access for the handicapped operation of toilet compartment door and hardware. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Resource Management: 1. Recycled Content: Provide solid plastic compartments and screens with core manufactured from minimum 50 percent recycled plastic. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Comtec Industries, Mosic, PA (717) 348-0997. 2. Metpar, Corporation, Westbury, NY (516) 333-2600. 3. Santana, Scranton, PA (800) 368-5002 or (717) 343-7921. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solid plastic toilet compartments and screens: water resistant; graffiti resistant; non -absorbent; with plastic face sheets permanently fused to plastic core. 1. Panels: 1 inch thickness. 2. Doors: 1 inch thickness. 3. Pilasters: 1 inch thickness. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturers colors. B. Pilaster Shoes: 3 inches high and one of the following: 1. 20 gage stainless steel. C. Attachments: 1. Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type. 2. Wall Mounting Brackets: Continuous, full height heavy duty, bright anodized aluminum brackets in accordance with toilet compartment manufacturer's instructions. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10170 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 0 D. Hardware: Chrome plated non-ferrous cast pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; black anodized aluminum door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Solid Plastic: 1/4 inch radius beveled edges. B. Hardware and Attachments: Pre -drilled by manufacturer; provide for protection of dissimilar metals. •* 1. Floor Mounted Anchorage: Corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. 2. Verify correct location or built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. B. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions .and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, level, and square in accordance with published manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. 2. Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane. B. Maintain 1/2 inch space between wall and panels, and between wall and pilasters. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamperproof bolts and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10170 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS D. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls and anchored to floor in accordance with _ manufacturer's instructions to suit supporting wall construction. E. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. F. Equip each door with hinges, one door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors, not exceeding 1/4 inch. 1. Provide hardware at handicapped toilet with operating hardware complying with ANSI Al 17.1. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate placement of support framing and anchors in walls. B. Site Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. In Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched. C. Out Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to gently return doors to closed position. D. Adiust ad'a��t corayonents for consistency of line or mane_ _ 3.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Indoor Air Quality: 1. Clean Surfaces: Use non -toxic materials and procedures. 2. Remove protective masking. END OF SECTION 10170 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10170 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS r-` SECTION 10520 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets. .m 1.03 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: a. Extinguisher type, operational features, color. b. Cabinet type, materials, construction, features, color, finish and attachment method. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to NFPA 10 and local jurisdiction for requirements for extinguisher location and mounting. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10520 - 1 AUGUST 30, 2000 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products that may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN (800) 950-0450. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN (612) 571-1181. 3. Potter -Roemer, Incorporated, Cerritos, CA (800) 366-3473. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extinguisher: Multipurpose dry chemical type, UL 299; UL-rated 4-A:60:B:C. 10 pound nominal capacity in enameled steel container. B. Mounting Bracket: Metal designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of size required for type and capacity of extinguisher specified, screw attached to wall. Brite chrome finish. C. Cabinet: 1. Models: a._ J.L. Industries: Clear VIJ eries No. 1515F25. b. Larsen's: Vista Series No. V-2709. C. Potter -Roemer: Buena Series No. 7121-A-16-VR. 2. Description: a. Metal: Formed sheet steel. b. Mounting: Recessed. C. Trim: Trimless. d. Door: Clear acrylic bubble. e. Finish: Primer. f. Lettering: Vertical red 1-inch letters; PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION "Fire Extinguisher." A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10520 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 7" C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts' conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install extinguisher and bracket or cabinet in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions in locations required by authority having jurisdiction. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Locate extinguishers where indicated on Drawings. D. Mount brackets so top of extinguisher is maximum 60 inches above finish floor. END OF SECTION 10520 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10520 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PARTI-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet Accessories. 2. Attachment hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Placement of backing and blocking for attachment of accessories. P! 2. Section 09110: Placement of backing plate reinforcement for attachment of accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): I ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. P_ 2. ASTM A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 3. ASTM A 366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold -Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 6 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Data for each accessory describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. B. Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810-1 AUGUST 30,2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to United States Postal Service "Standards for Facility Accessibility by the Physically Handicapped' Handbook RE-4 for mounting heights and locations of accessories. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver accessories in original labeled packaging, bearing manufacturer's name and type of accessory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. American Specialties Company, Incorporated., Deer Park, NY (914) 476- 9000. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Incorporated, Jackson, TN (901) 424-7000. 3. Bradley Corporation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 354-0100. 4. McKinney Parker, Scranton, PA (717) 969-9770. B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366, ASTM A 123 to 1.25 ounces per square yard. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304. D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper -proof. E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810 - 2 AUGUST 30, 2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES 6M 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS FA TA-1 Surface Mounted Liquid Soap Dispenser: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0342. b. Bobrick: B-4112. C. Bradley: 6542. d. McKinney: 304-H. 2. Description: Horizontal tank type for all purpose liquid soap. Minimum 20 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Drawn one-piece construction. No. 4 satin finish. Concealed stainless steel wall plate. Clear plastic refill indicator window. Locked hinged stainless steel lid for top filling. Minimum 40 ounce capacity. B. TA-2 Recessed Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Vendor: 1. Model Numbers: a. American. Specialties: 0486. b. Bobrick B-352. C. Bradley: 401. d. McKinney: 874. 2. Description: Cabinet of stainless steel, minimum 22 gauge, all -welded construction. Door of seamless steel, minimum 18 gauge, with returned edges equipped with tumbler lockset. Coin operated 25 cent denomination identification reading "Napkins" and "Tampons" at coin slot. Coin box with separate 'tumbler lock. No brand name advertising permitted. Capacity minimum 30 sanitary napkins and 27 tampons. C. TA-3 Mirror with Stainless Steel Channel Frame: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0620. b. Bobrick: B-165 series. c. Bradley: 781. d. McKinney: 190. 2. Description: 24 inches wide x 42 inches high. Minimum 18 gauge 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" stainless steel frame with 90 degree mitered hairline corners mechanically interlocked. Type 430 bright polished finish. Galvanized steel back with integral horizontal hanging brackets for mounting on concealed wall hanger, secured with concealed wall vandalproof screws in lower frame. Edges and back protected by shock -absorbing water-resistant padding. D. TA-4 Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: 1. Model Numbers: a. Bobrick: B221 or approved equal. 2. Description: Dispenses single or half fold paper toilet seat covers. 22 gauge stainless steel 11" x 16" nom. All welded construction. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810 - 3 AUGUST 30, 2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES E. TA-5 Mop and Broom Holder: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 8215b. b. Bobrick: B223. C. Bradley: 9954. d. McKinney: 233. 2. Description: 36" long, 3" projection, 4 holders. Minimum 20 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel hat channel. Spring loaded rubber cam -type mop holders. No. 4 Satin finish. F. TA-6 Surface Mounted Multi -Roll Tissue Dispenser: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0030. b. Bobrick: B-288. C. Bradley: 5402. d. McKinney: 615. 2. Description: Minimum 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel cabinet. Minimum 18 gauge drawn one-piece Type 304 stainless steel unit front with pivot hinge and tumbler lockset. No. 4 satin finish. Holds 2 standard core 5" diameter tissue rolls. Reserve roll drops in -place by automatic release. Theft resistant spindles. G. TA-7 Recessed Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0469. b. Bobrick: B-3944. C. Bradley: 234. d. McKinney: 80294. 2. Description: 4" wall depth. Minimum 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Drawn and beveled one-piece seamless flange. Full length stainless steel piano hinge and concealed tumbler lock at towel dispenser door. No. 4 satin finish. Capacity minimum 600 C-fold or 800 milti-fold paper towels. Waste receptacle with all edges with hemmed construction. Removable waste receptacle secured to cabinet with tumbler lock. Minimum 12 gallon capacity. H. TA-8 Grab Bar - 36 Inch: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 3100 series. b. Bobrick: B-550706. C. Bradley: 832 series. d. McKinney: 9602. 2. Description: 1-1/4" diameter (1-1/2" diameter when required by local code) 36" long, horizontal, 1-1/2" wall clearance. Type 304 minimum 18 gauge stainless steel. Concealed screw attached mounting and anchorage. No. 4 satin finish. Minimum 900 pound supporting capacity. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810 - 4 AUGUST 30, 2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES I. TA-9 Grab Bar - 42 Inch: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 3100 series. b. Bobrick: B5507x42. c. Bradley: 832 series. d. McKinney: 9602. 2. Description: 1-1/4" diameter (1-1/2" diameter when required by local code) 42" long, horizontal. 1-1/2" wall clearance. Type 304 minimum 18 gauge - stainless steel. Concealed screw attached mounting and anchorage. No. 4 satin finish. Minimum 900 pound supporting capacity. -A J. TA-10 Recessed Sanitary Napkin Disposal: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0473. b. Bobrick: B-3544. C. Bradley: 4731-15. d. McKinney: 827. 2. Description: Minimum 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Drawn and beveled one-piece seamless flange. Spring -loaded, self -closing door with full- length stainless steel piano hinge. No. 4 satin finish. Removable stainless " steel receptacle with tumbler lock. International graphic symbol on door. Minimum 1.2 gallon capacity. K. TA-11 Partition Mounted Dual -Access Feminine Napkin Disposal: 1. Model Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0472. b. Bobrick: B-354. C. Bradley: 4721-15. 2. Description: Mounted in toilet compartment panel serving both sides of panel. Minimum 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. Drawn and beveled one- piece seamless flange. Spring -loaded, self closing door with full-length stainless steel piano hinge. No. 4 satin finish. Removable stainless steel receptacle with tumbler lock. International graphic symbol on door. Minimum 1.2 gallon capacity. L. TA-12 Surface Mounted Shelf- 1. Models Numbers: a. American Specialties: 0692. b. Bobrick: B-296x24 C. Bradley: 756-24. d. McKinney: 224. 2. Description: 24" long, 6" depth. Minimum 18 gauge Type 304 stainless steel. 3/4" return edge with hemmed construction. No. 4 satin finish. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810 - 5 AUGUST 30, 2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES M. TA-13 Partion mounted double roll holder: 1. Models: a. Bobrick: B-386 _ b. Approved equal by Bradley American Specialties or McKinney. 2. Description: Minimum 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel cabinet. Minimum 18 gauge drawn one-piece Type 304 stainless steel unit front with pivot hinge _ and tumbler lockset. No. 4 satin finish. Holds 2 standard core 5" diameter tissue rolls each side. Reserve roll drops in -place by automatic release. Theft resistant spindles. Dual side cabinet serves two stalls. N. Undersink Pipe Insulation: Vinyl cover pipe insulation, ADA compliant, shall be Brocar Products "Trap Wrap" C500 R Series in standard color or approved equal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents. C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 1. Verify correct location of opening in wall for recessed accessories. 2. Verify that attachment blocking and backing plates are in place in the correct location for accessory connections. B. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY 10810 - 6 AUGUST 30, 2000 TOILET ACCESSORIES C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to site for scheduled installation. B. Provide and use templates and rough -in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, ADA/TAS handicapped requirements, and as indicated on Drawings. Use tamper -proof fasteners. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. Clean and polish exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 10810 LUBBOCK POLICE RANGE FACILITY AUGUST 30, 2000 10810 - 7 TOILET ACCESSORIES SECTION 15060 -PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings. B. Miscellaneous small piping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA C151 -Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand -lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. B. AWWA C150 - Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. C. AWWA C104 - Cement -mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 1- Cact Irnn Pin- Flanao-c and Plnnaari Fittinoe r i r E. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless ' F. AWWA C110 - Ductile -Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3-inch Through 48 inch, for Water and Other Liquids r• AXIT"rA n,Cnc n-i__ar-_tl__ 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe. 1. Ductile Iron pipe shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with current AWWA Standard C151 and shall be designed for working pressure of 150 psi and a surge allowance of 100 psi and for the required depth of bury plus truck load in accordance with current AWWA Standard C150. 2. The pipe shall be interior cement lined with a seal coat of asphaltic material in accordance with current AWWA Standard C104. 3. The exterior surfaces of all pipe and fittings which will be exposed in interior locations shall be shop primed. Flange faces shall be coated with rust -preventive compound. Rust -Preventive Compound shall be Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or Rust- Oleum "R-9". Exterior surfaces of all other ductile iron pipe fittings shall be asphaltic coated in accordance with current AWWA Standard C151. 4. Flanged joints (ANSI B16.1, Class 125) shall be used in all exposed and inside piping except where otherwise indicated. Where mechanical groove type joints are used, the pipe and fittings shall be radius cut grooved in accordance with the current edition of AWWA C606. B. Miscellaneous Small Piping 1. Galvanized Steel Pipe: Steel pipe 2 inch diameter and smaller and not otherwise specified shall be galvanized standard wall and shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation A 53. The pipe joints and fitting shall be threaded. 2. Copper Pipe: Copper pipe installed underground shall be Type "K" , soft temper. All exposed copper pipe shall be Type "L", hard temper. Solder type wrought copper fittings shall be used, except on potable water lines, which shall utilize compression fittings. Buried potable water supply lines 3/4" diameter and smaller shall be copper pipe. 3. All steel and copper pipe which is buried shall be protected with two complete layers of approved insulating tape unless a different type of coating is specified elsewhere. 4. All buried PVC pipe smaller than 4 inches in diameter shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241 using PVC 1120 plastic. The pipe shall have a Schedule SO wall thickness unless otherwise specified on the drawings. Buried PVC pipe shall utilize elastomeric gasket joints except solvent weld joints may be used in piping <_ 2 inches. All PVC shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for use in the transportation of potable water and bear the NSF seal of approval. 15060 - 2 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS I 2.02 PIPE FITTINGS A. General. 1. Pipe fittings shall be of the type and design especially suitable for use with the type of piping with which they are installed. Fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe with which they are used but in no case less than 150 psi. All flanged fittings shall be faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 for Class 125 flanges. B. Ductile Iron. 1. Ductile iron fittings for use with ductile iron pipe shall comply with the requirements ^' of current AWWA Standard C 110. All ductile iron fittings shall have the same interior and exterior coating as the pipe to which they are joined. 2. Ductile iron fittings shall be push -on, mechanical joint or flanged as required by the pipe to which they are joined. 3. All ductile iron fittings shall be cast from the same quality of metal used in casting the ductile iron pipe, and shall be subject to the same test requirements. Marking and r weighing shall be as required for the ductile iron pipe. 4. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, wall castings shall be provided where ductile iron pipes pass through concrete walls. Where a flange and mechanical joint piece is to connect to a mechanical joint wall casting, the bolt holes in the bell of the wall casting shall straddle the top (or side for vertical piping) centerline of the casting and shall align with the bolt holes in the flange and mechanical joint piece. The top center line shall be marked on the wall casting at the foundry. 2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS A. All exposed piping shall be suitably supported by pipe supports. Supports shall be of the types specified herein or shown on the drawings with the spans between adjacent supports being as shown on the drawings. Supports for small piping shall be spaced so that no deflection of the piping will occur between adjacent supports. B. All supports shall be installed and adjusted so that the loads are equally distributed throughout any one run of piping. C. Small piping shall be supported from continuous concrete inserts and trapeze hangers, wall brackets, or other accessories as required by the particular installation. Small piping supports shall be Grinnell, Unistrut or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General. All pipe and accessories required for the work specified herein shall be unloaded, handled, laid, jointed, tested for defects and for leakage and chlorinated in the manner herein specified. 15060 - 3 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS B. Inspection. The pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the progress of the work and any material found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. C. Responsibility for Materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace, at his own expense, all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or has become damaged in handling after delivery. D. Handling Pipe and Accessories. 1. All pipe, fittings, valves, and other accessories, shall, unless otherwise directed, be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the work by the Contractor. In loading and unloading, they shall be lifted by hoists or slid, or rolled on skidways in such a manner as to avoid shock or damage to the materials. Under no circumstances shall they be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways must not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. The pipe, fittings and accessories shall be placed along the site in such a manner as to be kept as free as possible from dirt, sand, mud and other foreign matter. E. Excavation and Trenching 1. The trench shall be excavated to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer. The minimum depth of cover for all pipe lines shall be thirty-six (36) inches, unless otherwise specifically shown on the drawings. 2. The minimum width of the trench shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus eighteen (18) inches and the maximum width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus thirty-six (36) inches. The trenching equipment shall be maintained on a sufficiently level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls. The maximum horizontal offset of the trench wall from bottom of trench to the top of the trench (undercutting) shall be four (4) inches. 3. The trench shall be excavated to an even grade so that the bottom of the pipe will rest on the bottom of trench throughout the entire length of the pipe. In order to obtain a true even grade, the trench shall be fine graded by hand. 4. Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be corrected by filling with approved material and thoroughly compacting. 5. If ledge rock, rock fragments or other unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench, it shall be removed to a depth of three inches below grade, refilled with selected material and thoroughly compacted. 6. Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug at each joint to permit the jointing of pipe to be made properly, and of sufficient depth to prevent the bell of the pipe from resting on undisturbed materials. 7. Wherever necessary to prevent caving, the trench shall be adequately braced and sheeted in accordance with the current requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 8. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except in places where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures either above or below ground; in such instances, hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines, of which he has been advised, whether or not they are shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. Extreme care shall be used to prevent such damage and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to any such lines. 15060 - 4 _ PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 9. There will be no classification of or extra payment for excavated materials and all materials encountered shall be excavated as required. Adjacent structures shall be protected from damage by construction equipment. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner which will not endanger the work or existing structures and which will cause the least obstruction to roadways. 10. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by the - - Contractor, and at the Contractor's expense. 11. Blasting for excavation of solid rock will be permitted only after securing the approval of the Engineer and only when proper precautions are taken for protection of persons or property. The hours of blasting will be fixed by the Engineer. Any damage caused by blasting shall be paid for by the Contractor. The method of procedure relative to blasting shall conform to all state laws and local ordinances. F. Pipe Laying 1. General. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the specified lines and grades shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer. 2. After the trench grade has been completed, all bell holes dug and the grade inspected, the pipes may be placed in the trench. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of derricks, ropes, or other suitable tools or - equipment, in such a manner as to prevent damage to the material in any way. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. 3. Before lowering into the trench, the pipe shall be inspected again for defects and cast iron pipe, while suspended, shall be lightly hammered to detect cracks. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe and materials shall be rejected. 4. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and from all bells, spigots or parts of the pipe used in forming the joint, before the pipe is lowered into the trench, and it shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying. G. Laying and Jointing Ductile Iron Pipe. 1. General. Unless otherwise directed, pipe shall be laid with bells facing in direction of laying; and for lines on appreciable slopes, bells shall, at the discretion of the Engineer, face up grade. 2. Cutting of pipe for inserting fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or the cement lining. 3. The jointing shall be completed for all pipe laid each day, in order not to leave open joints in the trench overnight. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by approved means, and no trench water shall be permitted to enter the pipe. 4. Flanged Joints. Flanged joints where used shall be bolted with flange bolts of best quality mild steel and of the size and length required by AWWA C 115; bolts and nuts shall be provided with standard hexagonal heads. Gasket rings shall be used and shall be made of best quality rubber composition sheet packing one -eighth (1/8) inch thick, of a brand and quality approved by the Engineer. The pipe and fittings shall be properly aligned and free to move in any direction while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. H. Backfilling. 1. Backfill Material. All backfill material shall be free from cinders, ashes, refuse, vegetable or organic material, boulders, rocks or stones, or other unsuitable material. 15060 - 5 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS From 1 foot above the top of the pipe to the existing ground, however, material containing stones up to 4-inches in their greatest dimension may be used. Selected materials from trench excavations shall be used for backfilling except where special material is required. 2. Backfilling Under Pipe. Pipes shall be installed in a layer of special bedding material placed on the trench bottom. The special bedding material shall be crushed rock, screened gravel, or a combination thereof with a maximum size of 1/2-inch. The material shall have a minimum thickness beneath the pipe of 3-inches, and shall extend to a minimum of 6" above top of pipe. The material shall be placed in 3-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted under and on each side of the pipe. Backfill material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width on each side of the pipe, fitting, and appurtenance simultaneously. 3. Backfilling Over Pipe. From the centerline of the pipe, or from the top of the bedding, to a depth of 1 foot above the top of the pipe, the trench shall be backfilled by hand or by approved mechanical methods using materials free from rocks or boulders. The Contractor shall use special care in placing this portion of the backfill _ so as to avoid injuring or moving the pipe. 4. Backfilling to Grade. From 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finish grade shall be backfilled by tamping. When tamping, the material shall be placed in 6-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers to a density of at least 95 % of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Designation D-1557, Method B. All trenches shall be backfilled to grade as soon as possible after laying of the pipe. The Contractor shall backfill over all pipe laid each day to minimize the amount of open trench left overnight. 5. Fittings. Fittings shall be set at the locations shown on the plans or at locations as — established by the Engineer, and shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner heretofore specified for pipe installations. 6. Plugging Dead Ends. Standard plugs shall be inserted into the bells of all dead ends and pipes; tees, or crosses and spigot ends shall be capped. Plugs or caps shall be jointed to the pipe or fittings in the same manner used in jointing the pipe. I. Disinfection. Chlorinating materials shall conform to the following: 1. Hypochlorite, Sodium: AWWA B 300. 3.02 EXPOSED PIPING A. All exposed piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All piping runs -- shall be truly horizontal or vertical and parallel to adjacent building construction except where specifically shown otherwise on the drawings. Piping shall be adequately supported by temporary supports during installation. Permanent supports, as specified and as shown on the drawings, shall then be placed so that pipe loads are supported thereon. Small piping installed along walls or beneath roof slabs shall be adequately supported with approved devices. Spacing of such supports shall be as required to prevent deflection of the pipe between supports. 15060 - 6 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS M 3.03 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING A. Connections between new work and existing piping shall be made using fittings suitable for the conditions encountered. Each connection with an existing pipe shall be made at a time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to customers, and as authorized by the Owner. Facilities shall be provided for proper dewatering and for disposal of all water removed from the dewatered lines and excavations without damage to adjacent property. END OF SECTION 15060 M., t r r+ 15060 - 7 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS SECTION 15100 - VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Gate valves: Resilient seat and knife type. B. Check valves. C. Ball valves. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 15060 Pipes and Pipe Fittings 1.03 REFERENCES sr _EY if_ B. Check Valves 1. Mueller Co., Decatur, Illinois, or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cast Iron: ASTM A48 B. Bronze: ASTM B62 C. Neoprene Rubber: ASTM D2000, Grade 1BE625 2.03 VALVES A. Gate Valves 1. Provide single wedge, resilient seat type gate valves which conform to AWWA standard C500. Provide gate valves which will allow removal of the gate wedge for seal replacement without having to remove the valve from the piping system. 2. End Connections. Provide valves with end connections which comply with ANSI B 16.5 and the following schedule: a. Above ground: 125 lbs flanged 3. Construct the valve body of cast iron for a working pressure rating of 150 psi and a full round flow -way. 4. Construct the valve stem of bronze and provide two neoprene rubber O-ring seals on the stem. Provide a Teflon anti -friction washer above the thrust collar. 5. Provide a rubber seal which is mechanically retained on the gate wedge by 304 SS bolts. The gate will seal against a machined surface on the gate body. 6. Operators: Provide manual valve operators according to the following schedule: a. Above ground: Open stem and yoke with handwheel. B. Check Valves 1. Provide a check valve which conforms to AWWA Standard C508. 2. Construct the valve body and disc of cast iron suitable for a working pressure of 150 psi. Provide a removable opening on top of the valve body. 3. Provide bronze seats on the valve and disc. Provide a 304 SS shaft pin for the disc which rotates on bronze bushings. Use EPDM seals on the disc shaft. 4. Provide 125 lbs. flanged end connections which conform to ANSI B16.1. C. Air and Vacuum Release Valve 1. Air and vacuum valves shall be provided where shown on the drawings. Valves shall be float operated and shall close drip tight against a field replaceable Buna-N rubber seat. Valve body, cover, and internal baffle shall be of ASTM A 126 Grade B cast iron. Other internal parts such as guides, floats, stems, and bolts shall be of stainless steel. Valves shall be furnished complete with bronze inlet isolation valve. Air and vacuum valves shall be specifically designed for operation with potable water and shall be APCO Series 140, or equal. All openings will be covered with a 16-mesh or finer, corrosion - resistant screening material. 15100 - 2 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS r PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 15100 m" 0" 15100-3 VALVES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS r• SECTION 15200 - SEPTIC SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form apart of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text and by basic designation only. 30 TAC 285 - Design of OSSF, Texas Natural Resource Conservation Commission. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS A. New Septic Tank System and Drain Field Compensation for the septic tank system and drain field will be made at the contract price or lump sum price on each item and shall include materials, equipment, and labor required to install the septic system. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The septic tank and drain field shall be as located on the project plans. The septic system shall be installed by a licensed class 1 installer. The septic tank and drain field shall have the following characteristics: Minimum Septic Tank Volume - 1,000 gal. Minimum Drain Field Application Area - 1,000 fe 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300 Submittal Procedures: 1. Septic Tank (1,000 gal minimum) 2. Drain Field Design and Layout PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEPTIC TANK A. The septic tank shall have a minimum volume of 1,000 gal. and shall be made of concrete. The tank shall meet all guidelines established in ASTM C 1227 for Precast Concrete Septic Tanks. The approved type tank is a 1,000 gal. precast concrete septic tank made by Vaughn Concrete products or approved equal. 2.02 DRAIN FIELDS A. The drain field shall have a minimum area of 1,000 fe for disposal operations. Percolation tests will be performed at the proposed disposal site and those results will be provided to the Contractor for final design. 15200 - 1 °"' SEPTIC SYSTEM PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEPTIC SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION A. The septic system shall be constructed to meet all guidelines set forth in this specification in addition to any guidelines set forth by the Lubbock County On -Site Sewage Facility inspector. The septic tank shall not be placed greater than 6' depth, and the maximum depth of the drain field shall not be greater than five feet. END OF SECTION 15200 15200 - 2 SEPTIC SYSTEM